{"data":{"allMdx":{"nodes":[{"frontmatter":{"title":"Page not found","description":null},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Page not found\n---\n\nimport { Box } from '@xstyled/styled-components'\nimport { Article, ScreenContainer, Button } from '../components'\nimport { Link } from \"gatsby\"\nimport notFoundImageURL from '../images/404.png'\n\n<Article style={{ textAlign: 'center', overflow: 'hidden' }}>\n  <ScreenContainer mt={5} position=\"relative\">\n    <Box forwardedAs=\"h1\" m={0}>\n      There's a leak in the website.\n    </Box>\n    <Box\n      forwardedAs=\"img\"\n      alt=\"Leak illustration\"\n      src={notFoundImageURL}\n      width={500}\n      height=\"auto\"\n      mt={{ xs: '-20%', md: -100 }}\n      mb={{ xs: '-10%', md: -30 }}\n    />\n    <Box forwardedAs=\"p\" my={3} mx=\"auto\" fontSize=\"1.5em\">\n      The page you are looking for does not actually exist.\n    </Box>\n    <div>\n      <Button forwardedAs={Link} to=\"/\">\n        Back to home\n      </Button>\n    </div>\n  </ScreenContainer>\n</Article>\n","slug":"404"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"","description":null},"rawBody":"---\nslug: /docs/\ntitle: \"\"\norder: 0\n---\n\n\n# PathcoreFlow\n\n## User Manual\n\n[Release Notes - v4.3.1](https://docs.pathcore.com/flow/release-notes/v4.3.1/)\n\nPathcoreFlow is an enterprise workspace for digital pathology, with a focus on whole slide image management.\nIt consists of several tools for organization and collaboration, including the [Repository](/docs/repository/repository-overview/) &mdash; a virtual file system that is accessible from any internet-enabled device &mdash; and the [Viewer](/docs/viewer/overview/) &mdash; an image viewer optimized for whole slide images and that supports a [range of formats](/docs/overview/supported-formats/) from many scanner vendors.\n\n![PathcoreFlow Graphic](./images/flow-graphic.png)\n","slug":"docs/"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"","description":null},"rawBody":"---\nslug: /\nredirect: /docs/\n---\n","slug":""},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Universal LIS Connector","description":"universal lis connector"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: \"Universal LIS Connector\"\ndescription: universal lis connector\nsection: Integrations\norder: 15\n---\n\n\n# Universal LIS Connector\n##### \\[add-on] [BioPharma]\n\nThe Universal LIS Connector (ULC) is a flexible and low-code framework designed to make integration with third-party systems fast and cost-effective. In particular, ULC has been designed for ingesting metadata from laboratory information systems and other study metadata tracking systems into the image management systems.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  This integration requires the Universal LIS Connector add-on.\n</div>\n\nULC supports a comprehensive environment for digital pathology workflows. Some of the benefits provided by ULC vs bespoke integrations include:\n\n- Rapidly integrate any laboratory information system (LIS)\n- User configurable design allows changes without code\n- Seamless integration with platform search and auditing tools\n- Direct user control over [metadata synchronization](/docs/metadata/synchronization/) (retrieval and updates)\n- A compliant integration framework designed for regulated workflows\n- A secure framework built with modern IT best practices for integrations\n- Eliminates costly and bespoke and customer-managed integrations\n- Eliminates vendor lock-in with a truly universal and vendor neutral design\n\nWith the Universal LIS Connector, labs can ensure consistent data flow across their organization and scale digital pathology infrastructure without bottlenecks.\n\n\n## Intended Use Case\n\nThe Universal LIS Connector (ULC) enables bi-directional data exchange of metadata between the image management system and external systems. ULC is primarily intended to be used to exchange metadata between Laboratory Information Systems (LIS) and [Custom Fields](/docs/metadata/custom-fields/) associated with PathcoreFlow Repository items &mdash; such as images, files, and folders. Data exchange can be triggered as soon as an image is uploaded to the Repository, when browsing folders, and/or on demand by end users.\n\nWhenever metadata fields are added or updated in this way, existing values set by users are not overwritten, meaning this feature can be used to improve existing workflows without fear of losing historical data which had previously been manually entered.\n\n\n## Supported External Systems\n\nWhile the connector is designed to provide universal connectivity with laboratory information systems, it currently has been tested and validated with the following third-party systems:\n\n- TetraScience's Scientific Data and AI Platform\n- Instem's Provantis&reg; preclinical study management platform\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To configure an integration with a remote system </summary>\n\n In order to configure PathcoreFlow to communicate with your remote system, please contact [Pathcore Support](mailto:support@pathcore.com).\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/integrations/universal-lis-connector"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"HALO Integration","description":"halo integration"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: \"HALO Integration\"\ndescription: halo integration\nsection: Integrations\norder: 25\n---\n\n# HALO Integration\n##### \\[add-on] [on-prem]\n\nThe bi-directional integration between PathcoreFlow and the HALO image analysis software from Indica Labs provides capabilities for:\n\n- Using the HALO desktop application to perform image analysis on the images contained in the PathcoreFlow file Repository (without downloading images to your PC)\n- Automatic recognition of analysis results generated in the HALO application in PathcoreFlow\n- Ability to view and share analysis results with colleagues from the PathcoreFlow environment\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  This integration requires the HALO desktop application to be installed on the PC from which the integration is to be used, and the Bi-directional integration for Halo add-on for PathcoreFlow.\n</div>\n\n<br />\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  This integration is only available to customers that have an on-premise PathcoreFlow deployment. It is not available for cloud customers at this time.\n</div>\n\n\n## Integration Overview\n\nIn order to leverage the integration, image(s) must be launched from the PathcoreFlow environment using the **Open in Halo** context menu option. Doing so causes a SIS file to be downloaded. The SIS file is associated with the HALO application and when clicked will cause HALO &mdash; which is required to be installed on the user's PC &mdash; to launch with the selected image(s). At this stage in the workflow, PathcoreFlow only communicates metadata via the SIS file about the images that were selected for use in HALO.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  The integration requires that PathcoreFlow and HALO be able to access the same network storage system and for PathcoreFlow to have access to HALO’s GraphQL server.\n</div>\n\nOnce the HALO app has launched, the user follows the normal workflow in that application and can proceed to interact with the HALO database and to perform analysis as they would normally.\n\nAnalysis results need not be exported since PathcoreFlow will query HALO’s GraphQL server for available results, as required, when users work with images in the PathcoreFlow environment. At present, PathcoreFlow can retrieve segmentation results, and any quantitative results (key-value pairs) an app may have generated. It’s important to note that these results will be automatically associated with the image(s) they were created from. These associations are made since PathcoreFlow and HALO are accessing the same underlying storage system and because the HALO application uses the file paths to identify images in its database.\n\nFinally, users are able to view images via any web browser, overlaid with any segmentation results that may have been found by PathcoreFlow. Thus the results and images are accessible from the PathcoreFlow environment and there is no duplication of data, since HALO and PathcoreFlow share the same underlying storage system.\n\n\n## Open in HALO From PathcoreFlow\n\nOne or more images, or a single folder, can be opened in HALO from the PathcoreFlow Repository page. Images can also be launched from within the Viewer, though this workflow is limited to the current image in the Viewer.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To launch HALO with a selection of images from the Repository </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select one or more images by holding the **Ctrl** key (on Windows) or **&#x2318; / Command** key (on macOS) key and clicking on them\n\n 3. Bring up the [context menu](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 4. Click **Open in Halo**\n\n 5. A SIS file will be downloaded\n\n 6. Click on the downloaded SIS file to launch HALO\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Viewing Results in PathcoreFlow\n\nPathcoreFlow will automatically query HALO’s GraphQL server for the latest analysis results, as needed, when an image is opened in the Viewer or selected in the Repository page. If there is a need to refresh the results, simply refresh the browser by pressing the **F5** key or via the refresh button in PathcoreFlow.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To force PathcoreFlow to query HALO for the latest results </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select an image that is out of sync\n\n 3. Click on the **Analysis Results** tab of the right-hand panel. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed\n\n 4. Click on the **Refresh** button at the bottom of the panel\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Viewing Segmentation Results\n\nSegmentation results retrieved from HALO are automatically associated with the correct image. As a result, entries are created for each result in the [Overlays Panel](/docs/viewer/overlays/) of the Viewer and these results are automatically overlaid and rendered on top of the image.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To see the segmentation results </summary>\n\n 1. Open the image in the PathcoreFlow Viewer\n\n 2. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 3. Hover or click on the ![Overlays](../images/viewer-nav-layers.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 4. Look for entries following HALO's markup naming convention (e.g., \"<IMAGE-NAME\\>\\_job47_MarkupActualTif.tif\" or \"20170418092916_job_132_analysis.tif\")\n\n</details>\n\nThe results behave similar to other overlays and their properties (e.g., opacity, render mode, and pseudocolor) can be manipulated. See [Overlays](/docs/viewer/overlays/) for more details.\n\n\n### Viewing Quantitative Results\n\nAny quantitative results exported to PathcoreFlow can be seen in multiple locations for convenience. When receiving these results, PathcoreFlow automatically creates a String [Custom Field](/docs/metadata/custom-fields/) for each key-value pair that is exported.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To view quantitative results from the Repository </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select an image that has been processed with HALO\n\n 3. Click on the **Analysis Results** tab of the right-hand panel. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed\n\n 4. Look for the ![HALO](../images/integration-halo.svg) icon next to the fields listed to identify results exported from HALO\n\n 5. Click on the ![Plus](../images/viewer-panel-plus-square.svg) button to expand the quantitative results section\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To view quantitative results from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. Open the image in the PathcoreFlow Viewer\n\n 2. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 3. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 4. Look for the ![HALO](../images/integration-halo.svg) icon next to entries in the list of overlays\n\n 5. Click on the ![Plus](../images/viewer-panel-plus-square.svg) button to expand the quantitative results section\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/integrations/halo-integration"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Visiopharm Integration","description":"visiopharm integration"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: \"Visiopharm Integration\"\ndescription: visiopharm integration\nsection: Integrations\norder: 20\n---\n\n\n# Visiopharm Integration\n##### \\[add-on]\n\nThe bi-directional integration between PathcoreFlow and Visiopharm's image analysis software provides capabilities for:\n\n- Using the Visiopharm desktop application to perform image analysis on the images contained in the PathcoreFlow Repository (without downloading images to your PC)\n- One click export of analysis results generated in the Visiopharm application to the PathcoreFlow Repository\n- Ability to view and share analysis results with colleagues from the PathcoreFlow environment\n- Ability to export annotations generated in PathcoreFlow to Visiopharm\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  This integration requires the Visiopharm desktop application to be installed on the PC from which the integration is used as well as the Bi-directional integration for Visiopharm add-on.\n</div>\n\n\n## Integration Overview\n\nIn order to leverage the integration, image(s) must be launched from the PathcoreFlow environment using the **Open in VIS** context menu option. Doing so will launch the Visiopharm application &mdash; which is required to be installed on the user's PC &mdash; with the selected image(s). At this stage in the workflow, PathcoreFlow only communicates metadata about the images that were selected, enough for the Visiopharm application to locate these images.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  The integration is coordinated via PathcoreFlow’s API and is therefore very efficient, transferring the least data possible and only as needed.\n</div>\n\nOnce the Visiopharm app has launched, the user follows the normal workflow in that application and can proceed to interact with the Visiopharm database and to perform analysis as they would normally. Other than the occasional prompt for your PathcoreFlow credentials, it will be largely transparent to the user that the images being processed in Visiopharm actually reside in the PathcoreFlow database securely over the network, rather than their own local storage.\n\nAs necessary, analysis results can be exported to the PathcoreFlow Repository via a dedicated export button in the Visiopharm application. At present, Visiopharm exports an MLD file which may contain segmentation results, overlays and/or heatmaps, as well as any quantitative results (key-value pairs) an app may have generated. It’s important to note that these results will be automatically associated with the image(s) they were created from. These associations can be made because the **Open in VIS** option was used to trigger the process in the first place.\n\nFinally, users are able to view images overlaid along with any MLD results that may have been exported in the PathcoreFlow environment via any web browser. Thus the results and images live in a single database and can be shared and retained easily via the PathcoreFlow Repository.\n\n\n## Open in Visiopharm From PathcoreFlow\n\nOne or more images, or a single folder, can be opened with Visiopharm from the PathcoreFlow Repository page. Images can also be launched from within the Viewer, though this workflow is limited to the current image in the Viewer.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Where required, PathcoreFlow annotations that overlap with Visiopharm ROIs are clipped before being sent to Visiopharm, in order to adhere to MLD file specifications. Prior to v4.3, only overlapping PathcoreFlow annotations were clipped.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To launch Visiopharm with a selection of images from the Repository </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select one or more images by holding the **Ctrl** key (on Windows) or **&#x2318; / Command** key (on macOS) key and clicking on them\n\n 3. Bring up the [context menu](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 4. Click **Open in VIS**\n\n 5. Select the existing MLD to include, if any, from the **Include Overlay** dropdown\n    - **None**: no overlay is sent to Visiopharm\n    - **Most Recent**: include the overlay which was most recently added to PathcoreFlow\n    - _Overlay Name_: select a specific overlay by its uploaded timestamp and name\n\n 6. (Optional) In the popup menu, select **Include annotations as ROI** to send PathcoreFlow annotations to Visiopharm\n\n 7. (Optional) In the popup menu, select **Map annotation colors to different ROI types** to to map the PathcoreFlow annotation colors to Visiopharm ROIs (this step may be needed for Visiopharm apps that rely on specified ROI labels)\n\n 7. Click on the **Open** button to launch Visiopharm\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To launch Visiopharm with all files in the current folder </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Down Arrow](../images/nav-arrow-down.svg) button next to the current folder's breadcrumb\n\n 2. Click **Open in VIS**\n\n 3. Select the existing MLD(s) to include, if any, from the **Include Overlay** dropdown\n    - **None**: no overlay is sent to Visiopharm\n    - **Most Recent**: include the overlay which was most recently added to each image in PathcoreFlow\n\n 4. (Optional) In the popup menu, select **Include annotations as ROI** to send PathcoreFlow annotations to Visiopharm\n\n 5. (Optional) In the popup menu, select **Map annotation colors to different ROI types** to to map the PathcoreFlow annotation colors to Visiopharm ROIs (this step may be needed for Visiopharm apps that rely on specified ROI labels)\n\n 6. Click on the **Open** button to launch Visiopharm\n\n</details>\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Your browser may warn that PathcoreFlow is opening an application. If so, you must allow this to happen in order for Visiopharm to launch. You may also make this preference permanent to avoid the extra step in the future.\n</div>\n\n\n## Exporting Results to PathcoreFlow\n\nUse the **Upload to PACS/IMS** button from the Visiopharm application to export the results that have been generated back to PathcoreFlow. This option may only be available for images that have been launched via the integration (i.e using the **Open in VIS** button) AND if your Visiopharm _Default Application_ preference in PathcoreFlow is set to \"VIS\" (as opposed to \"VIS Basic\"). See [My Account](/docs/settings/my-account/) to change preferences.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To export results for an image to PathcoreFlow from Visiopharm </summary>\n\n 1. Click on **File** to open File menu\n\n 2. Under **File** menu, choose **Export** from the left-hand sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the **Upload to PACS/IMS** button\n\n</details>\n\nIf there are no errors in the Visiopharm application, export has happened successfully and the results should be visible in PathcoreFlow after several minutes. If multiple results are exported for the same image, PathcoreFlow will retain all of these results as well as the date/time they were exported.\n\nNewly received MLD files are immediately visible in the [Overlays Panel](/docs/viewer/overlays/) but they must be processed before their content becomes visible in the PathcoreFlow image Viewer. Refresh the page if you suspect a recent export from Visiopharm is not listed in the Overlays panel.\n\n\n## Viewing Results in PathcoreFlow\n\nVisiopharm may export an MLD file, if available, and any quantitative results that have been generated by the app in the form of key-value pairs.\n\n\n### Viewing MLD Results\n\nMLD files exported from Visiopharm are automatically associated with the correct image. These results are recorded as entries in the Overlays panel and the contents of the MLD files are automatically treated as an overlay and rendered on top of the image.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To see the MLD results </summary>\n\n 1. Open the image in the PathcoreFlow Viewer\n\n 2. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 3. Hover or click on the ![Overlays](../images/viewer-nav-layers.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 4. Look for entries ending in **.mld** in the list of overlays\n\n</details>\n\nMLD results behave similar to other overlays and their properties (e.g., opacity, render mode, and pseudocolor) can be manipulated. See [Overlays](/docs/viewer/overlays/) for more details.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  Heatmap results have an additional <b>Apply Color Lookup Table</b> option in the overlays panel, which allows a user to change how the data is visualized.\n</div></div>\n\n<br />\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  There may be multiple result sets exported from Visiopharm. Review the timestamp to differentiate these.\n</div>\n\n\n### Viewing Quantitative Results\n\nAny quantitative results exported to PathcoreFlow can be seen in multiple locations for convenience. When receiving these results, PathcoreFlow automatically creates a String [Custom Field](/docs/metadata/custom-fields/) for each key-value pair that is exported.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To view quantitative results from the Repository </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select an image that has been processed with Visiopharm\n\n 3. Click on the **Analysis Results** tab of the right-hand panel. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed\n\n 4. Look for the ![Visiopharm](../images/integration-vis.svg) icon next to the fields listed to identify results exported from Visiopharm\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To view quantitative results from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. Open the image in the PathcoreFlow Viewer\n\n 2. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 3. Hover or click on the ![Overlays](../images/viewer-nav-layers.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 4. Look for an entry named \"**LayerData.mld**\" in the list of overlays\n\n 5. Click on the ![Plus](../images/viewer-panel-plus-square.svg) button to expand the quantitative results section\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   Analysis results are also added to an image's <a href=\"../../metadata/custom-fields/\">custom metadata fields</a> and can be viewed from the <a href=\"../../viewer/information-panel/\">Image Information Panel</a>.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/integrations/visiopharm-integration"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Integrations Overview","description":"integrations overview"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: \"Integrations Overview\"\ndescription: integrations overview\nsection: Integrations\norder: 10\n---\n\n\n# Integrations Overview\n\n<br />\n\nPathcoreFlow has several integration packages available.\n\n## Laboratory Information Systems\n\nThe [Universal LIS Connector](/docs/integrations/universal-lis-connector/) add-on provides metadata synchronization with any laboratory information system. It has been tested and validated with the following third-party systems:\n\n- TetraScience's Scientific Data and AI Platform\n- Instem's Provantis&reg; preclinical study management platform\n\n\n## Image Analysis\n\nPathcoreFlow has integration packages for the following image analysis systems:\n\n- [Visiopharm](/docs/integrations/visiopharm-integration/)\n- [Indica Labs HALO](/docs/integrations/halo-integration/)\n","slug":"docs/integrations/integrations-overview"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Bulk Import","description":"bulk import"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Bulk Import\ndescription: bulk import\norder: 30\nsection: Metadata\n---\n\n\n# Bulk Import\n##### [BioPharma]\n\nMetadata fields can be imported from a CSV file in bulk. Values imported from CSV can be mapped to new or existing metadata fields and attached to any file in the Repository.\n\nWhen importing metadata from CSV, the entries in the first non-empty row will be treated as headers and the subsequent non-empty rows will be treated as metadata values. The values on each row will only be applied to a single file. The import process will attempt to identify the file in the Repository that matches each CSV row using the provided [File Naming Scheme](#file-naming-scheme). Once a file is matched to a row in the CSV, the selected values from the row will be attached to the file according to the field mapping defined.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To import metadata from a CSV file </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Fields** tab\n\n 3. Click on the **Import metadata** button\n\n 4. Click in the blue box to activate the CSV file selection dialog or simply drag a CSV file into the blue box\n\n 5. Define the **File Naming Scheme**. See [File Naming Scheme](#file-naming-scheme) for details\n\n 6. (Optional) From the **Choose a Field** dropdown menus, select or create a field that corresponds to each column of the CSV file (column names are shown adjacent to each dropdown menu). If a column is not assigned in this way, the values from that column are not imported\n\n 7. Click on the **Preview Changes** button to see the results\n\n 8. Click **Commit Changes** if satisfied with the summary of results. Otherwise, click on **CSV Mapping** to reopen that section and adjust the import settings\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   Once the changes have been committed, they cannot be undone.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## File Naming Scheme\n\nThe file naming scheme is used to associate rows of a CSV file with records in the Repository. It takes the form of a pattern used to assemble a file name from fixed text and column data from the CSV file. The file name computed for each row is matched against those in the database. If a single match is found, the specified metadata is applied to the record. If more than one record in the Repository would match, then this is considered a failed match and the metadata is not applied to any of them.\n\nThe first row of the CSV is assumed to be the header row and the remaining rows are assumed to be metadata that are imported. Headers that are enclosed in {} within the naming scheme are considered placeholders and are processed as defined above.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  Use the green <b>+</b> button beside a field to add that header as a placeholder in the file naming scheme template.\n</div></div>\n\n\n### Example\n\n1. Assuming the layout of an imported CSV file is:\n\n  | Study    | Animal | Dose Group | Stain |\n  | -------- | ------ | ---------- | ----- |\n  | 2021-365 | Dog    | 5          | H&E   |\n  | 2021-365 | Dog    | 6          | H&E   |\n\n2. And the File Naming Scheme is: `Image_{Study}_{Animal}_{Dose Group}.svs`\n\n3. The import process would match the rows in the CSV file to the following items in the Repository:\n   - Image_2021-365_Dog_5.svs\n   - Image_2021-365_Dog_6.svs\n","slug":"docs/metadata/bulk-import"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Custom Fields","description":"custom fields"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Custom Fields\ndescription: custom fields\norder: 15\nsection: Metadata\n---\n\n\n# Custom Fields\n##### [BioPharma]\n\nCustom Fields are key-value pairs that can be associated with files and folders in the Repository. Fields have properties that are convenient for tracking metadata, including:\n\n- Compatibility with [search](/docs/search/search-overview/) functions\n- Value types and input validators for enforcing correct data entry\n- A flag to indicate its value \"may contain PI\" for downstream anonymization\n- Can be grouped into [field sets](/docs/metadata/field-sets/) as template for recurring study types\n- User access to fields can be controlled via [permission flags](/docs/settings/permissions/#permission-flags)\n\nFields at the folder-level may be used to track general information about a particular case or study and fields at file-level may be used to track additional information (e.g., stain type of an image).\n\nSome fields are defined automatically by the system (i.e., System Fields) and others may be user defined (i.e., Custom Fields). To learn more about fields and their properties, see [Working With Custom Fields](#working-with-custom-fields).\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  To be able to change the properties of Custom Fields, special permissions are required. See <a href=\"../../settings/permissions/#permission-flags\">Permission Flags</a> or contact your administrator for more information.\n</div></div>\n\n\n## Working With Custom Fields\n\nFields are key-value pairs that can be associated with items (e.g., files, folders) in the Repository. Fields can be added or removed from items and field values can be edited by users that have the Edit metadata permission, see [Permission Flags](/docs/settings/permissions/#permission-flags).\n\nClicking on a ![Magnifying Glass](../images/repository-search.svg) icon next to a Custom Field value anywhere will trigger a search for all items in the Repository that have a field with the same value that was clicked. The search can then be modified to a different value for the same field from the search page.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Metadata fields that are marked with \"May contain PI\" will be hidden (field value will be \"Anonymized\") for users that do not have the \"View Protected Information\" permission.\n</div>\n\n\n### Working With Fields From the Repository\n\nFields associated with any item in the Repository can be edited from the Repository.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To view an item's Custom Fields </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select a single item in a folder\n\n 3. View fields in the **Metadata** tab of the right-hand panel, under the **Custom Fields** header. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To add Custom Fields to an item </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select a single item in a folder\n\n 3. View fields in the **Metadata** tab of the right-hand panel, under the **Custom Fields** header. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed\n\n 4. Click on the **Edit Metadata** button\n\n 5. In the popup dialog, click on the **Add Fields** dropdown menu\n\n 6. (Optional) Begin typing to search for a field by name\n\n 7. Select a field from the dropdown menu\n\n 8. Enter values for fields accordingly\n\n 9. Click on the **Update** button to save your changes, or click on the **X** button at the top right corner of the popup dialog to cancel\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   The <b>Edit Metadata</b> dialog can also be accessed from the <a href=\"../../repository/repository-operations/#context-menu\">context menu</a>. See <a href=\"../../repository/repository-operations/\">Repository Operations</a> for more details.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To edit a single Custom Field of an item </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select a single item in a folder\n\n 3. View fields in the **Metadata** tab of the right-hand panel, under the **Custom Fields** header. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed\n\n 4. Click on the value of the Custom Field in the panel\n\n 5. Change the value(s) of the field\n\n 6. Click outside of the editing box or press the **Enter** key to save. To discard your changes, press the **Escape** key\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to modify an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To edit multiple Custom Fields of an item </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select a single item in a folder\n\n 3. View fields in the **Metadata** tab of the right-hand panel, under the **Custom Fields** header. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed\n\n 4. Click on the **Edit Metadata** button\n\n 5. Change the value(s) of the listed field(s) accordingly, or clear the value by clicking on the gray **X** inside the field at the right-hand side\n\n 6. Click on the **Update** button to save your changes, or click on the **X** button at the top right corner of the popup dialog to cancel\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to modify an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete Custom Fields from an item </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select a single item in a folder\n\n 3. View fields in the **Metadata** tab of the right-hand panel, under the **Custom Fields** header. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed\n\n 4. Click on the **Edit Metadata** button\n\n 5. Click on the red **X** button at the far right-hand side, outside of a field, to remove it from the item\n\n 6. Click on the **Update** button to save your changes, or click on the **X** button at the top right corner of the popup dialog to cancel\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to modify an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Working With Fields From Within the Viewer\n\nFields associated with any item that is viewable in the Viewer can be edited from within the Viewer.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To view an item's Custom Fields </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. System and Custom Fields are displayed. You may need to scroll down to see them all\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To add Custom Fields to an item </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the **Edit Metadata** button\n\n 4. In the popup dialog, click on the **Add Fields** dropdown menu\n\n 5. (Optional) Begin typing to search for a field by name\n\n 6. Select a field from the dropdown menu\n\n 7. Enter values for fields accordingly\n\n 8. Click on the **Update** button to save your changes, or click on the **X** button at the top right corner of the popup dialog to cancel\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To edit a single Custom Field of an item </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the value of the Custom Field in the panel\n\n 4. Change the value(s) of the field\n\n 5. Click outside of the editing box or press the **Enter** key to save. To discard your changes, press the **Escape** key\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to modify an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To edit multiple Custom Fields of an item </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the **Edit Metadata** button\n\n 4. Change the value(s) of the listed field(s) accordingly, or clear the value by clicking on the gray **X** inside the field at the right-hand side\n\n 5. Click on the **Update** button to save your changes, or click on the **X** button at the top right corner of the popup dialog to cancel\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to modify an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete Custom Fields from an item </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the **Edit Metadata** button\n\n 4. Click on the red **X** button at the far right-hand side, outside of a field, to remove it from the item\n\n 5. Click on the **Update** button to save your changes, or click on the **X** button at the top right corner of the popup dialog to cancel\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to modify an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Custom Field Settings\n\nCustom Fields can be used to define metadata for tracking study or case information. Fields have properties such as a name, type, input validators to enforce correct data entry, and a PI flag that is used for anonymization.\n\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  Fields are accessible to users that have the appropriate permissions, see <a href=\"../../settings/permissions/\">Permissions</a>.\n</div></div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To view existing Custom Fields </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Fields** tab\n\n</details>\n\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To create a new Custom Field </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Fields** tab\n\n 3. Click on the **Create Field** button\n\n 4. Select a type of field from the **Type** dropdown menu. See [Field Types](#field-types) more information about types\n\n 5. Type in a name for the field in the **Name** area\n\n 6. (Optional) Select \"This field may contain protected information (PI)\" if the field may contain PI. See [Fields With PI](#fields-with-pi) for more information about anonymization\n\n 7. (Optional) Select the appropriate validators if applicable. See [Field Validators](#field-validators) for more information about data entry errors\n\n 8. (Optional) For \"Dropdown\" types, use the **+ Add option** button to define each option\n\n 9. Click on the **Create Field** button when finished\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Editing Custom Fields\n\nThe properties of existing fields can be edited so long as the changes do not invalidate existing values of the field. For instance:\n\n- The type of field should not be changed after it has been associated with an item\n- Options in a dropdown menu field should be removed cautiously after they have been associated with an item\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To edit the properties of an existing Custom Field </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Fields** tab\n\n 3. Select the field to be edited\n\n 4. Make changes as desired\n\n 5. Click on the **Save Field** button when finished, or click on the **Close** button to discard the changes\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Deleting Custom Fields\n\n<div class=\"warning\">\n  Deleting a field that is in use will affect all items in the Repository with that field.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete an existing Custom Field </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Fields** tab\n\n 3. Select the field to be deleted\n\n 4. Click on the **Delete Field** button\n\n 5. Click on the **Yes** button to confirm\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Fields With PI\n\nFields that contain protected information (PI) or other sensitive information may be marked as such. If the PI flag has been set/checked for a field, the application will replace the value of the field with \"Anonymized\" for users that do not have the correct permissions. See [Permission Flags](/docs/settings/permissions/#permission-flags) for more details.\n\n\n## Field Types\n\nAll fields, including System Fields and Custom Fields, have one of the following types:\n\n| Field Type     | Description                                                  |\n| -------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------ |\n| Text           | Single line text field. May be used for unstructured or structured data such as comments or barcodes. See [Field Validators](#field-validators) |\n| Numbers        | Supports integer and floating-point numeric values           |\n| Checkbox       | Supports true/false values                                   |\n| Dropdown       | Holds a single value from a list of possible options         |\n| Date           | A date field with calendar support for data entry            |\n| DateTime       | A field that holds a date and time. The user can enter the value using a popup calendar tool |\n| User           | A dropdown menu containing entries for all active users and users pending activation |\n\n\n## Field Validators\n\nField validators are used to enforce the correct entry of data by users. Users will not be allowed to enter data into fields that do not conform to the correct pattern, if a validator is defined. The following validators are available:\n\n| Field Type     | Validators                                               |\n| -------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------ |\n| Text           | **Min Length**: the minimum number of characters allowed<br />**Max Length**: the maximum number of characters allowed<br />**Pattern**: a regular expression conforming to [JS Regex](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/JavaScript/Guide/Regular_Expressions) standard |\n| Numbers        | **Integer**: if selected, requires an integer value; otherwise, floating point values are considered valid<br />**Minimum**: the minimum value allowed<br />**Maximum**: the maximum value allowed |\n| Checkbox       | n/a                                                          |\n| Dropdown       | n/a                                                          |\n| Date           | **Minimum**: the oldest value allowed<br />**Maximum**: the latest value allowed |\n| DateTime       | **Minimum**: the oldest value allowed<br />**Maximum**: the latest value allowed |\n| User           | n/a                                                          |\n\n<br />\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  The <b>Pattern</b> validator for text fields passes if the regular expression matches all or part of the input, unless the <code>^</code> and/or <code>$</code> anchors are used. See the <a href=\"https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/JavaScript/Guide/Regular_Expressions\">JS Regex reference</a> for details.\n</div></div>\n\n<br />\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  Validators are not enforced through the API and they are not enforced when fields are <a href=\"../bulk-import/\">imported from a CSV file</a>.\n</div></div>\n","slug":"docs/metadata/custom-fields"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Field Sets","description":"field sets"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Field Sets\ndescription: field sets\norder: 25\nsection: Metadata\n---\n\n\n# Field Sets\n##### [BioPharma]\n\nField sets may be used to group one or more fields. When a field set is applied to a folder or a file, all the fields from the set are attached in the order defined in the field set. Field sets can be used to create templates for recurring studies and are convenient for tracking and associating multiple fields to a file or folder at once.\n\n\n## Creating Field Sets\n\nEnsure that the fields needed for the field set have already been created, see [Working With Custom Fields](/docs/metadata/custom-fields/#working-with-custom-fields).\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To view existing field sets </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Field Sets** tab\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To create a new field set </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Field Sets** tab\n\n 3. Click on the **Create Field Set** button\n\n 4. Type in a name for the set in the **Field Set Name** area\n\n 5. Select from existing fields by using the **Add a field...** dropdown menu\n\n 6. Click on the **Save Field Set** button when finished\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Editing Field Sets\n\nField sets can be updated with new fields, and fields currently associated with the set can be removed.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Changes made to a field set will not be reflected in Repository items which have previously had said field set applied. Repository items will maintain their existing fields and values, in the order they were applied.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To edit a field set </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Field Sets** tab\n\n 3. Select the field set to be edited\n\n 4. (Optional) Type in a new name for the set in the **Field Set Name** area\n\n 5. (Optional) Select from existing fields by using the **Add a field...** dropdown menu\n\n 6. (Optional) Move a field up and down by clicking on the ![Drag](../images/table-drag-handle.svg) handle to the left of the field name and dragging it to the new position\n\n 7. (Optional) Remove a field from the set by clicking on the red **X** to the left of the field name\n\n 8. Click on the **Save Field Set** button when finished\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Duplicating Field Sets\n\nAn existing field set can be duplicated and then modified. This can save some time if you have multiple similar sets to prepare.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To duplicate a field set </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Field Sets** tab\n\n 3. Locate the field set to be duplicated\n\n 4. Click on the **Duplicate** button at the right of the row\n\n 5. (Optional) Type in a new name for the set in the **Field Set Name** area\n\n 6. (Optional) Select from existing fields by using the **Add a field...** dropdown menu\n\n 7. (Optional) Move a field up and down by clicking on the ![Drag](../images/table-drag-handle.svg) handle to the left of the field name and dragging it to the new position\n\n 8. (Optional) Remove a field from the set by clicking on the red **X** to the left of the field name\n\n 9. Click on the **Save Field Set** button when finished\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Applying Field Sets\n\nWhen a field set is applied to a folder or a file, all the fields from the set are attached in the order defined in the field set.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To apply a field set to a file or folder </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select a single item in a folder\n\n 3. View fields in the **Metadata** tab of the right-hand panel. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed\n\n 4. Click on the **Edit Metadata** button\n\n 5. In the popup dialog, click on the **Add Fields** dropdown menu\n\n 6. (Optional) Begin typing to search for a field set by name\n\n 7. Select a field set from the dropdown menu\n\n 8. (Optional) Enter values for the newly added fields\n\n 9. Click on the **Update** button to save your changes, or click on the **X** button at the top right corner of the popup dialog to cancel\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Deleting Field Sets\n\nDeleting field sets does not remove the associated fields or the values applied to files/folders. Please see [Deleting Custom Fields](/docs/metadata/custom-fields/#deleting-custom-fields) if you would like to remove the fields.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete a field set </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Field Sets** tab\n\n 3. Select the field set to be deleted\n\n 4. Click on the **Delete Field Set** button\n\n 5. Click on the **Yes** button to confirm\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/metadata/field-sets"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"","description":null},"rawBody":"---\nredirect: /docs/metadata/tags/\n---\n","slug":"docs/metadata/"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"","description":null},"rawBody":"---\nredirect: /docs/integrations/integrations-overview/\n---\n","slug":"docs/integrations/"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Synchronization","description":"synchronization"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Synchronization\ndescription: synchronization\norder: 20\nsection: Metadata\n---\n\n\n# Synchronization\n##### \\[add-on] [BioPharma]\n\nMetadata can be synchronized from an external system, such as a laboratory information system (LIS), via the [Universal LIS Connector](/docs/integrations/universal-lis-connector/) (ULC).\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  The Universal LIS Connector add-on is required to synchronize metadata from a third-party system.\n</div>\n\n\n## Viewing Synchronized Metadata\n\nMetadata which come from a third-party system are applied to items in the Repository as [Custom Fields](/docs/metadata/custom-fields/). Users can modify the value of these Custom Fields after they are added from the third-party system, and subsequent synchronization will not automatically overwrite their changes.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To see synchronized metadata fields from the Repository </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select an image or folder from the folder listing\n\n 3. Locate the **Custom Fields** header in the **Metadata** tab of the right-hand panel. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed\n\n 4. Look for the ![Bolt](../images/repository-lis-connector.svg) icon next to the fields listed to identify which were synchronized from a third-party system\n\n 5. (Optional) Hover over the ![Bolt](../images/repository-lis-connector.svg) icon to display the name of the third-party system that provided the field's value\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To see synchronized metadata fields from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. Open the image in the PathcoreFlow Viewer\n\n 2. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 3. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 4. Look for the ![Bolt](../images/viewer-panel-lis-connector.svg) icon next to the fields listed to identify which were synchronized from a third-party system\n\n 5. (Optional) Hover over the ![Bolt](../images/viewer-panel-lis-connector.svg) icon to display the name of the third-party system that provided the field's value\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To see the last time fields were synchronized for an item </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select an image or folder from the folder listing\n\n 3. Look for the relative time (e.g., \"5 minutes ago\", \"an hour ago\") to the right of the **Custom Fields** header in the **Metadata** tab of the right-hand panel. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed\n\n 4. (Optional) To get the precise date and time of synchronization, hover over the relative time to display the exact time the sync occurred in the local timezone\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To identify synchronized metadata fields which have been changed by a user </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select an image or folder from the folder listing\n\n 3. Locate the **Custom Fields** header in the **Metadata** tab of the right-hand panel. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed\n\n 4. Look for the ![Faded Bolt](../images/repository-lis-connector-grey.svg) (greyed-out) icon next to the fields listed to identify which have values that have been changed by a user\n\n 5. (Optional) Hover over the ![Faded Bolt](../images/repository-lis-connector-grey.svg) (greyed-out) icon to display the name of the user who modified the value\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Synchronizing Metadata\n\nThere are three actions that may cause the metadata for an item to be synchronized from the third-party system:\n\n1. Uploading an image\n2. Viewing an image or navigating to a folder\n3. On demand by a user\n\nThese can be individually enabled or disabled when [configuring the connection](/docs/integrations/universal-lis-connector/#supported-external-systems).\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Only fields which do not have a user-defined value are synchronized.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To manually synchronize metadata for an item from the Repository right-hand panel </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select an image or folder from the folder listing\n\n 3. Click on the **Custom Fields** header in the **Metadata** tab of the right-hand panel. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed\n\n 4. In the dropdown menu, click on **Update Fields**\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to manually sync metadata for an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To manually synchronize metadata for an item from a context menu </summary>\n\n It is possible to trigger synchronization from the [context menu](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#context-menu) for an item. The context menu is available in folder listings, search results, and from the ![Down Arrow](../images/nav-arrow-down.svg) button next to an item's name in the breadcrumb or right-hand panel.\n\n 1. Bring up the context menu for an item.\n\n 2. Click **Update Fields**\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to manually sync metadata for an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n### Forced Synchronization\n\nWhen synchronization is forced for an item, all metadata fields which have a value in the third-party system are retrieved and replace the current Custom Field values in PathcoreFlow. This will replace any values which users have manually updated, so caution is recommended.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To force synchronization of metadata for an item from the Repository right-hand panel </summary>\n\n <div class=\"warning\">\n   This will overwrite all Custom Field values which have a value in the remote system, including any which users have manually updated.\n </div>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select an image or folder from the folder listing\n\n 3. Click on the **Custom Fields** header in the **Metadata** tab of the right-hand panel. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed\n\n 4. In the dropdown menu, click on **Update Fields (Forced)**\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to manually sync metadata for an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To force synchronization of metadata for an item from a context menu </summary>\n\n <div class=\"warning\">\n   This will overwrite all Custom Field values which have a value in the remote system, including any which users have manually updated.\n </div>\n\n It is possible to force synchronization from the [context menu](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#context-menu) for an item. The context menu is available in folder listings, search results, and from the ![Down Arrow](../images/nav-arrow-down.svg) button next to an item's name in the breadcrumb or right-hand panel.\n\n 1. Bring up the context menu for an item.\n\n 2. Click **Update Fields (Forced)** \n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to manually sync metadata for an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/metadata/synchronization"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"System Fields","description":"system fields"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: System Fields\ndescription: system fields\norder: 10\nsection: Metadata\n---\n\n\n# System Fields\n\n<br />\n\nSome metadata fields are automatically defined by the system for all Repository items. The table below summarizes the fields that are automatically generated for each type of item in the Repository.\n\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  Not all System Fields are searchable. Only the <b>Name</b>, <b>Created</b>, <b>Last Modified</b>, and <b>Status</b> fields can be used in search expressions. See <a href=\"../../search/search-overview/\">Search</a> for more details.\n</div></div>\n\n| Field Name                                                   |           | Repository Item Types |              |\n| ------------------------------------------------------------ | :-------: | :-------------------: | :----------: |\n|                                                              | **Image** | **Attachment**        | **Folder/Other** |\n| Name<br />*the name of an item*                              |     x     |       x               |      x       |\n| Description<br />*a long text description of an item*        |     x     |       x               |      x       |\n| Created<br />*datetime of creation*                          |     x     |       x               |      x       |\n| Size<br />*file size in bytes*                               |     x     |       x               |      x       |\n| Location<br />*name of the parent folder of an item*         |     x     |       x               |      x       |\n| Status<br />*current status of an item within the Repository* |    x     |       x               |              |\n| Image Dimensions<br />*maximum image dimensions in pixels*   |     x     |                       |              |\n| Magnification<br />*highest magnification available in a whole slide image (if available)* | x | | |\n\n\n## Editing System Fields\n\nWith the exception of the **Name** and **Description** fields, System Fields are read-only.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  The <b>Name</b> field can only be edited by users with appropriate permissions. See <a href=\"../../settings/permissions/\">Permissions</a> for details.\n</div></div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To edit the name of a file or folder </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Bring up the [context menu](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#context-menu) for the item\n\n 3. Click **Rename**\n\n 4. In the popup dialog, type a new name for the item\n\n 5. Click on the **Rename** button or press the **Enter** key to save. To discard your changes, click on the **Cancel** button or press the **Escape** key\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to rename an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To edit the description of a file or folder </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select a single item in a folder\n\n 3. View the current description in the **Metadata** tab of the right-hand panel, under the **Description** header. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed\n\n 4. Click on the current description text (or **Add Description** if nothing has yet been written)\n\n 4. Type a description of the image\n\n 5. Click on the **Save** button to save the changes, or click on the **Cancel** button to discard the changes\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to change the description of an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/metadata/system-fields"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Tags","description":"tags"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Tags\ndescription: tags\norder: 5\nsection: Metadata\n---\n\n\n# Tags\n\n<br />\n\nTags provide a mechanism to recall items from the Repository faster (e.g., tag images for an upcoming presentation or to collate interesting images). Each item in the Repository can have more than one tag associated with it.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Tags are private to the user that created them and cannot be shared at this time.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To tag a file or folder </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select a single item in a folder\n\n 3. Locate the **Add a tag..** dropdown menu in the **Metadata** tab of the right-hand panel. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed\n\n 4. Choose a tag from the **Add a tag..** dropdown menu. To create a new tag, type directly into the field and click on the **+ New tag** option\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To remove a tag from a file or folder </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select a single item in a folder\n\n 3. From the **Metadata** tab of the right-hand panel, click the **X** button beside the tag to be removed. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To see all items with a given tag </summary>\n\n 1. In the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) under the **TAGS** section, click on the tag name, or\n\n 2. If the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) is collapsed, hover over the **TAGS** icon then click on the tag name in the popout panel\n\n 3. In the Tag view:\n    - Tagged files are listed in the Files section\n    - Tagged folders are listed in the Folders section\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To edit a tag's name </summary>\n\n 1. In the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) under the **TAGS** section, click on the tag name to navigate to the tag page\n\n 2. At the top of the page, adjacent to the tag's name, click on the **Edit** button\n\n 3. Edit the name in the textbox that appears\n\n 4. Click on the **Save** button to change the name, or click on the **Cancel** button to discard the changes\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete a tag </summary>\n\n 1. In the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) under the **TAGS** section, click on the tag name to navigate to the tag page\n\n 2. Click on the **Delete Tag** button\n\n 3. Confirm to delete the tag and dissociate it from all Repository items\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/metadata/tags"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"HTTPS","description":"https"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: HTTPS\ndescription: https\norder: 50\nsection: On-Premise\n---\n\n# HTTPS\n\n<br />\n\nBy default, an on-premise deployment serves content via unsecured HTTP on port 80. To enable secure connections using HTTPS (port 443), a valid TLS/SSL certificate is required that is either self-signed or from a certificate authority (CA). These are the steps needed to configure HTTPS after a valid certificate is acquired.\n\n\n## Managing HTTPS\n\nTo enable HTTPS, some environment variables need to be changed in the `.env` file. For additional information on changing the environment for PathcoreFlow, see [Configuration](/docs/on-premise/configuration/). The minimum configuration needed is:\n\n- The `HTTP_ONLY` environment variable must disabled via the `.env` configuration file\n- The certificate and key files ([purchased](#purchased-certificates), [self-signed](#self-signed-certificates), or from [Let's Encrypt](#lets-encrypt)) must be placed in the directory defined in `PCW_SSL_DIR`\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Certificates should be renewed with the appropriate certificate authority and updated in PathcoreFlow before they expire.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To configure PathcoreFlow to use HTTPS </summary>\n\n 1. Place the certificate and key files in the appropriate directory on the host server or VM. By default, the following path and names are used:\n\n    - Certificate directory: `/opt/pathcore/certs`\n    - Certificate file: `fullchain.pem`\n    - Key file: `privkey.pem`\n\n    <div class=\"info\">\n      These files must be in the PEM format.\n    </div>\n\n 2. Use your preferred text editor to update the relevant environment variables in the `.env` file (the default location for this file is `/opt/pathcore/compose/.env`)\n\n    1. `PCW_SSL_DIR=/opt/pathcore/certs`: the path to the directory containing the certificate and key files:\n\n    2. `PCW_HTTP_ONLY=0`: enable HTTPS\n\n    3. (Optional) `PCW_SECURE_COOKIES=1`: only allow user sessions via HTTPS. Enable this only if all users will be connecting to the PathcoreFlow service via HTTPS\n\n 3. [Restart the affected service components](/docs/on-premise/configuration/#restarting-components)\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To use a different certificate or key filename </summary>\n\n 1. Use your preferred text editor to add the following environment variables to the `.env` file (the default location for this file is `/opt/pathcore/compose/.env`)\n\n    1. `PCW_SSL_CERT_NAME=server_cert.pem`: to change the filename of the certificate file\n\n    2. `PCW_SSL_KEY_NAME=server_key.pem`: to change the filename of the key file\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To update the certificate </summary>\n\n 1. Backup the existing certificate and key files\n\n 2. Place the new certificate file(s) in the appropriate directory on the host server or VM. By default, this is `/opt/pathcore/certs`\n\n    <div class=\"info\">\n      These files must be in the PEM format.\n    </div>\n\n 3. [Restart the affected service components](/docs/on-premise/configuration/#restarting-components)\n\n <div class=\"warning\">\n   It is recommended to backup the existing files before overwriting them.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Purchased Certificates\n\nWhen purchasing certificates from a certificate service you must first provide them with a Certificate Signing Request (CSR). Creating a CSR is out of scope for this documentation.\n\nOnce you have received the certificate bundle you will need to create the full certificate chain to use as your certificate. This will help prevent issues with older browsers and operating systems.\n\nThe certificate issuer should provide documentation on how to create a certificate chain. In general, the certificates from the bundle need to be combined in a specific order:\n- Server Certificate -> Intermediate Certificate(s) -> CA Root Certificate\n\n<div class=\"warning\">\n  The certificate bundle MUST start with the server certificate, then any intermediary certificates, then the root certificate. If there are multiple intermediary certificates they need to be added in the correct order.\n</div>\n\nHere is an example command to generate a certificate chain bundle. This command is for illustrative purposes &mdash; the actual command will vary depending on certificate issuer. Here we also assume you have all of your certificate files supplied by the issuer in one directory on a Linux server.\n\n```bash\ncat ComodoRSAAddTrustCA.crt \\\n    ExtendedvalidationSecureServerCA.crt \\\n    AddTrustExternalCARoot.crt > fullchain.pem\n```\n\n\n## Self-Signed Certificates\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Self-signed certificates are only accepted by browsers where users have manually added the self-signed certificate to their list of trusted certificates.\n</div>\n\nOpenSSL can be used to generate the key and certificate files for a self-signed certificate:\n\n```bash\nopenssl req -newkey rsa:2048 -new -nodes -x509 -days 365 \\\n    -keyout privkey.pem -out fullchain.pem\n```\n\nFor more information on the `openssl req` command line options, see the [openssl-req manpage](https://www.openssl.org/docs/manmaster/man1/openssl-req.html).\n\n\n## Let's Encrypt\n\n[Let's Encrypt](https://letsencrypt.org/) is a free, automated, and open Certificate Authority (CA). You can read more about the services they offer and how to subscribe on their [documentation page](https://letsencrypt.org/docs/).\n\nTo use Let's Encrypt with PathcoreFlow:\n\n- PathcoreFlow must be externally accessible via TCP ports 80 (HTTP) and 443 (HTTPS)\n- `PCW_HOST` must be set to a valid hostname which routes to PathcoreFlow. See [Configuration - Environment Variables](/docs/on-premise/configuration/#environment-variables) for more details on how to set this value\n- [`certbot`](https://certbot.eff.org/) must be installed on the host server or VM\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To configure PathcoreFlow to use Let's Encrypt </summary>\n\n 1. Enable HTTPS via the [environment variables described above](#managing-https)\n\n 2. Use your preferred text editor to update the relevant environment variables in the `.env` file (the default location for this file is `/opt/pathcore/compose/.env`)\n\n    1. `PCW_ENABLE_CERTBOT=1`: enable the `certbot` automation\n\n    2. `PCW_CERTBOT_EMAIL=your@email.address`: an email address to receive communications from Let's Encrypt\n\n 3. Request the initial certificate by running the `certbot.sh` script manually:\n\n    ```bash\n    /opt/pathcore/compose/scripts/certbot.sh\n    ```\n\n 4. [Restart the affected service components](/docs/on-premise/configuration/#restarting-components)\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To renew a Let's Encrypt certificate </summary>\n\n If the `pathcoreflow-maintenance.timer` systemd unit is installed and enabled, then the certificate should be automatically renewed 30 days before it expires.\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/on-premise/https"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Configuration","description":"configuration"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Configuration\ndescription: configuration\norder: 35\nsection: On-Premise\n---\n\n# Configuration\n\n<br />\n\nAfter installing PathcoreFlow on your server or virtual machine host, some additional configuration may be required to work in your environment.\n\n## Restarting Components\n\nAt some points during configuration, one or more of the PathcoreFlow components will need to be restarted.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To restart changed components </summary>\n\n At a command line for the system hosting PathcoreFlow:\n\n 1. Change to the PathcoreFlow compose directory (e.g., `/opt/pathcore/compose`):\n\n    ```bash\n    cd /opt/pathcore/compose\n    ```\n\n 2. Use Docker Compose to restart any services which have changed:\n\n    ```bash\n    sudo docker compose up -d --force-recreate\n    ```\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Environment Variables\n\nMost of the configuration of PathcoreFlow is accomplished by setting environment variables. This is accomplished by editing the `.env` file which is read by Docker Compose when starting PathcoreFlow services. The default location for this file is `/opt/pathcore/compose/.env`.\n\nIf you installed PathcoreFlow using the recommended installer script, most of these values have already been set appropriately. Typically, all that remains to configure are the mail server settings.\n\n### Variables\n\nThe variables defined in the `.env` file and their default values are shown below.\n\n- **`PCW_VERSION`**  \n  (default: )  \n  The version of PathcoreFlow which is installed\n\n- **`PCW_POSTGRES_VERSION`**  \n  (default: `14`)  \n  The database software version\n\n- **`PCW_HOST`**  \n  (default: )  \n  The hostname for accessing PathcoreFlow\n\n- **`PCW_INSTALL_DIR`**  \n  (default: `/opt/pathcore`)  \n  The directory where PathcoreFlow is installed\n\n- **`PCW_DB_USER`**  \n  (default: `pathcore_web`)  \n  The username for database access\n\n- **`PCW_DB_NAME`**  \n  (default: `pathcore_web`)  \n  The name of the database\n\n- **`PCW_DB_PASS`**  \n  (default: )  \n  The password for database access\n\n- **`PCW_DB_DIR`**  \n  (default: `${PCW_INSTALL_DIR:-/opt/pathcore}/postgres`)  \n  The directory which will store database files\n\n- **`PCW_BACKUP_DIR`**  \n  (default: `${PCW_INSTALL_DIR:-/opt/pathcore}/backups`)  \n  The directory for keeping backup files\n\n- **`PCW_BACKUP_DAYS`**  \n  (default: `30`)  \n  The number of days to keep backups\n\n- **`PCW_IIS_DIR`**  \n  (default: `${PCW_INSTALL_DIR:-/opt/pathcore}/iis`)  \n  The directory used by the Image Indexing Service for its files\n\n- **`PCW_FILES_DIR`**  \n  (default: `${PCW_INSTALL_DIR:-/opt/pathcore}/files`)  \n  The directory where PathcoreFlow will store image and attachment files\n\n- **`PCW_SSL_DIR`**  \n  (default: `${PCW_INSTALL_DIR:-/opt/pathcore}/certs`)  \n  The directory containing [HTTPS](/docs/on-premise/https/) certificate and key files, if enabled\n\n- **`PCW_STATIC_DIR`**  \n  (default: `${PCW_INSTALL_DIR:-/opt/pathcore}/nginx-webroot`)  \n  Files placed in this directory can be accessed via HTTP under `/.well-known/`. This can be used by Let's Encrypt to automatically manage certificates. More information about setting up Let's Encrypt can be found on the [HTTPS](/docs/on-premise/https/#lets-encrypt) page\n\n- **`PCW_HTTP_ONLY`**  \n  (default: `1`)  \n  When enabled, only serve content over HTTP. Set to `0` to enable [HTTPS](/docs/on-premise/https/)\n\n- **`PCW_SECURE_COOKIES`**  \n  (default: `0`)  \n  Enable (set to `1`) to only allow session cookies over HTTPS connection\n\n- **`PCW_ENABLE_CERTBOT`**  \n  (default: `0`)  \n  Enable (set to `1`) to activate `certbot` &mdash; a tool to maintain TLS certificates from [Let's Encrypt](https://letsencrypt.org/)\n\n- **`PCW_CERTBOT_EMAIL`**  \n  (default: )  \n  The email address to use with the Let's Encrypt service\n\n- **`PCW_SSL_CERT_NAME`**  \n  (default: `fullchain.pem`)\n  The filename of the HTTPS certificate file\n\n- **`PCW_SSL_KEY_NAME`**  \n  (default: `privkey.pem`)\n  The filename of the HTTPS certificate key file\n\n- **`PCW_SECRET_KEY`**  \n  (default: )  \n  The key used for encrypting secrets in PathcoreFlow. This is set automatically by the installer script\n\n- **`PCW_MAIL_HOST`**  \n  (default: )  \n  The hostname of the SMTP server\n\n- **`PCW_MAIL_PORT`**  \n  (default: `25`)  \n  The port used for SMTP\n\n- **`PCW_MAIL_USER`**  \n  (default: )  \n  The username used for email authentication\n\n- **`PCW_MAIL_PASS`**  \n  (default: )  \n  The password used for email authentication\n\n- **`PCW_IMAGE_CACHE_DIR`**  \n  (default: `${PCW_INSTALL_DIR:-/opt/pathcore}/cache`)  \n  The directory where the web cache files are stored\n\n- **`PCW_IMAGE_CACHE_MAX_SIZE`**  \n  (default: `10g`)  \n  The maximum size of the web cache\n\n- **`PCW_FIGURE_MAKER_BASE_URL`**  \n  (default: `*`)  \n  The base URL used when generating Figures for export\n\n- **`GITLAB_REGISTRY_HOST`**  \n  (default: `registry.gitlab.com`)  \n  The hostname of the container image registry\n\n- **`GITLAB_REGISTRY_USER`**  \n  (default: )  \n  The username used for retrieving container images from the registry\n\n- **`GITLAB_REGISTRY_PASS`**  \n  (default: )  \n  The password used for retrieving container images from the registry\n\n\n## Docker Configuration\n\nThe recommended way to apply custom settings to the PathcoreFlow Docker Compose configuration is to create an override file. This allows you to make the changes needed without losing them when the base `docker-compose.yml` file is replaced in an update.\n\nAny features in this manual that require modifying the base Docker Compose configuration will provide example override files.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To apply a custom a Docker Compose configuration </summary>\n\n <div class=\"warning\">\n   This will cause the PathcoreFlow services to be temporarily unavailable.\n </div>\n\n 1. Change to the directory containing the PathcoreFlow Docker Compose configuration. e.g., for the default install location of `/opt/pathcore/compose`:\n\n    ```bash\n    cd /opt/pathcore/compose\n    ```\n\n 2. Use your preferred text editor to create or edit the `docker-compose.override.yml` file:\n\n    ```bash\n    nano docker-compose.override.yml\n    ```\n\n 3. Apply the changes to the YAML as needed. The [Compose file reference](https://docs.docker.com/reference/compose-file/) can be found in the official Docker documentation\n\n 4. [Restart the affected service components](#restarting-components)\n\n</details>\n\nYou can find more information about how [Docker Compose merges](https://docs.docker.com/compose/how-tos/multiple-compose-files/merge/) these configuration files on the official Docker documentation site.\n\n[Pathcore Support](mailto:support@pathcore.com) can also provide assistance with the changes necessary to enable PathcoreFlow features.\n\n\n## Further Configuration\n\nYou can refer to the following pages to configure additional features specific to hosting PathcoreFlow on premise.\n\n- [HTTPS](/docs/on-premise/https/)\n","slug":"docs/on-premise/configuration"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Installation","description":"installation"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Installation\ndescription: installation\norder: 30\nsection: On-Premise\n---\n\n# Installation\n\n<br />\n\nThis page details the steps to install PathcoreFlow to an on-premise server or virtual machine (VM). This is not applicable to any customers of Pathcore's cloud services.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  For additional assistance with installation of PathcoreFlow to a server or virtual machine, please reach out to your account manager to ask about our installation support service.\n</div>\n\n\n## Prerequisites\n\nIn addition to the [Technical Requirements](/docs/on-premise/technical-requirements/) you will require:\n\n- [Docker](https://www.docker.com/) Container Engine installed and updated to the latest stable version\n    - Including Docker Compose plugin\n- The server or VM hostname and/or static IP address where users will access the PathcoreFlow service\n- The installation script (`pathcoreflow-vX.Y.Z-installer.sh`) provided by Pathcore Support\n\n\n## Installation Instructions\n\nStandard installation of PathcoreFlow is performed using the `pathcoreflow-vX.Y.Z-installer.sh` script provided by Pathcore Support.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To install PathcoreFlow </summary>\n\n 1. Transfer the install script to the server or VM which will host PathcoreFlow. This is typically done via [SSH File Transfer Protocol (SFTP)](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/SSH_File_Transfer_Protocol) (e.g., the `scp` command) to somewhere temporary (e.g., `/tmp`)\n\n 3. Log in to the server or VM hosting PathcoreFlow and run the install script, e.g.:\n\n    ```bash\n    bash /tmp/pathcoreflow-v4.2.0-installer.sh\n    ```\n\n    <div class=\"info\"><div>\n      The script should be executed by a user with <code>sudo</code> access. Your password may be requested to perform some tasks.\n    </div></div>\n\n 4. Follow the prompts for information. You will be asked to provide the following information:\n\n    - The UID (User ID) and GID (Group ID) for the user that will own the database files\n    - The hostname or IP address that will be used to access PathcoreFlow\n    - A team name (this can be changed later)\n    - The name, email address, and password for the initial administrator user\n\n 5. A summary is displayed after installing, and your PathcoreFlow service should be available at the listed URL\n\n</details>\n\n\n## After Installation\n\nAfter completing the initial installation, you may also need to perform some additional [configuration](/docs/on-premise/configuration/) for certain features.\n\n\n## Support\n\nPathcore also offers specialized technical support services designed for on-premise deployments. These services are designed to support customer IT teams with installation and maintenance of Pathcore software.\n\nThese services can accommodate standard or non-standard deployments and provide custom solutions when required. Ask your account manager for more information about support services we offer.\n","slug":"docs/on-premise/installation"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Maintenance and Backups","description":"maintenance and backups"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Maintenance and Backups\ndescription: maintenance and backups\norder: 90\nsection: On-Premise\n---\n\n# Maintenance and Backups\n\n<br />\n\nWhen PathcoreFlow is deployed to an on-premise server or virtual machine (VM), there is the option to use the [systemd](https://systemd.io/) service manager to schedule a daily maintenance script. This script performs several tasks, including managing backups.\n\nThe systemd timer unit is named `pathcoreflow-maintenance.timer`, and defaults to running the maintenance script daily at 04:00 am (server or VM time). Your server administrator can add another timer if you wish to run the maintenance tasks more or less frequently, though creating a systemd timer is beyond the scope of this document.\n\n\n## Backup Tasks\n\nThe maintenance script manages daily backups automatically, according to the configuration settings set in the `.env` file. For example, `PCW_BACKUP_DIR` defines where backups are stored. For more details about environment variables, see [Configuration](/docs/on-premise/configuration/).\n\nThe following items are backed up:\n\n- PathcoreFlow database - this holds all of PathcoreFlow's hierarchical data, metadata, and user information. This does not include image data\n\n- Docker Compose configuration - the configuration files describing how to retrieve and run the container images for PathcoreFlow components. This includes any customizations you may have added\n\n- Image Indexing Service database - this is used by IIS for managing which items it has already detected and processed. This is only relevant if you have the Image Indexing Service add-on\n\n### Backup Rotation\n\nOne of the maintenance tasks is to clean up old backups, to free up disk space. This task removes backups older than `PCW_BACKUP_DAYS` days old. By default this will keep 30 days of backups.\n\n### Running a Manual Backup\n\nSometimes it is desirable to run a backup outside of its regular schedule, for example before installing an [update](/docs/on-premise/update/).\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To backup PathcoreFlow </summary>\n\n 1. Log in to the server or VM hosting PathcoreFlow\n\n 2. Run the maintenance script as root (administrator) to perform all backup steps:\n\n    ```bash\n    sudo /opt/pathcore/compose/scripts/maintenance.sh\n    ```\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   This example assumes you have installed PathcoreFlow in the default directory: <code>/opt/pathcore</code>.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n### Restoring from a Backup\n\nAt times, it may be necessary to restore your PathcoreFlow service to an earlier time.\n\n<div class=\"warning\">\n  After you restore, any work done or changes made since the time of the backup will be lost.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To restore the PathcoreFlow database from a backup </summary>\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you encounter a problem while restoring, or don't feel confident performing these tasks on your own, please contact <a href=\"mailto:support@pathcore.com\">Pathcore Support</a> for options.\n </div></div>\n\n 1. Log in to the server or VM hosting PathcoreFlow\n\n 2. Change to the directory containing the PathcoreFlow Docker Compose configuration and stop the PathcoreFlow services. e.g., for the default install location of `/opt/pathcore/compose`:\n\n    ```bash\n    cd /opt/pathcore/compose\n    sudo docker compose down\n    ```\n\n 3. Move the directory pointed to by `PCW_DB_DIR` (to preserve it in case a problem occurs when restoring) and create a new, empty directory to replace it with the same owner and permissions.\n\n 4. Start the `postgres` container on its own:\n\n    ```bash\n    cd /opt/pathcore/compose\n    sudo docker compose up -d postgres\n    ```\n\n 5. Import the data from the backup, replacing the path to the backup file as appropriate:\n\n    ```bash\n    cd /opt/pathcore/compose\n    sudo gunzip -c /path/to/database-backup.sql.gz \\\n         | sudo docker compose exec -T postgres sh -c \\\n         'PGPASSWORD=\"${POSTGRES_PASSWORD}\" psql -n -U \"${POSTGRES_USER}\" \"${POSTGRES_DB}\"'\n    ```\n\n 6. When complete, start the rest of the PathcoreFlow services:\n\n    ```bash\n    cd /opt/pathcore/compose\n    sudo docker compose up -d\n    ```\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Certbot\n\nIf you have configured [HTTPS via Let's Encrypt](/docs/on-premise/https/#lets-encrypt), then this task will ensure your certificate is renewed automatically before it expires.\n","slug":"docs/on-premise/maintenance"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"","description":null},"rawBody":"---\nredirect: /docs/on-premise/overview/\n---\n","slug":"docs/on-premise/"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"On-Premise Overview","description":"on-premise overview"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: On-Premise Overview\ndescription: on-premise overview\norder: 10\nsection: On-Premise\n---\n\n# On-Premise Overview\n##### \\[on-prem]\n\nSome deployments of PathcoreFlow require that the service be on-premise &mdash; the software must be installed and run within a customer's network or VPN.\n\nIn these cases, there exists the option to install and maintain a PathcoreFlow service on a server or virtual machine that you provide. The [technical requirements](/docs/on-premise/technical-requirements/) for this system can be found in this manual.\n\n\n## Containers\n\nIn these on-premise configurations, PathcoreFlow is delivered as a set of [Docker](https://www.docker.com/) images and run as a collection of containers via [Docker Compose](https://docs.docker.com/compose/).\n\n\n## Storage\n\nWhen PathcoreFlow is deployed to a local server, customers are responsible for providing adequate storage space for the image data. The storage must be attached to the Linux operating system hosting the PathcoreFlow application. This is typically accomplished by mounting a network drive using one of the common network protocols (e.g., SMB/CIFS or NFS)\n\n\n## Maintenance and Support\n\nThe default installation of PathcoreFlow includes a [maintenance task](/docs/on-premise/maintenance/) which backs up the database and configuration for the service. This is scheduled to run every day via the [systemd](https://systemd.io/) service manager.\n\nCustomers are notified whenever a new version of the software is released, and the Pathcore Support team are available to answer questions about new features. Instructions for applying these updates are available on the [Update](/docs/on-premise/update/) page.\n\nPathcore also offers specialized technical support services designed for on-premise deployments. These services are designed to support customer IT teams with installation and maintenance of Pathcore software. Ask your account manager for more information about support services we offer.\n","slug":"docs/on-premise/overview"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Technical Requirements","description":"technical requirements"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Technical Requirements\ndescription: technical requirements\norder: 20\nsection: On-Premise\n---\n\n# Technical Requirements\n\n<br />\n\n## Operating System\n\nPathcoreFlow requires a 64-bit Linux-based operating system with kernel version 3.10+.\n\nRecommended operating systems:\n- [Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9+](https://www.redhat.com/en/technologies/linux-platforms/enterprise-linux)\n- [CentOS Stream 9+](https://www.centos.org/)\n- [Ubuntu 22.04+ LTS](https://ubuntu.com/server)\n- [Debian 11+ (Bullseye)](https://www.debian.org/)\n\n\n## System Requirements\n\nPathcore recommends the server or virtual machine hosting the PathcoreFlow application meets the following minimum system requirements:\n\n- Quad core CPU at 2 Ghz\n- 16 GB RAM\n- 1 Gbps network interface\n\n\n## Storage Requirements\n\nPathcore requires the following block devices to be attached directly to the server or virtual machine:\n\n- A minimum 40 GB partition for the root (/) mount point\n  - Recommended 100 GB partition for the root (/) mount point to store Docker volumes, containers and logs. Please see the note below for more details about the Docker files\n- Images and other uploaded files can be stored on the root partition as well, but it is recommended to provision separate storage for this. Please see the note about image storage below\n\nThe default Docker installation will store the Docker volumes, containers and logs on the root partition. Docker can be configured to store these files in an alternate partition or disk if desired which will affect the minimum and recommended storage space.\n\nStorage for images and other uploaded files can be provided as either network storage (e.g., SMB, NFS, GlusterFS, etc.) or a block device. It should be noted that the latency and throughput characteristics of the chosen storage device can have an impact on the overall system performance.\n\n\n## Software Distribution Servers\n\nIn order to deliver the initial installer package and future updates for the PathcoreFlow installation, Pathcore's software distribution servers will need to be accessible from the PathcoreFlow server. The following URLs should be accessible:\n\n- <https://registry.gitlab.com>\n- <https://cdn.registry.gitlab-static.net>\n- <https://storage.googleapis.com>\n\n\n## HTTPS Setup\n\nPathcore recommends that all installations of PathcoreFlow be configured to serve data over HTTPS. This is an absolute requirement if the system will be accessible outside of a VPN. HTTPS allows clients to connect to the server using the HTTP/2 protocol, which can provide a performance benefit in supported browsers.\n\n### Externally Accessible Systems\n\nIf the PathcoreFlow server is configured for external access, Pathcore can provide a free automatically renewed TLS certificate via the Let’s Encrypt service. Alternatively, clients can purchase TLS certificates from their preferred certificate issuer and provide the necessary files to Pathcore for installation.\n\n### Internal-Only Systems\n\nIf the PathcoreFlow server is configured to only be accessible within a private network (either on-premise or via a VPN) Pathcore cannot provide certificates via the Let’s Encrypt service. Clients must configure PathcoreFlow with a certificate issued by a trusted\\* certificate authority.\n\nFor HTTPS setup, PathcoreFlow requires two files in the PEM format named as follows:\n- The SSL/TLS certificate: `fullchain.pem`\n- The SSL/TLS certificate key: `privkey.pem`\n\n\\* _The certificate authority only needs to be trusted by machines that will be accessing the service._\n\nMore details on configuring TLS can be found on the [HTTPS](/docs/on-premise/https/) page.\n\n\n## Mail Server\n\nPathcoreFlow requires an SMTP server to send transactional email such as account activations, password resets, and other notifications.\n\nClients should provide the following prior to installation:\n- SMTP hostname\n- SMTP port\n- SMTP SSL/TLS required\n- SMTP user\n- SMTP password\n- From address for outgoing emails (if different from SMTP user)\n\nMore details on configuring mail delivery can be found on the [Mail Server Configuration] page.\n\n\n## Client Requirements\n\nInformation about the requirements for clients can be found on the [Requirements](/docs/overview/requirements/) page.\n\n\n## Security Considerations\n\n### Server Connectivity\n\nPathcore recommends using a firewall to filter and monitor traffic to and from the server or virtual machine on which PathcoreFlow is installed. The following summary outlines the typical inbound and outbound connections that must be permitted for PathcoreFlow to function.\n\n#### Inbound Connections\n\n- HTTP(S). Ports 80 (HTTP) and/or 443 (HTTPS) must be accessible for clients to reach PathcoreFlow’s web interface and APIs. It is strongly recommended to [enable HTTPS](/docs/on-premise/https/) to ensure all traffic to and from the PathcoreFlow server is encrypted in transit. When HTTPS is configured, any traffic to the unsecure port 80 will be redirected to the secure port 443.\n\n#### Outbound Connections\n\n- HTTPS. When updating PathcoreFlow, outbound HTTPS (port 443) access is required to reach Pathcore’s Docker container registries. The following URLs must be accessible:\n  - <https://registry.gitlab.com>\n  - <https://cdn.registry.gitlab-static.net>\n  - <https://storage.googleapis.com>\n- SMTP. PathcoreFlow requires outbound SMTP access to send transactional email. When specifying the mail server, Pathcore strongly recommends configuring PathcoreFlow to use TLS\\*, if it is supported by the mail server.\n- LDAP(S). When PathcoreFlow’s LDAP integration is enabled, outbound access to the LDAP server is required to authenticate users and populate the user list. When configuring PathcoreFlow’s LDAP integration, Pathcore strongly recommends using LDAPS\\* to ensure all traffic between PathcoreFlow and the LDAP server is encrypted.\n- HALO. When PathcoreFlow’s HALO integration is enabled, outbound access to HALO’s API server is required. Again, Pathcore strongly recommends enabling TLS\\* on the HALO API server to ensure traffic between PathcoreFlow and HALO is encrypted.\n\n\\* _The appropriate CA certificates must be installed on the server or virtual machine where PathcoreFlow is installed._\n\n\n### Storage\n\nPathcoreFlow accesses file systems that have been mounted onto its server or virtual machine. When block devices are used, Pathcore strongly recommends using disk encryption to ensure data is encrypted at rest. When network devices are used, Pathcore recommends using protocols that support encryption in transit, such as SMBv3+, and ensuring that the backing storage devices are encrypted at rest.\n\n\n## Requirements for Third Party Integrations\n\n### LDAP/Active Directory\n\nPathcoreFlow can optionally use an LDAP server for user authentication and user directory sync. Pathcore requires (at minimum) the following information to configure LDAP:\n- LDAP server type (Active Directory or other)\n- Server address (e.g., `ldap://ad.example.com`)\n- Service account username and password (for directory sync)\n- Base DN (e.g., `dc=ad,dc=example,dc=com`)\n- User LDAP filter (only these users will be synced and allowed to authenticate with PathcoreFlow). e.g.:\n  ```\n  (&(objectCategory=Person)(memberOf=cn=PathcoreFlow,cn=Users,dc=ad,dc=example,dc=com))\n  ```\n\n### HALO Image Analysis\n\nPathcoreFlow includes an optional module for integrating with HALO. Once the module is installed, activated and configured, PathcoreFlow images can be opened in HALO. Annotations generated and saved within HALO will be visible in PathcoreFlow automatically.\n\nIn order for this integration to function, the following requirements must be met:\n- The HALO API must be accessible by the PathcoreFlow server\n- The PathcoreFlow images storage must be accessible by the HALO installation\n- The HALO installation must be configured to save markup images in the same location that PathcoreFlow saves images\n\n### Visiopharm Image Analysis\n\nPathcoreFlow includes an optional module for integrating with Visiopharm. Once the module is installed, activated and configured, PathcoreFlow images and annotations can be opened in Visiopharm. Annotations generated and saved within Visiopharm will be visible in PathcoreFlow after export.\n\nIn order for this integration to function, the following requirements must be met:\n- The Pathcore API must be accessible by the Visiopharm client\n","slug":"docs/on-premise/technical-requirements"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Update","description":"update"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Update\ndescription: update\norder: 40\nsection: On-Premise\n---\n\n# Update\n\n<br />\n\nCustomers with PathcoreFlow deployed to an on-premise server or virtual machine (VM) will receive an email notification from Pathcore Support when a new version of the software is available.\n\n<div class=\"warning\"><div>\n  It is recommended to perform a <a href=\"../maintenance/#running-a-manual-backup\">backup</a> before making any changes.\n</div></div>\n\n<br />\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  It is recommended to keep the operating system of the server or VM hosting PathcoreFlow up to date. Instructions for maintaining your OS should be available from the vendor.\n</div>\n\n<br />\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  It is recommended to keep Docker Engine updated to the latest stable version. If you are running on one of their <a href=\"https://docs.docker.com/engine/install/#installation-procedures-for-supported-platforms\">supported platforms</a>, then these updates may be available in the same manner as other software updates.\n</div></div>\n\n\n## Requirements\n\n- The operating system of the server or VM hosting PathcoreFlow should be up to date.\n- Docker Compose should have the latest stable updates.\n- The installer script (`pathcoreflow-vX.Y.Z-installer.sh`) provided by Pathcore Support for the target version.\n\n\n## Installing the Update\n\nThe message announcing the new version of PathcoreFlow should include an installer script which performs the update process. If you have not received this script with the announcement, please contact [Pathcore Support](mailto:support@pathcore.com).\n\nThe installer script will ensure that all of the base files for your PathcoreFlow installation are updated. Updating these files should be safe as any customizations to your [Docker Configuration](/docs/on-premise/configuration/#docker-configuration) should be in a separate `docker-compose.override.yml` file, which is untouched.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  It is recommended that you review the update process as well as any additional files and instructions provided with the announcement before proceeding.\n</div>\n\n<br />\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  These steps assume you have installed PathcoreFlow in the default directory: <code>/opt/pathcore</code>.\n</div></div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To update PathcoreFlow </summary>\n\n <div class=\"warning\">\n   This will cause the PathcoreFlow services to be temporarily unavailable.\n </div>\n\n 1. Ensure you have a recent backup.\n\n 2. Transfer the installer script to the server or VM hosting PathcoreFlow. This is typically done via [SSH File Transfer Protocol (SFTP)](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/SSH_File_Transfer_Protocol) (e.g., the `scp` command) to somewhere temporary (e.g., `/tmp`)\n\n 3. Log in to the server or VM hosting PathcoreFlow and run the installer script, e.g.:\n\n    ```bash\n    bash /tmp/pathcoreflow-v4.2.0-installer.sh\n    ```\n\n    <div class=\"info\"><div>\n      The script should be executed by a user with <code>sudo</code> access. Your password may be requested to perform some tasks.\n    </div></div>\n\n 4. You may be asked to provide the UID (User ID) and GID (Group ID) of the user that should own the database files. The suggested value should work for most deployments, but check with your system administrator if unsure\n\n 5. The installer script will do some initial checks, and display a summary of the changes to be performed. You will be prompted to confirm before any changes are made\n\n 6. You will be given the option to (re)install the systemd service. This is recommended if your operating system uses the [systemd](https://systemd.io/) service manager\n\n 7. A summary is displayed after updating, and your PathcoreFlow service should be available with the new version\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you encounter a problem when updating, please contact <a href=\"mailto:support@pathcore.com\">Pathcore Support</a> for assistance.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To rollback an update to PathcoreFlow </summary>\n\n <div class=\"warning\">\n   This action is potentially dangerous. Please ensure you have a recent backup before proceeding.\n </div>\n\n <br />\n\n <div class=\"warning\"><div>\n   If you encounter a problem when updating or believe there is a need to revert to an earlier version of PathcoreFlow, it is recommended that you contact <a href=\"mailto:support@pathcore.com\">Pathcore Support</a> for assistance.\n </div></div>\n\n When using the installer script to perform an update, another script to rollback to the previously installed version will be placed in the `compose/scripts/` directory. This script will be named `pathcoreflow-vX.Y.Z-rollback.sh`, where \"vX.Y.Z\" is the previously installed version. For example, after updating from PathcoreFlow v4.1.3 to v4.2, the file would be `pathcoreflow-v4.1.3-rollback.sh`.\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Support\n\nPathcore also offers specialized technical support services designed for on-premise deployments. These services are designed to support customer IT teams with installation and maintenance of Pathcore software.\n\nThese services can accommodate non-standard deployments and provide custom solutions when required. Ask your account manager for more information about support services we offer.\n","slug":"docs/on-premise/update"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Requirements","description":"requirements"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Requirements\ndescription: requirements\norder: 20\nsection: PathcoreFlow\n---\n\n\n# Requirements\n\n<br />\n\n## Client Requirements\n\nPathcoreFlow is an entirely browser-based application. No additional software needs to be installed on client machines.\n\n### Web Browser Requirements\n\nPathcoreFlow is officially supported in the following web browsers:\n\n- Google Chrome (last 2 versions)\n- Mozilla Firefox (last 2 versions)\n- Apple Safari (last 2 versions)\n- Microsoft Edge (last 2 versions)\n\nIt is likely that the PathcoreFlow application will be functional in older versions of the listed browsers, with the exception of Internet Explorer. The software may also function in browsers not listed here.\n\n## System Requirements\n\nPathcore recommends that client machines meet the following minimum system requirements:\n\n- Dual core CPU at 2 Ghz\n- 8 GB RAM\n- 100 Mbps network interface\n\n\n## Server Requirements\n\nFor information about the requirements for hosting your own PathcoreFlow server, see the [Technical Requirements](/docs/on-premise/technical-requirements/) page in the [On-Premise](/docs/on-premise/) section.\n","slug":"docs/overview/requirements"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Supported Formats","description":"supported formats"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Supported Formats\ndescription: supported formats\norder: 30\nsection: PathcoreFlow\n---\n\n# Supported Formats\n\n<br />\n\n## Attachments\n\nAny data file can be uploaded into the Repository. Where possible, the files are automatically identified and labeled as an \"Attachment\" if their contents are not viewable in the Viewer. Some attachments, such as PDF files and MS Office files may be viewable in your browser or with an application you have on your computer. In all other cases, attachments can be downloaded and processed with the appropriate application.\n\n## Supported Image Formats\n\nThe Viewer supports many proprietary whole slide image formats, DICOM standard whole slide images, some DICOM radiology formats as well common image formats.\n\n| Vendor      | Format     |\n| ----------- | ---------- |\n| 3DHISTECH   | MRXS       |\n| Aperio      | SVS        |\n| Aperio      | AFI        |\n| Hamamatsu   | VMS        |\n| Hamamatsu   | VMU        |\n| Hamamatsu   | NDPI       |\n| Hamamatsu   | NDPIS      |\n| Leica       | SCN        |\n| Lunaphore   | OME-TIFF   |\n| Motic       | Motic SVS  |\n| Olympus     | VSI        |\n| OME         | OME-TIFF   |\n| PerkinElmer | QPTIFF     |\n| Sakura      | SVSlide    |\n| Ventana     | BIF        |\n| Ventana     | TIF        |\n| Zeiss       | CZI        |\n|             | Tiled TIFF |\n|             | BigTIFF    |\n|             | JPEG2000   |\n|             | DICOM      |\n|             | BMP        |\n|             | JFIF       |\n|             | PNG        |\n\n### Known Limitations\n\nThe following image types are known to not work with PathcoreFlow:\n- Images without a pyramid (e.g., TIFF or PNG) are much slower to render as they grow in size, which can lead to timeouts\n- VSI images with a grid offset are not supported\n- MRXS images without an `.mrxs` file are not supported\n  - The scanner may not produce this file, but CaseViewer will create it if it does not already exist when it opens the image for viewing\n- OME-TIFF images which contain JPEG2000 compressed data are not supported\n  - VSI images which are exported to OME-TIFF may contain JPEG2000 compressed data\n- Multi-file DICOM images are not supported\n- Multi-file OME-TIFF images are not supported\n\nCertain operations are guarded with a restriction on the maximum area that can be processed (42,000,000 pixels by default). The following requests can fail for images exceeding that limit:\n- Region requests\n- Thumbnail requests\n- Nikon tile requests\n\nThe following actions are not performed by PathcoreFlow's image processing:\n- Reading embedded metadata not directly related to the image data (e.g., patient, study)\n- Reading embedded annotations out of formats such as MRXS and VSI\n- Handling of files which have been modified after they appear in the Repository (when using the image indexing service)\n","slug":"docs/overview/supported-formats"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Detailed Template Example","description":"detailed template example"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Detailed Template Example\ndescription: detailed template example\nsection: Report Templates\norder: 37\n---\n\n# Detailed Template Example\n\n<br />\n\nThe following is a larger report template example that illustrates various features including:\n\n| Feature Example                                   | Syntax                                                      |\n| ------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------- |\n| Displaying variables                              | `{{ folder.name }}`                                         |\n| Using filters                                     | <code>{{ at.filesize \\| filesizeformat }}</code>            |\n| Looping over lists of data                        | `{% for im in folder.images %}`                             |\n| Checking conditions                               | `{% if report_signed_by %}`                                 |\n| Accessing static data                             | `{% for item in static_data['foo'] %}`                     |\n| Accessing the list of images in the folder        | `{% for im in folder.images %}`                             |\n| Accessing the list of snapshots for a given image | `{% for snapshot in im.snapshots %}`                        |\n| Accessing snapshots in a container                | `{% for snapshot in snapshots['container1'] %}`             |\n| Displaying image thumbnails                       | `<img src=\"{{ im.get_thumbnail(bounds=[200,200]) }}\" />`    |\n| Displaying image regions                          | `<img src=\"{{ snapshot.get_region(bounds=[300,300]) }}\" />` |\n| Displaying slide labels                           | `<img src=\"{{ im.get_label(bounds=[200,200]) }}\" />`        |\n\n```\n{% block title %}\n  {# Set the title of your PDF document in this block (text only) #}\n  PDF Report Title\n{% endblock %}\n{% block body %}\n<div class=\"container\">\n  {#\n    Add any text such as a report title or description of the report anywhere in the\n    report template using different HTML blocks such as paragraph tags <p>,\n    line breaks <br>, headings <h1> / <h2> / etc.\n  #}\n\n  <h1>Detailed Report</h1>\n\n  <p>\n    Use variables passed to the template like this: The name of the case is {{ case.name }}.\n  </p>\n\n  <h2>Folder Name</h2>\n  {# Displays the currently selected folder's name #}\n  {{ folder.name }}\n\n  <h2>Folder ID</h2>\n  {# Displays the currently selected folder's ID in PathcoreFlow #}\n  {{ folder.id }}\n\n  <h2>Folder Description</h2>\n  {# Displays the currently selected folder's description #}\n  {{ folder.description }}\n\n  <h2>Custom Fields</h2>\n  {# Displays all the Custom Fields associated with the folder #}\n  {{ folder.fields }}\n\n  <h2>Static Data</h2>\n  <ul>\n  {# Begins looping through the static data array called 'foo' #}\n  {% for item in static_data['foo'] %}\n      {# Outputs each item in the 'foo' array #}\n      <li>{{ item }}</li>\n  {% endfor %}\n  </ul>\n  {# Outputs string variables 'name' and 'date' from static_data #}\n  <p>\n      Name: {{ static_data['name'] }}  <br>\n      Date: {{ static_data['date'] }}\n  </p>\n\n  <h2>Images</h2>\n  {# Begins looping through all the images in the currently selected folder #}\n  {% for im in folder.images %}\n    {# Outputs the properties of each image #}\n    {# Outputs the image name, ID, filesize #}\n    <h3> {{ im.name|e }} (ID: {{ im.id }}) ({{ im.filesize | filesizeformat }}) </h3>\n    {# Displays the actual image as a thumbnail #}\n    <img src=\"{{ im.get_thumbnail(bounds=[200,200]) }}\" />\n    {# Displays a portion of the full size image #}\n    <img src=\"{{ im.get_region(area=[0, 0, 10000, 10000], bounds=[200,200]) }}\" />\n    {# Displays the slide label of the image (if available) #}\n    <img src=\"{{ im.get_label(bounds=[200,200]) }}\" />\n    <h4>Snapshots</h4>\n    {# Snapshots and snapshot metadata for each image can also be displayed #}\n    {% for snapshot in im.snapshots %}\n      {# Displays the title, id and description of each snapshot #}\n      <div>\n        <p>Title: {{ snapshot.title }}</p>\n        <p>ID: {{ snapshot.id }}</p>\n        <p>Description: {{ snapshot.description }}</p>\n        {# Displays the snapshot #}\n        <img src=\"{{ snapshot.get_region(bounds=[150,150]) }}\" />\n      </div>\n    {% else %}\n      <p>No snapshots!</p>\n    {% endfor %}\n  {% endfor %}\n\n  <h2>Attachments</h2>\n  <ul>\n  {# Begins looping through all the attachments in the currently selected folder #}\n  {% for at in folder.attachments %}\n    <li>\n      {# Outputs the attachment name and filesize #}\n      {{ at.name }} ({{ at.filesize | filesizeformat }})\n      {# Outputs the attachment URL #}\n      <a href=\" {{ at.file_url }}\"> {{ at.file_url }} </a>\n    </li>\n  {% endfor %}\n  </ul>\n\n  <h2>Snapshots</h2>\n  {# Snapshots can also be displayed without accessing their associated image #}\n  {# Begins looping through all the snapshots in the snapshot container 'container1' #}\n  {% for snapshot in snapshots['container1'] %}\n    {# Displays the title, id and description of each snapshot #}\n    <div>\n      <p>Title: {{ snapshot.title }}</p>\n      <p>ID: {{ snapshot.id }}</p>\n      <p>Description: {{ snapshot.description }}</p>\n      {# Displays the snapshot #}\n      <img src=\"{{ snapshot.get_region(bounds=[300,300]) }}\" />\n    </div>\n  {% endfor %}\n\n  <p>If the report is signed, the signer's signature and name will appear here:</p>\n  {% if report_signed_by %}\n    <div class=\"signature\">\n      <img src=\"{{ report_signed_by.signature }}\" />\n      <p>Signed by {{ report_signed_by.name }} at {{ report_signed_at }}</p>\n    </div>\n  {% endif %}\n</div>\n{% endblock %}\n```\n","slug":"docs/report-templates/detailed-template-example"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Overview","description":"overview"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Overview\ndescription: overview\norder: 10\nsection: PathcoreFlow\n---\n\n\n# PathcoreFlow\n\n<br />\n\nPathcoreFlow is an enterprise workspace for digital pathology, with a focus on whole slide image management.\nIt consists of several tools for organization and collaboration, including the [Repository](/docs/repository/repository-overview/) &mdash; a virtual file system that is accessible from any internet-enabled device &mdash; and the [Viewer](/docs/viewer/overview/) &mdash; an image viewer optimized for whole slide images and that supports a [range of formats](/docs/overview/supported-formats/) from many scanner vendors.\n","slug":"docs/overview/"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"","description":null},"rawBody":"---\nredirect: /docs/report-templates/report-templates-overview/\n---\n","slug":"docs/report-templates/"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Auxiliary Information","description":"auxiliary information"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Auxiliary Information\ndescription: auxiliary information\nsection: Report Templates\norder: 36\n---\n\n\n# Auxiliary Information\n\n<br />\n\n\n## Styles\n\nReport templates in PathcoreFlow use Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) to style the generated reports. More information about the supported CSS specifications can be found in the [WeasyPrint documentation](https://doc.courtbouillon.org/weasyprint/stable/api_reference.html#css)\n\n### Style Example\n\nThis example CSS style will set the font to sans-serif for the container class, sets the max width to 3 inches and text aligned to center for the signature class, sets the max width of an image in the signature class to 100%, and creates a border around any images.\n\n```css\n/* Define your CSS styles here */\n\n.container {\n    font-family: sans-serif;\n}\n\n.signature {\n    max-width: 3in;\n    text-align: center;\n}\n\n.signature img {\n    max-width: 100%;\n}\n\nimg {\n    border-style: solid;\n}\n```\n\n\n## Static Data\n\nPredefined data can be added to a report in a flexible way by adding it to the **Static Data** tab. Data entered there can be accessed inside the template via the variable `static_data`. The data is specified using the JavaScript Object Notation (JSON) format. See this [introduction to JSON syntax](https://www.w3schools.com/js/js_json_syntax.asp) for more information.\n\n### Static Data Example\n\nThis section shows the report template code to display output from `static_data`.\n\n```\n<h2>Static Data</h2>\n\n<ul>\n{# Begins looping through the static data array called 'foo' #}\n{% for item in static_data['foo'] %}\n    {# Outputs each item in the 'foo' array #}\n    <li>{{ item }}</li>\n{% endfor %}\n</ul>\n\n{# Outputs string variables 'name' and 'date' from static_data #}\n<p>\n    Name: {{ static_data['name'] }}  <br>\n    Date: {{ static_data['date'] }}\n</p>\n```\n\nThis section shows the Static Data values in JSON format.\n\n```json\n{\n    \"foo\": [\n        \"define\",\n        \"your\",\n        \"static\",\n        \"data\",\n        \"here\"\n    ],\n    \"name\": \"value\",\n    \"date\": \"2020-08-18\"\n}\n```\n\n\n## Snapshots\n\nSnapshots can be displayed alongside their associated image or on their own within a report. If the desire is to only display snapshots, a snapshot container needs to be created within the report template. A snapshot container is an array of selected snapshots from the report folder.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To create a snapshot container </summary>\n\n 1. Open a report template for editing. See [Working With Reports](/docs/report-templates/working-with-reports/) for details\n\n 2. Click on the **Snapshots** tab\n\n 3. Click on the **+ Add Snapshot Container** button\n\n 4. Type a name for the container in the **Display Name** field\n\n 5. Type a value in the **Template Name** field\n    - This is the name of the snapshot container used within the report template. For example, if you name the container \"selected\\_features\", the list of snapshots would be accessed as the variable `snapshots.selected_features`\n\n 6. (Optional) Enable the **Required** toggle if the report must contain snapshots\n\n 7. Set the **between** values to the range of snapshots allowed or required in the report. (i.e., to force the user to select up to 5 snapshots to be included in the report, set **between** values to 1 and 5)\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete a snapshot container </summary>\n\n 1. Open a report template for editing. See [Working With Reports](/docs/report-templates/working-with-reports/) for details\n\n 2. Click on the **Snapshots** tab\n\n 3. Locate the container to be removed\n\n 4. Click on the ![Delete Container](../images/table-trash.svg) button at the bottom left of the container block\n\n</details>\n\n### Snapshots Example\n\n```\n{# Begins looping through all the snapshots in the snapshot container 'container1' #}\n{% for snapshot in snapshots['container1'] %}\n    {# Displays the title, id and description of each snapshot #}\n    <div>\n        <p>Title: {{ snapshot.title }}</p>\n        <p>ID: {{ snapshot.id }}</p>\n        <p>Description: {{ snapshot.description }}</p>\n        {# Displays the snapshot #}\n        <img src=\"{{ snapshot.get_region(bounds=[300,300]) }}\" />\n    </div>\n{% endfor %}\n```\n","slug":"docs/report-templates/auxiliary-information"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Jinja2 Quick Reference","description":"jinja2 quick reference"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Jinja2 Quick Reference\ndescription: jinja2 quick reference\nsection: Report Templates\norder: 34\n---\n\n\n# Jinja2 Quick Reference\n\n<br />\n\nThis section provides an overview of the syntax and some of the commonly used features of the Jinja2 templating language. For more detailed information, refer to the official [Jinja2 documentation](https://jinja.palletsprojects.com/en/3.0.x/templates/).\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  As the template engine is very flexible, the configuration from the PathcoreFlow application can be slightly different from the code presented here in terms of delimiters and behavior of undefined values. If you encounter any anomalies, contact our support team.\n</div>\n\n\n## Basic Syntax\n\nA template contains variables and/or expressions, which get replaced with values when a template is rendered; and tags, which control the logic of the template.\n\nThere are a few kinds of delimiters configured as follows:\n\n```\n{% ... %} for Statements\n{{ ... }} for Expressions to print to the template output\n{# ... #} for Comments not included in the template output\n```\n\n\n## Variables\n\nVariables may have attributes or elements on them you can access. See the [Placeholder Reference](/docs/report-templates/placeholder-reference/) for details.\n\nYou can use a dot (`.`) to access attributes of a variable in addition to the standard subscript (`[]`) syntax.\n\nThe following lines do the same thing:\n\n```\n{{ folder.image }}\n{{ folder['image'] }}\n```\n\nIt’s important to know that the outer two curly braces are not part of the variable, but the print statement. If you access variables inside tags, don't put the braces around them. If a variable or attribute does not exist, you will get back an undefined value.\n\n\n## Filters\n\nVariables can be modified by filters. Filters are separated from the variable by a pipe symbol (`|`) and may have optional arguments in parentheses. Multiple filters can be chained. The output of one filter is applied to the next.\n\nFor example, `{{ name|striptags|title }}` will remove all HTML Tags from variable \"name\" and title-case the output (i.e., `title(striptags(name))`).\n\nFilters that accept arguments have parentheses around the arguments, just like a function call. For example: `{{ listx|join(', ') }}` will join a list with commas (i.e., `str.join(', ', listx)`).\n\nThe [List of Builtin Filters](https://jinja.palletsprojects.com/en/3.0.x/templates/#list-of-builtin-filters) in the official Jinja2 documentation describes all the builtin filters.\n\n\n## Tests\n\nBeside filters, there are also so-called \"tests\" available. Tests can be used to test a variable against a common expression. To test a variable or expression, you add `is` plus the name of the test after the variable. For example, to find out if a variable is defined, you can do `name is defined`, which will then return true or false depending on whether name is defined in the current template context.\n\nTests can accept arguments, too. If the test only takes one argument, you can leave out the parentheses. For example, the following two expressions do the same thing:\n\n```\n{% if  loop.index is divisibleby 3 %}\n{% if  loop.index is divisibleby(3) %}\n```\n\nThe [List of Builtin Tests](https://jinja.palletsprojects.com/en/3.0.x/templates/#builtin-tests) in the official Jinja2 documentation describes all the builtin tests.\n\n\n## Comments\n\nTo comment out part of a line in a template, use the comment syntax which is `{# ... #}`. This is useful to comment out parts of the template for debugging or to add information for other template designers or yourself:\n\n```\n{# note: commented-out template because we no longer use this\n    {% for user in users %}\n        ...\n    {% endfor %}\n#}\n```\n\n\n## Control Structures\n\nA control structure refers to all those things that control the flow of a program - conditionals (i.e., if/elif/else), for-loops, as well as things like macros and blocks. Control structures appear inside `{% ... %}` blocks.\n\n### For\n\nLoop over each item in a sequence. For example, to display a list of image names provided in the selected folder:\n\n```\n<h2>Images</h2>\n<ul>\n{% for im in folder.images %}\n    <li>{{ im.name|e }}</li>\n{% endfor %}\n</ul>\n```\n\nAs variables in templates retain their object properties, it is possible to iterate over containers like dict:\n\n```\n<dl>\n{% for key, value in folder.fields.items() %}\n    <dt>{{ key|e }}</dt>\n    <dd>{{ value|e }}</dd>\n{% endfor %}\n</dl>\n```\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  The \"e\" in the above examples is an alias for the builtin escape filter. The escape filter converts the characters &amp;, &lt;, &gt;, ', and \" in a string to HTML-safe sequences. Use this if you need to display text that might contain such characters.\n</div>\n\nNote, however, that dicts are not ordered; so you might want to use the `dictsort` filter.\n\nInside of a for-loop block, you can access some special variables:\n\n| Variable         | Description                                                                          |\n| ---------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |\n| `loop.index`     | The current iteration of the loop. (1 indexed).                                      |\n| `loop.index0`    | The current iteration of the loop. (0 indexed).                                      |\n| `loop.revindex`  | The number of iterations from the end of the loop (1 indexed).                       |\n| `loop.revindex0` | The number of iterations from the end of the loop (0 indexed).                       |\n| `loop.first`     | True if first iteration.                                                             |\n| `loop.last`      | True if last iteration.                                                              |\n| `loop.length`    | The number of items in the sequence.                                                 |\n| `loop.cycle`     | A helper function to cycle between a list of sequences. See the explanation below.   |\n| `loop.depth`     | Indicates how deep in a recursive loop the rendering currently is. Starts at level 1. |\n| `loop.depth0`    | Indicates how deep in a recursive loop the rendering currently is. Starts at level 0. |\n\nUnlike in Python, it’s not possible to break or continue in a loop. You can, however, filter the sequence during iteration, which allows you to skip items. The following example skips images with the name \"test\":\n\n```\n{% for im in folder.images if not im.name == 'test' %}\n    <li>{{ im.name|e }}</li>\n{% endfor %}\n```\n\nIf no iteration took place because the sequence was empty or the filtering removed all the items from the sequence, you can render a default block by using else:\n\n```\n<ul>\n{% for im in folder.images %}\n    <li>{{ im.name }}</li>\n{% else %}\n    <li><em>No image found</em></li>\n{% endfor %}\n</ul>\n```\n\n### If\n\nIn the simplest form, you can use the If statement to test if a variable is defined, not empty and not false:\n\n```\n{% if report_signed_by %}\n\n<div class=\"signature\">\n    <img src=\"{{ report_signed_by.signature }}\" />\n    <p>Signed by {{ report_signed_by.name }} at {{ report_signed_at }}</p>\n</div>\n\n{% endif %}\n```\n","slug":"docs/report-templates/jinja2-quick-reference"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Report Templates Overview","description":"working with figures"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Report Templates Overview\ndescription: working with figures\nsection: Report Templates\norder: 32\n---\n\n\n# Report Templates Overview\n##### [add-on]\n\nReport templates may be used to generate standardized PDF outputs for summarizing the information in a folder. Reports may include the signature of the user that generated them and are automatically saved in the folder where they are generated. Report templates provide a convenient mechanism for archiving and/or sharing study information in standard formats. Different report templates can be used for different studies, depending on the need.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  The Report templates add-on is required to create reports.\n</div>\n\n\n## Developing Templates\n\nDeveloping templates requires understanding of HTML and CSS. If you don’t have the required expertise and are not willing to experiment, contact our support team for information on how we may be able to support you.\n\nThe style and layout of the data in a template can be fully customized with standard HTML and CSS, similar to how web pages are formatted. Additionally, placeholders can be used to represent metadata, snapshots, image thumbnails, hyperlinks, as well as other static data (e.g., text and images) throughout the template. During report generation, these placeholders are populated with data from the folder in which the report is generated. The output of the reporting engine is a PDF that has been formatted and populated according to the template that has been used.\n\nTo better understand the features of the templating language, start by reviewing our [Jinja2 Quick Reference](/docs/report-templates/jinja2-quick-reference/) and [Placeholder Reference](/docs/report-templates/placeholder-reference/). For comprehensive information about the templating language, refer to the [Jinja2 documentation](https://jinja.palletsprojects.com/en/3.0.x/templates/).\n\n\n### A Basic Template\n\nThe following example demonstrates a trivial example of a template that outputs the list of images in a folder. To learn more about the syntax and possibilities, see the following pages for more details: [Jinja2 Quick Reference](/docs/report-templates/jinja2-quick-reference/), [Placeholder Reference](/docs/report-templates/placeholder-reference/) and [Auxiliary Information](/docs/report-templates/auxiliary-information/).\n\n```\n{# Section for report title #}\n{% block title %}\n  {# Set the title of your PDF document in this block (text only) #}\n{% endblock %}\n\n{# Section for report body #}\n{% block body %}\n<div class=\"container\">\n  <h1>Basic Report Template</h1>\n\n  <p>Set the content of your report within the \"body\" block.</p>\n  <p>Use variables passed to the template like this:</p>\n  <p>The name of the folder is {{ folder.name }}.</p>\n\n  <h2>List of Images</h2>\n  <ul>\n    {% for im in folder.images %}\n      <li>\n        {{ im.name }} ({{ im.filesize | filesizeformat }})\n      </li>\n    {% endfor %}\n  </ul>\n\n  <p>If the report is signed, the signer's signature and name will appear here:</p>\n  {% if report_signed_by %}\n    <div class=\"signature\">\n      <img src=\"{{ report_signed_by.signature }}\" />\n      <p>Signed by {{ report_signed_by.name }} at {{ report_signed_at }}</p>\n    </div>\n  {% endif %}\n</div>\n{% endblock %}\n```\n","slug":"docs/report-templates/report-templates-overview"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Placeholder Reference","description":"placeholder reference"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Placeholder Reference\ndescription: placeholder reference\nsection: Report Templates\norder: 35\n---\n\n\n# Placeholder Reference\n\n<br />\n\nThere are a number of placeholders that can be used within report templates. These include global variables and functions, and various data types.\n\n\n## Global Variables\n\n| Name               | Type                     | Description  |\n| ------------------ | ------------------------ | ------------ |\n| `static_data`      | dict                     | Contains the static data specified in the Static Data tab of the report template editor. |\n| `folder`           | Folder                   | Contains data related to the folder this report is being rendered for. |\n| `case`             | Folder                   | Alias of folder. |\n| `snapshots`        | dict{string: Snapshot[]} | Snapshots selected by the report generator, grouped by snapshot container. Keys in the dict are the template names specified in the snapshot containers section of the report template editor. |\n| `report_signed_by` | Signer                   | The signer of the report (if it is signed). |\n| `report_signed_at` | datetime                 | When the report was signed (if it was signed). |\n\n\n## Global Functions\n\n| Name                          | Description                                                                      |\n| ----------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |\n| `template_file_by_name(name)` | Get a URL to the file contents of a [Report Template File](/docs/report-templates/working-with-reports/#report-template-files) by specifying its name. |\n| `template_file_by_id(id)`     | Get a URL to the file contents of a [Report Template File](/docs/report-templates/working-with-reports/#report-template-files) by specifying its id.   |\n\n#### Parameters\n\n| Name       | Type     | Description                                                     |\n| ---------- | -------- | --------------------------------------------------------------- |\n| `name`     | string   | The name of the report template file (must be exact).           |\n| `id`       | string   | The id (10 character alphanumeric) of the report template file. |\n\n\n## Data Types\n\nSome commonly used properties for folders, images, attachments and snapshots are listed.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  Some properties are omitted for brevity. The <a href=\"https://jinja.palletsprojects.com/en/3.0.x/templates/#jinja-filters.pprint\">pprint filter</a> in Jinja is useful for exploring the available properties in each variable.\n</div></div>\n\n\n### Folder Properties\n\n| Name          | Type         | Description                                                     |\n| ------------- | ------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------- |\n| `id`          | int          | The ID of the folder.                                           |\n| `name`        | string       | The name of the folder.                                         |\n| `description` | string       | The description of the folder.                                  |\n| `attachments` | Attachment[] | A list of attachments in the folder (i.e., non-image files).    |\n| `images`      | Image[]      | A list of images in the folder.                                 |\n| `fields`      | dict         | A dictionary mapping Custom Field names to Custom Field values. |\n\n\n### Attachment Properties\n\n| Name       | Type     | Description                               |\n| ---------- | -------- | ----------------------------------------- |\n| `id`       | string   | The ID of the file.                       |\n| `name`     | string   | The name of the file.                     |\n| `file_url` | string   | A URL to access the contents of the file. |\n| `filesize` | int      | The size of the file in bytes.            |\n\n\n### Image Properties\n\n| Name                       | Type     | Description                                         |\n| -------------------------- | -------- | --------------------------------------------------- |\n| `id`                       | string   | The ID of the image.                                |\n| `name`                     | string   | The name of the image.                              |\n| `filesize`                 | int      | The size of the image in bytes.                     |\n| `get_thumbnail(bounds)`    | function | Get a URL to access the thumbnail of the image.     |\n| `get_region(area,` bounds) | function | Get a URL to access a region from the image.        |\n| `get_label(bounds)`        | function | Get a URL to access the slide label from the image. |\n\n#### Parameters\n\n| Name       | Type     | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                      |\n| ---------- | -------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |\n| `area`     | int[]    | A region to extract from the image specified as [x, y, width, height] in pixel coordinates of the original image. If omitted or invalid, the requested image is omitted from the report.                         |\n| `bounds`   | int[]    | A [width, height] pair in pixels that this image will be resized to fit within (if larger). If omitted, the requested image is returned unscaled and if invalid, the requested image is omitted from the report. |\n\n\n### Snapshot Properties\n\n| Name          | Type     | Description                                      |\n| ------------- | -------- | ------------------------------------------------ |\n| `id`          | int      | The ID of the snapshot.                          |\n| `title`       | string   | The title of the snapshot.                       |\n| `description` | string   | The description of the snapshot.                 |\n| `bounds()`    | function | Get a URL to access the snapshot’s region image. |\n\n\n### Signer Properties\n\n| Name        | Type     | Description                                        |\n| ----------- | -------- | -------------------------------------------------- |\n| `name`      | string   | The name of the user that signed the report.       |\n| `signature` | string   | A URL to the signature image of the report signer. |\n","slug":"docs/report-templates/placeholder-reference"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Working With Reports","description":"working with reports"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Working With Reports\ndescription: working with reports\nsection: Report Templates\norder: 33\n---\n\n\n# Working With Reports\n\n<br />\n\n\n## Generating Reports\n\nUsers can generate a report from within a folder. The generated PDF outputs are always saved in the folder where the report is generated.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  To be able to generate reports, users require the \"Folders-&gt;View\" and \"Files-&gt;Upload\" permission flags and need to be able to navigate to a folder and change its contents. In addition, the \"Files-&gt;View\" permission flag is required to view a generated report, and the \"Images-&gt;View\" permission flag is required to view images that may be linked into a report.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To generate a report from an existing template </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Click on the ![Actions](../images/table-add.svg) button at the top right of the item list\n\n 3. In the popup menu, click **Generate Report**\n\n 4. Type a name in the **Report Name** field\n\n 5. Select a template from the **Report Template** dropdown menu\n\n 6. (Optional) Enable the **Sign report** toggle to insert your signature into the report. To create or update a signature, see [My Account](/docs/settings/my-account/)\n\n 7. (Optional) Click on the **Preview** button to see how the report will render for this folder\n\n 8. Click on the **Generate Report** button. The report will be saved as a PDF into the current folder\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   If you don't have this option, it may not be enabled for your team.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Managing Report Templates\n\nTo better understand the features of the templating language, start by reviewing our [Jinja2 Quick Reference](/docs/report-templates/jinja2-quick-reference/) and [Placeholder Reference](/docs/report-templates/placeholder-reference/). For comprehensive information about the templating language, refer to the [Jinja2 documentation](https://jinja.palletsprojects.com/en/3.0.x/templates/).\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  The Report templates add-on and \"Manage report templates\" permission flag is required to create or edit report templates.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To create a report template </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Report Templates** tab\n\n 3. Click on the **New Report Template** button\n\n 4. Type a name for the template into the field at the top of the page\n\n 5. Click on the **Template** tab\n\n 6. Make the desired changes to the template. See [Jinja2 Quick Reference](/docs/report-templates/jinja2-quick-reference/) and [Placeholder Reference](/docs/report-templates/placeholder-reference/) for details\n\n 7. (Optional) Click on the **Styles**, **Static Data**, or **Snapshots** tabs and make desired adjustments. See [Auxiliary Information](/docs/report-templates/auxiliary-information/) for details\n\n 8. (Optional) Preview the template:\n    1. Click on the **Select Folder** button and select a folder for testing\n    2. (Optional) Enable the **Signed** toggle to insert your signature into the report\n    3. Click on the **Generate Preview** button\n\n 9. Click on the **Save** button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To edit a report template </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Report Templates** tab\n\n 3. Select a report template from the table\n\n 4. Click on the **Edit** button above the table\n\n 5. (Optional) Edit the name of the template in the field at the top of the page\n\n 6. Click on the **Template** tab\n\n 7. (Optional) Make the desired changes to the template. See [Jinja2 Quick Reference](/docs/report-templates/jinja2-quick-reference/) and [Placeholder Reference](/docs/report-templates/placeholder-reference/) for details\n\n 8. (Optional) Click on the **Styles**, **Static Data**, or **Snapshots** tabs and make desired adjustments. See [Auxiliary Information](/docs/report-templates/auxiliary-information/) for details\n\n 9. (Optional) Preview the template:\n    1. Click on the **Select Folder** button and select a folder for testing\n    2. (Optional) Enable the **Signed** toggle to insert your signature into the report\n    3. Click on the **Generate Preview** button\n\n 10. Click on the **Save** button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To preview a report template </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Report Templates** tab\n\n 3. Select a report template from the table\n\n 4. Click on the **Edit** button above the table\n\n 5. Click on the **Select Folder** button and select a folder for testing\n\n 6. (Optional) Enable the **Signed** toggle to insert your signature into the report\n\n 7. Click on the **Generate Preview** button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To enable or disable a report template </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Report Templates** tab\n\n 3. Set the **Active** toggle next to the report template's name\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete a report template </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Report Templates** tab\n\n 3. Select a report template from the table\n\n 4. Click on the **Delete** button above the table\n\n 5. Click on the **Yes** button to confirm\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Report Template Files\n\nReport template files are static files that are referenced in your report templates (e.g., a logo image). These files can be referenced by name or ID in your template. See [Placeholder Reference - Global Functions](/docs/report-templates/placeholder-reference/#global-functions) for details.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To upload a report template file </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Report Templates** tab\n\n 3. Click on the **Upload** button in the **Report Template Files** section of the page\n\n 4. Click in the blue box to activate the file selection dialog or simply drag files into the blue box; repeat as required for other files\n\n 5. Click on the **Start Upload** button to start upload\n\n 6. Click on the **X** button to minimize the File Uploads dialog\n\n 7. To check upload status, click on the **Details** button from the upload progress notification at the top of the screen\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To rename a report template file </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Report Templates** tab\n\n 3. Select an item from the table in the **Report Template Files** section of the page\n\n 4. Click on the **Rename** button above the table\n\n 5. In the popup dialog, type a new name for the file\n\n 6. Click on the **Rename** button or press the **Enter** key to save. To discard your changes, click on the **Cancel** button or press the **Escape** key\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete a report template file </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Report Templates** tab\n\n 3. Select an item from the table in the **Report Template Files** section of the page\n\n 4. Click on the **Delete** button above the table\n\n 5. Click on the **Yes** button to confirm\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/report-templates/working-with-reports"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Activity Logs","description":"activity logs"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Activity Logs\ndescription: activity logs\norder: 10\nsection: Repository\n---\n\n# Activity Logs\n\n<br />\n\nChanges made in the Repository and Viewer are tracked in Activity Logs. The activity log displays a list of all items that have been created, modified, or deleted, as well as information about when and by whom the changes were made. Users can review past actions in the [Activities Tab](#activities-tab) of the right-hand panel in the Repository, and users with the necessary permissions can export the detailed activity logs as a CSV file.\n\n\n## Activities Tab\n##### \\[BioPharma] [Research+]\n\nFrom the Repository, it is possible to review the activity log for an item in the right-hand panel. You can search the list to highlight specific actions, item types, or users.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  The \"Preview activities\" permission flag is required to access the <b>Activities</b> tab.\n</div></div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To view the activity log for an item from the Repository </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select a single item in a folder\n\n 3. Click on the **Activities** tab of the right-hand panel. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed\n\n 4. (Optional) Type an action, item type, or user name into the search box to highlight matching activities in the list\n\n 5. (Optional) Click on the ![Display Options](../images/table-options.svg) button at the top right of the activity list to apply additional display options\n    1. (Optional) Click on **Expand all Details** to show additional details for all entries, or click on **Collapse All Details** to hide them\n    2. (Optional) Enable the **Show Reason for Change (RFC)** toggle to show the user-provided reason for changes in the activity logs. See [Reason for Change Tracking](/docs/settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking) for more details\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To see additional details for an activity in the log </summary>\n\n 1. In the **Activities** tab, locate the entry for which you want more information\n\n 2. To show or hide the details of an activity, click on its entry in the list\n\n 3. To get the precise date and time of an activity, hover over the relative time (e.g., \"5 days ago\", \"a month ago\") to display the exact time the activity occurred in the local timezone\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Exporting Activity Logs\n##### [add-on]\n\nIt is possible to export detailed activity logs for an item in the Repository as a CSV file.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  The Exportable activity logs add-on and \"Export activities\" permission flag is required to export activity logs.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To export activity logs for an item from the Repository </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Bring up the [context menu](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#context-menu) for the item\n\n 3. Click **Export Activities**\n\n 4. (Optional) In the popup dialog, select the start date from the **Since** field\n\n 5. (Optional) Select the desired output timezone from the **Timezone** dropdown menu\n\n 6. Click on the **Export CSV** button to download a CSV file. See [Activity Log File Format](#activity-log-export-format) for more details\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To export activity logs for the current folder </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Click on the ![Down Arrow](../images/nav-arrow-down.svg) button next to the current folder's breadcrumb\n\n 3. Click **Export Activities**\n\n 4. (Optional) In the popup dialog, select the start date from the **Since** field\n\n 5. (Optional) Select the desired output timezone from the **Timezone** dropdown menu\n\n 6. Click on the **Export CSV** button to download a CSV file. See [Activity Log File Format](#activity-log-export-format) for more details\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Activity Log Export Format\n\nThe exported activity logs are provided in the CSV (comma separated value) file format which is compatible with all popular spreadsheet applications.\n\nBy default, entries are sorted by \"Activity ID\" in ascending order. Each entry in the log file has the following columns:\n\n- **Activity Id**: numeric ID for the action or activity that occurred\n- **Object Id**: numeric ID for the object that was affected\n- **Transaction Time (timezone)**: provides the time of the event in the timezone selected when exporting the logs to CSV\n- **Remote Address**: address of the client which caused the event, if applicable\n- **User ID**: numeric ID of the user which caused the event, if applicable\n- **User Name**: the display name of the user account\n- **User Email**: the email address of the user account\n- **Parent Name**: name of the object's parent\n- **Object Name**: name of the object that was affected\n- **Object Type**: type of the object that was affected\n- **Property**: name of the property of the object that was changed\n- **New Value**: new value of the property that was changed\n- **Old Value**: old value of the property that was changed\n- **Operation**: type of operation performed on the object\n- **Reason for Change**: reason given by the user for the change\n\n#### Object Types\n\n- **attachment**\n- **figure**\n- **folder**\n- **image**\n- **image_overlay**\n- **report**\n\n#### Operations\n\n- **CREATE**: the object was added\n- **PATCH**: the object was changed\n- **DELETE**: the object was removed\n\n\n### Example of an Exported Activity Log\n\nAn example of a CSV file of exported activity logs is available to download below.\n\nThe following actions were performed:\n\n- Create a new folder named \"Example Folder\"\n- Upload the file \"slide_001A.zip\" which is an archive containing the image \"slide_name001A.mrxs\"\n- Add an annotation to the image\n- Rename the annotation to \"Annotation 1\"\n- Delete the image\n\nDownload: <a href=\"../../../activity-logs-example.csv\">activity-logs-example.csv</a>\n","slug":"docs/repository/activity-logs"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"","description":null},"rawBody":"---\nredirect: ../activity-logs/\n---\n","slug":"docs/repository/audit-logs"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Data Ingestion","description":"data ingestion"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Data Ingestion\ndescription: data ingestion\norder: 3\nsection: Repository\n---\n\n\n# Data Ingestion\n\n<br />\n\nThere are several ways to upload images into the Repository. Depending on the desired workflow and volume of data to be ingested, use one of the following methods:\n\n- Upload files manually in a browser\n- Upload in bulk from a PC using the Upload Client software\n- Configure the image indexing service by contacting support\n- Upload through the API for customized workflows\n\n\n## Manual Uploads\n\nFiles can be manually uploaded into a folder using drag and drop or through a file selection dialog. Multiple images can be selected for upload using either method. The status of uploaded files will be indicated through a progress notification at the top of the screen as well as a progress bar on each new item in the [Folder Listing](/docs/repository/folder-listing/).\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To upload file(s) using drag and drop </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Drag one or more files onto the folder listing area (until the \"Drop files to upload\" notification appears) then drop the files\n\n 3. To check upload status, click on the **Details** button from the upload progress notification at the top of the screen\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To upload file(s) using a file selection dialog </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Click on the ![Actions](../images/table-add.svg) button at the top right of the item list\n\n 3. In the popup menu, click **Upload**\n\n 4. Click in the blue box to activate the file selection dialog or simply drag files into the blue box; repeat as required for other files\n\n 5. Click on the **Start Upload** button to start upload\n\n 6. Click on the **X** button to minimize the File Uploads dialog\n\n 7. To check upload status, click on the **Details** button from the upload progress notification at the top of the screen\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To check the status of recently uploaded files </summary>\n\n 1. Look for the upload progress notification at the top of the screen\n\n 2. Click on the **Details** button on the notification\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To edit metadata for recently uploaded files </summary>\n\n 1. Look for the upload progress notification at the top of the screen and, if it has not been dismissed, click on the **Details** button. If the notification has been dismissed, this method is not available and file metadata can be edited individually through the Repository listing\n\n 2. Click on the **Edit Metadata** button for any of the files listed\n\n 3. In the **Add fields** box look for the fields to be added or type a few letters to find the desired field; repeat as required for other fields\n\n 4. Edit the value in the provided field\n\n 5. Click on the **Save Changes** button to commit the field(s), or click on the **Cancel** button to discard changes\n\n 6. Click on the **X** button in the top right-hand corner of the File Uploads dialog\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To locate recently uploaded files </summary>\n\n 1. Look for the upload progress notification at the top of the screen and, if it has not been dismissed, click on the **Details** button\n\n 2. Click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) button below any of the recently uploaded files\n\n 3. Click on the **X** button in the top right-hand corner of the File Uploads dialog\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To clear the completed list of recently uploaded files </summary>\n\n 1. Look for the upload progress notification at the top of the screen and, if it has not been dismissed, click on the **Details** button\n\n 2. Click on the **Clear Completed** button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To clear the upload progress history and remove it from view </summary>\n\n 1. Look for the upload progress notification at the top of the screen\n\n 2. Click on the **Dismiss** button on the notification\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   Refreshing the page while uploads are in progress will terminate in progress uploads and clear the list of recently uploaded files.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n### Multi-File Images\n\nTo upload multi-file images such as MRXS, NDPIS, AFI and VSI via the browser, the set of files and folders related to the image must be uploaded as a single archive file (e.g., a zip file). Do not include additional files or folders in the archive file or change the relative path of files in the archive (i.e., ensure the main file is at the root of the archive and there should be one image per archive).\n\nThe following archive formats are supported:\n- **tar**: Standard tarball archive format\n- **tar.gz**: gzip compressed tarball\n- **ZIP**: Created using the DEFLATE or DEFLATE64 algorithm. Microsoft Windows and macOS create these types of archives when a user sends files to a \"compressed folder\"\n\nThe following multi-file image formats are supported, with notes on how to properly organize the archive file contents.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> 3DHISTECH MRXS </summary>\n\n An MRXS image consists of a base **.mrxs** image, and a correspondingly named folder which contains:\n\n - **Slidedat.ini**: Metadata for the entire image\n - **Index.dat**: Index describing how the data files are combined into a WSI\n - **DataXXXX.dat**: One or more image data files\n\n\n **Example**: An archive file named \"slide_001A.zip\" containing:\n\n ```\n slide_001A.mrxs\n slide_001A/\n     Data0000.dat\n     Data0001.dat\n     ...\n     Data0021.dat\n     Data0022.dat\n     Index.dat\n     Slidedat.ini\n ```\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   The scanner may not produce the <b>.mrxs</b> file, which is required by PathcoreFlow. CaseViewer will create this file if it does not already exist when it opens the image for viewing.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Aperio AFI </summary>\n\n An AFI image consists of:\n\n - **IMAGE_NAME.afi**: An XML manifest of the files representing each channel\n - **\\*.svs**: One or more images, each representing a channel\n\n\n **Example**: An archive file named \"273481.zip\" containing:\n\n ```\n 273481_Alexa Fluor 488.svs\n 273481_Alexa Fluor 594.svs\n 273481_DAPI.svs\n 273481.afi\n ```\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Hamamatsu NDPIS </summary>\n\n An NDPIS image consists of:\n\n - **IMAGE_NAME.ndpis**: An INI-like manifest of the files representing each channel\n - **\\*.ndpi**: One or more images, each representing a channel\n\n\n **Example**: An archive file named \"Ex_changer.tar.gz\" containing:\n\n ```\n Ex_changer-DAPI.ndpi\n Ex_changer-FITC.ndpi\n Ex_changer-TxRed.ndpi\n Ex_changer.ndpis\n ```\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Lunaphore OME-TIFF </summary>\n\n An image in the Lunaphore variant of OME-TIFF can have an auxiliary XML file which defines the minimum value, maximum value, gamma value, and pseudocolor for each channel.\n This XML file needs to match the filename of the OME-TIFF file with \".xml\" appended.\n\n\n **Example**: An archive file named \"Lunaphore 10plex (5 cycles)_Slide 7_Annotation 1.tar\" containing:\n\n ```\n Lunaphore 10plex (5 cycles)_Slide 7_Annotation 1.ome.tiff\n Lunaphore 10plex (5 cycles)_Slide 7_Annotation 1.ome.tiff.xml\n ```\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Olympus VSI </summary>\n\n A VSI image consists of a base **.vsi** image, and a folder named **\\_IMAGE_NAME\\_** which can contain a variety of subfolders and files.\n\n **Example**: An archive file named \"Her2.tar\" containing:\n\n ```\n Her2.vsi\n _Her2_/\n     stack1/\n         frame_t.ets\n     stack10001/\n         frame_t.ets\n     stack10004/\n         frame_t.ets\n ```\n\n</details>\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Only one image can be included in an archive file.\n</div>\n\n\n## Upload Client\n\nWhere the volume of images to be uploaded is large, it can be more efficient to upload images with a dedicated tool. The Pathcore Upload Client is a Windows application that has been designed for automating image uploads. It can be configured to upload images that appear in a \"watch\" folder. Once the images are uploaded, they are available for review in the [Unsorted Uploads](/docs/repository/unsorted-uploads/) section of the application, and from there they can be moved to the appropriate folder in the Repository.\n\nThe Upload Client can be configured to detect and upload images that are generated by a whole slide image scanner or it can be used to batch upload images on demand.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  Visit the <a href=\"https://pathcore.com/help\">Pathcore Help Center</a> to download the Upload Client and learn more.\n</div></div>\n\n\n## Universal LIS Connector\n##### [add-on]\n\nThe [Universal LIS Connector](/docs/integrations/universal-lis-connector/) (ULC) is a flexible and low-code framework designed to make integration with third-party systems fast and cost-effective. In particular, ULC has been designed for ingesting metadata from laboratory information systems and other study metadata tracking systems into the image management systems.\n\n\n## Image Indexing Services\n##### \\[add-on] [on-prem]\n\nThe indexing service has been designed for on-premise deployments. The service will find all the images in an attached storage system and reproduce the storage hierarchy in the Repository. The service provides a very efficient mechanism for managing storage in an on-premise deployment.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  The Image indexing services add-on is required to enable this feature.\n</div>\n\nA side effect of the indexing service is the possibility in some circumstances for duplicate records to be created in the Repository. Images that are moved or copied on the storage system after they have been found by the indexing service will result in duplicate records, as the duplication will be detected by the service as a new file. This is not a huge problem, because both records will function normally (i.e., they will be viewable, no broken links, etc). However, the 2nd record won't have any of the annotations or metadata that may have been associated with the first record.\n\nTo reorganize the images in the Repository, we recommend using PathcoreFlow's built-in copy or move functions, which handle image metadata. Note that copy operations in the Repository are shallow, so the image data will not be duplicated on disk.\n\n\n## Custom Built Uploader\n\nUsers can develop custom upload workflows using the API, which provides methods for adding files and metadata to the Repository. Contact [Pathcore Support](mailto:support@pathcore.com) to learn more.\n","slug":"docs/repository/data-ingestion"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Folder Listing","description":"folder listing"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Folder Listing\ndescription: folder listing\norder: 1\nsection: Repository\n---\n\n\n# Folder Listing\n\n<br />\n\n## Folder Navigation\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  Depending on your <a href=\"../../settings/accessible-content/\">Accessible Content</a> settings, some folders may not be visible or accessible.\n</div></div>\n\nNavigating through the folders in the Repository is similar to other file systems. Simply click into a folder to open it (i.e., enter into it) or click on a file to launch it. Any of the [supported image formats](/docs/overview/supported-formats/#supported-image-formats), such as whole slide images, DICOM images and photos, can be viewed with the built-in image Viewer on-demand via streaming technologies. Many non-image data files will need to be downloaded and viewed using external software.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To navigate to a folder </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Navigate to a folder using the folders listing\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To create a new folder </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Actions](../images/table-add.svg) button at the top right of the item list\n\n 2. In the popup menu, click **Create Folder**\n\n 3. Type a name for the new folder in the field\n\n 4. Click on the **Submit** button\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Current Folder\n\nWondering where you are? The path to the current folder is shown in a breadcrumb in the top bar of the Repository page. For example, **Repository > Folder > Subfolder**\n\nIf the breadcrumb exceeds a certain width, all of the folder names but the last are collapsed into an ![Ellipsis](../images/repository-ellipsis.svg) ellipsis button. You can click on the ellipsis button to display the complete list of folders.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  You can navigate to a parent folder by clicking into the breadcrumb.\n</div>\n\n\n### Current Folder Operations\n\nBy clicking the ![Down Arrow](../images/nav-arrow-down.svg) button next to the current folder's name in the breadcrumb (near the top of the page) you can access a menu of operations to perform on the folder.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  Depending on your <a href=\"../../settings/permissions/\">Permissions</a> and add-ons some operations may not be available.\n</div></div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Move </summary>\n\n **Move** opens the Move Item dialog, allowing you to move this folder to any other accessible folder.\n\n 1. Click on the ![Down Arrow](../images/nav-arrow-down.svg) button next to the current folder's breadcrumb\n\n 2. Click **Move**\n\n 3. In the popup dialog, select the destination folder from the available list\n\n 4. Click on the **Move to Folder** button\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to move a folder which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Copy </summary>\n\n **Copy** opens the Copy Item dialog, allowing you to make a copy of this folder in another folder.\n\n 1. Click on the ![Down Arrow](../images/nav-arrow-down.svg) button next to the current folder's breadcrumb\n\n 2. Click **Copy**\n\n 3. In the popup dialog, select the destination folder from the available list\n\n 4. Click on the **Copy to Folder** button\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   The new folder will be named \"Copy of <em>folder name</em>\".\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Copy URL </summary>\n\n **Copy URL** copies the URL of the folder to the clipboard.\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Properties </summary>\n\n **Properties** displays the [Properties Dialog](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#properties-dialog) for this folder.\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Rename </summary>\n\n **Rename** allows you to change the name of the current folder.\n\n 1. Click on the ![Down Arrow](../images/nav-arrow-down.svg) button next to the current folder's breadcrumb\n\n 2. Click **Rename**\n\n 3. In the popup dialog, type a new name for the folder\n\n 4. Click on the **Rename** button or press the **Enter** key to save. To discard your changes, click on the **Cancel** button or press the **Escape** key\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to rename a folder which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Edit Metadata </summary>\n\n **Edit Metadata** opens a dialog where you can add, change, or remove [Metadata](/docs/metadata/) fields for the current folder.\n\n See the [Metadata](/docs/metadata/) section for more details.\n\n 1. Click on the ![Down Arrow](../images/nav-arrow-down.svg) button next to the current folder's breadcrumb\n\n 2. Click **Edit Metadata**\n\n 3. The popup dialog allows you to add or remove metadata [System Fields](/docs/metadata/system-fields/), [Custom Fields](/docs/metadata/custom-fields/), and/or [Field Sets](/docs/metadata/field-sets/)\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to modify a folder which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Share </summary>\n\n **Share** opens the [Share Links](/docs/share-links/share-link-overview/) dialog, which allows you to add and manage share links for the current folder.\n\n See [Managing Share Links](/docs/share-links/managing-share-links/) for more details.\n\n 1. Click on the ![Down Arrow](../images/nav-arrow-down.svg) button next to the current folder's breadcrumb\n\n 2. Click **Share**\n\n 3. The popup dialog allows you to add and manage share links\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   A Share icon in the breadcrumb indicates share links are associated with the current folder.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Update Fields [add-on] </summary>\n\n See [Metadata - Synchronization](/docs/metadata/synchronization/).\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Update Fields (Forced) [add-on] </summary>\n\n See [Metadata - Synchronization](/docs/metadata/synchronization/).\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Mark as Read / Mark as Unread </summary>\n\n An item can be marked as \"read\" or \"unread\" depending on whether or not you have previously viewed it.\n\n See [Read Status](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#read-status) for more details.\n\n 1. Click on the ![Down Arrow](../images/nav-arrow-down.svg) button next to the current folder's breadcrumb\n\n 2. Click **Mark as Read** to enable the read status, or\n\n 3. Click **Mark as Unread** to clear the read status\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Favorite / Unfavorite </summary>\n\n **Favorite** tags the current folder as _Starred_. Items tagged this way are quickly and easily accessible from the Starred Items List.\n **Unfavorite** removes this tag.\n\n See [Favorite Status](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#favorite-status) for more details.\n\n 1. Click on the ![Down Arrow](../images/nav-arrow-down.svg) button next to the current folder's breadcrumb\n\n 2. Click **Favorite** to add the _Starred_ tag, or\n\n 3. Click **Unfavorite** to remove the tag\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Download </summary>\n\n **Download** opens the [Download](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#downloading) dialog, allowing you to save the contents and metadata locally.\n\n See [Downloading](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#downloading) for more details.\n\n 1. Click on the ![Down Arrow](../images/nav-arrow-down.svg) button next to the current folder's breadcrumb\n\n 2. Click **Download**\n\n 3. In the popup dialog, select what you would like to download (files and/or metadata)\n\n 4. Click on the **Download** button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Open in VIS [add-on] </summary>\n\n **Open in VIS** allows you to open the current folder in Visiopharm.\n\n See [Visiopharm Integration](/docs/integrations/visiopharm-integration/) for more details.\n\n 1. Click on the ![Down Arrow](../images/nav-arrow-down.svg) button next to the current folder's breadcrumb\n\n 2. Click **Open in VIS**\n\n 3. In the popup dialog, select your options\n\n 4. Click on the **Open** button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Open in HALO [add-on] </summary>\n\n **Open in HALO** allows you to open the current folder in Indica Labs's HALO software.\n\n See [HALO Integration](/docs/integrations/halo-integration/) for more details.\n\n 1. Click on the ![Down Arrow](../images/nav-arrow-down.svg) button next to the current folder's breadcrumb\n\n 2. Click **Open in HALO**\n\n 3. A SIS file will download\n\n 4. Open the SIS file in HALO\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Export Activities [add-on] </summary>\n\n **Export Activities** opens the Export Activities dialog, which can generate a CSV file of changes made to the folder over a specified period of time.\n\n See [Activity Logs](/docs/repository/activity-logs/) for more details.\n\n 1. Click on the ![Down Arrow](../images/nav-arrow-down.svg) button next to the current folder's breadcrumb\n\n 2. Click **Export Activities**\n\n 3. (Optional) In the popup dialog, select the start date from the **Since** field\n\n 4. (Optional) Select the desired output timezone from the **Timezone** dropdown menu\n\n 5. Click on the **Export CSV** button to download a CSV file\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Name Filter\n\nThe list of items can be filtered by name for quicker browsing.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To filter the list </summary>\n\n 1. Click in the ![Magnifying Glass](../images/repository-search.svg) **Search** box above the list of items\n\n 2. Type in the filter you wish to apply to the names. Only the items matching this text will be displayed\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   The filter can include one or more wildcard characters (<code>*</code>) which matches any character zero or more times.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Image Labels\n\nImage labels (sometimes called slide labels) can be shown in the Repository folder listing alongside an image's preview. Image labels are only displayed in [List View](#list-view) and [Icon View](#icon-view).\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle image labels </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Click on the ![Display Settings](../images/table-settings.svg) button at the top right of the item list\n\n 3. Set the **Display labels in slide listings** toggle\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Status\n\nA status icon is displayed next to an item's **Name** if there is something notable about that item. Hovering over the icon shows a tooltip with additional information.\n\nImages and attachments also have a **Status** [System Field](/docs/metadata/system-fields/) which describes the current status of the item within the Repository. The possible values for this field are \"Available\", \"Not Available\", and \"Missing\".\n\nThe status icon is only displayed in [List View](#list-view) and [Compact List View](#compact-list-view).\n\n|  Icon                                       | Tooltip                     |  Status        | Description |\n| :----:                                      | :-------                    | :-----         | :---------- |\n| ![Alert Icon](../images/repository-alert-icon.svg)    | File upload incomplete      | Not Available  | The file upload was incomplete |\n| ![Alert Icon](../images/repository-alert-icon.svg)    | File type detection failed  | Not Available  | PathcoreFlow was unable to determine what type of file this is |\n| ![Alert Icon](../images/repository-alert-icon.svg)    | File not ready for use      | Not Available  | Some other error has occurred with the file |\n| ![Missing Icon](../images/repository-missing-icon.svg)  | File missing                | Missing        | The underlying file data for this item is missing |\n| ![Share](../images/repository-share.svg)   | x Share Link(s)             | Available      | The number of Share Links associated with the item |\n\n\n## List View\n\nList View displays the content of a folder in a tabular format and you can sort the table using the available columns. Each column corresponds to a field.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To enable List View </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Click on the **Display Mode** button at the top right of the item list. This button will appear different depending on the current display mode: List (![List](../images/table-display-list.svg)), Compact List (![Compact List](../images/table-display-compact.svg)), or Icon (![Icon](../images/table-display-icon.svg))\n\n 3. In the popup menu, click **List**\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Sorting in List View\n\nList View arranges Repository items in a tabular fashion, making it convenient to display metadata and to sort the entries. In this mode, the columns of the table can be customized to show the Fields that are associated with each entry.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  The table columns and sort order are automatically remembered.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To sort items in List View </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. From the table header, click on a column until the desired sort order is shown (sort order is shown with ![Up Arrow](../images/table-sort-up-arrow.svg) for ascending order and ![Down Arrow](../images/table-sort-down-arrow.svg) for descending order in the table header adjacent to the selected column)\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To add a column </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Click on the ![Display Settings](../images/table-settings.svg) button at the top right of the item list\n\n 3. (Optional) Filter the available fields using the search box in the **Available Columns** section\n\n 4. Click on the ![Add Circle](../images/table-add-circle.svg) button next to a field in the **Available Columns** section\n\n 5. Click on the **Save** button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To remove a column </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Click on the ![Display Settings](../images/table-settings.svg) button at the top right of the item list\n\n 3. Click on the ![Remove Circle](../images/table-remove-circle.svg) button next to a field in the **Visible Columns** section\n\n 4. Click on the **Save** button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To restore the default columns </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Click on the ![Display Settings](../images/table-settings.svg) button at the top right of the item list\n\n 3. Click on the **Restore Defaults** button at the bottom left of the popup dialog\n\n 4. Click on the **Save** button\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Image Thumbnail\n\nThe size of the preview image (thumbnail) is controlled by the **Row height** setting\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  You can hover over the thumbnail with the cursor for a larger view\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the Row Height </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Display Settings](../images/table-settings.svg) button at the top right of the item list\n\n 2. Use the slider to adjust **Row height** to the desired value\n\n 3. Click on the **Save** button\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Compact List View\n\nCompact List View displays the content of a folder in a tabular format similar to List View, however image thumbnails are not shown and the rows are more compact. This allows you to see more entries at a time on a smaller display. You can still sort the table using the available columns. Each column corresponds to a field.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To enable Compact List View </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Click on the **Display Mode** button at the top right of the item list. This button will appear different depending on the current display mode: List (![List](../images/table-display-list.svg)), Compact List (![Compact List](../images/table-display-compact.svg)), or Icon (![Icon](../images/table-display-icon.svg))\n\n 3. In the popup menu, click **Compact List**\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Sorting in Compact List View\n\nSorting in Compact List View is the same as [sorting in List View](#sorting-in-list-view). See that section for more details.\n\n\n## Icon View\n\nIcon View displays the content of a folder as a series of icons. Icon View provides larger image thumbnails and labels, making it easier to preview image content. In this mode, metadata can only be seen for the selected item from the **Metadata** tab of the right-hand sidebar.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To enable Icon View </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Click on the **Display Mode** button at the top right of the item list. This button will appear different depending on the current display mode: List (![List](../images/table-display-list.svg)), Compact List (![Compact List](../images/table-display-compact.svg)), or Icon (![Icon](../images/table-display-icon.svg))\n\n 3. In the popup menu, click **Icon**\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To view metadata for an entry </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select an entry by clicking on it\n\n 3. View associated metadata in the **Metadata** tab of the right-hand panel. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Sorting in Icon View\n\nThe folder items in Icon View can be sorted by item name, type, or last modified time.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To sort items in Icon View </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Click on the ![Display Settings](../images/table-settings.svg) button at the top right of the item list\n\n 3. Select the desired sort option from the **Sort By** dropdown menu: **Name**, **Type**, or **Last Modified**\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/repository/folder-listing"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"","description":null},"rawBody":"---\nredirect: /docs/repository/repository-overview/\n---\n","slug":"docs/repository/"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Repository Operations","description":"repository operations"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Repository Operations\ndescription: repository operations\norder: 2\nsection: Repository\n---\n\n\n# Repository Operations\n\n<br />\n\nThis section contains a list of basic operations that are available for items in the Repository.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Different operations are available depending on the type and number of items selected.\n</div>\n\n\n## Context Menu\n\nMost operations can be performed via a context menu. This menu is accessed by right-clicking on an item in the [Folder Listing](/docs/repository/folder-listing/) (or one of the currently selected items when using [Multi-Select](#multi-select)). The same menu can be accessed by clicking the ![Down Arrow](../images/nav-arrow-down.svg) button next to the item's name in the right-hand panel. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  On a mobile device, tap and hold on an item to display the context menu. Alternatively, you may tap on an item to select it and then tap on the <b>1 Selected</b> dropdown menu at the top of the item list, next to the search box.\n</div></div>\n\n<br />\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  Depending on your <a href=\"../../settings/permissions/\">Permissions</a> and add-ons some operations may not be available.\n</div></div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Move </summary>\n\n **Move** opens the Move Item dialog, allowing you to move the item (or items) to any accessible folder.\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 2. Click **Move**\n\n 3. In the popup dialog, select the destination folder from the available list\n\n 4. Click on the **Move to Folder** button\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to move an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Copy </summary>\n\n **Copy** opens the Copy Item dialog, allowing you to make a copy of the item (or items) in another folder.\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   When copying entries in the Repository, the underlying files are not duplicated (i.e., copies are linked to the same underlying file) and thus do not consume additional storage. However, the metadata associated with the copied entries, such as annotations, snapshots, and Custom Fields, are duplicated when an entry in the Repository is copied (i.e., duplicated entries will retain an independent copy of the original metadata).\n </div>\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 2. Click **Copy**\n\n 3. In the popup dialog, select the destination folder from the available list\n\n 4. Click on the **Copy to Folder** button\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   The new file or folder will be named \"Copy of <em>item name</em>\".\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Copy URL &mdash; single item only </summary>\n\n **Copy URL** copies the URL of the item to the clipboard.\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Open Folder &mdash; folders only </summary>\n\n **Open Folder** navigates into the selected folder.\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> View Image(s) &mdash; images only </summary>\n\n **View Images** opens the selected item (or items) in the [Viewer](/docs/viewer/overview/).\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   Only images can be opened in the Viewer.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Properties </summary>\n\n **Properties** displays the [Properties Dialog](#properties-dialog) for the selected item (or items).\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Retry Type Detection &mdash; attachments only </summary>\n\n **Retry Type Detection** attempts to force the system to detect this attachment as an image again. This can be useful if an image uploaded completely, but for whatever reason is not being recognized by PathcoreFlow as an image. If this still does not work you may need to contact [Pathcore Support](mailto:support@pathcore.com).\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   This operation only applies to attachments.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Rename &mdash; single item only </summary>\n\n **Rename** allows you to change the name of the item.\n While all entries in the Repository have names, names do not have to be unique because each entry has a unique ID, see [Names and IDs](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#names-and-ids).\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   It’s not possible to rename multiple items at the same time.\n </div>\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item\n\n 2. Click **Rename**\n\n 3. In the popup dialog, type a new name for the item\n\n 4. Click on the **Rename** button or press the **Enter** key to save. To discard your changes, click on the **Cancel** button or press the **Escape** key\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to rename an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Edit Metadata </summary>\n\n **Edit Metadata** opens a dialog where you can add, change, or remove [Metadata](/docs/metadata/) fields for the item (or items).\n\n See the [Metadata](/docs/metadata/) section for more details.\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 2. Click **Edit Metadata**\n\n 3. The popup dialog allows you to add or remove metadata [System Fields](/docs/metadata/system-fields/), [Custom Fields](/docs/metadata/custom-fields/), and/or [Field Sets](/docs/metadata/field-sets/)\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to modify an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Share &mdash; single item only </summary>\n\n **Share** opens the [Share Links](/docs/share-links/share-link-overview/) dialog, which allows you to add and manage share links for the item.\n\n See [Managing Share Links](/docs/share-links/managing-share-links/) for more details.\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   It’s not possible to share multiple items at a time. However it is possible to share a folder of items.\n </div>\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item\n\n 2. Click **Share**\n\n 3. The popup dialog allows you to add and manage share links\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Update Fields &mdash; single item only [add-on] </summary>\n\n See [Metadata - Synchronization](/docs/metadata/synchronization/).\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Update Fields (Forced) &mdash; single item only [add-on] </summary>\n\n See [Metadata - Synchronization](/docs/metadata/synchronization/).\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Mark as Read / Mark as Unread </summary>\n\n An item can be marked as \"read\" (name in plain text) or \"unread\" (name in bold) depending on whether or not you have previously viewed it.\n\n See [Read Status](#read-status) for more details.\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 2. Click **Mark as Read** to enable the read status, or\n\n 3. Click **Mark as Unread** to clear the read status\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Favorite / Unfavorite </summary>\n\n **Favorite** tags the item (or items) as _Starred_. Items tagged this way are quickly and easily accessible from the Starred Items List.\n **Unfavorite** removes this tag.\n\n See [Favorite Status](#favorite-status) for more details.\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 2. Click **Favorite** to add the _Starred_ tag, or\n\n 3. Click **Unfavorite** to remove the tag\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Download </summary>\n\n **Download** opens the [Download](#downloading) dialog, allowing you to save items and metadata locally.\n\n See [Downloading](#downloading) for more details.\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 2. Click **Download**\n\n 3. In the popup dialog, select what you would like to download (files and/or metadata)\n\n 4. Click on the **Download** button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Export Figure &mdash; single Figure only </summary>\n\n **Export Figure** opens the [Download Figure](/docs/viewer/figure-maker/#downloading-figures) dialog, allowing you to export a Figure as a common image format.\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Open in VIS [add-on] </summary>\n\n **Open in VIS** allows you to open the item (or items) in Visiopharm.\n\n See [Visiopharm Integration](/docs/integrations/visiopharm-integration/) for more details.\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 2. Click **Open in VIS**\n\n 3. In the popup dialog, select your options\n\n 4. Click on the **Open** button\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   When opening multiple images in Visiopharm, they must all be in the same folder. Also, no images in Unsorted Uploads can be opened in Visiopharm.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Open in HALO [add-on] </summary>\n\n **Open in HALO** allows you to open the item (or items) in Indica Labs's HALO software.\n\n See [HALO Integration](/docs/integrations/halo-integration/) for more details.\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 2. Click **Open in HALO**\n\n 3. A SIS file will download\n\n 4. Open the SIS file in HALO\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Export Activities &mdash; single item only [add-on] </summary>\n\n **Export Activities** opens the Export Activities dialog, which can generate a CSV file of changes made to the item over a specified period of time.\n\n See [Activity Logs](/docs/repository/activity-logs/) for more details.\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item\n\n 2. Click **Export Activities**\n\n 3. (Optional) In the popup dialog, select the start date from the **Since** field\n\n 4. (Optional) Select the desired output timezone from the **Timezone** dropdown menu\n\n 5. Click on the **Export CSV** button to download a CSV file\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Move to Trash </summary>\n\n **Move to Trash** allows you to move the selected item(s) to the [Trash](/docs/repository/trash/).\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 2. Click **Move to Trash**\n\n 3. Click on the **Yes** button to confirm if you are sure you wish to move the item(s) to the Trash. To cancel the action, click on the **Cancel** button or press the **Escape** key\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to move an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a> to Trash, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Multi-Select\n\nOne or more files can be selected from the folder listing page in order to perform bulk operations such as download, copy or move.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To select more than one file </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Click on an item from the file listing\n\n 3. While holding the **Ctrl** key (on Windows) or **&#x2318; / Command** key (on macOS) select another file\n\n 4. Repeat step 3 as necessary\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n<summary> To select more than one file in a continuous range </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Click on the first item in the range from the file listing\n\n 3. While holding the **Shift** key, select the last file in the range\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Description\n\nEvery item in the Repository has a user editable multi-line description. By default, an item's description is empty. Use the description to record a finding about an image, folder or file.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To edit an item's description </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select a single item in a folder\n\n 3. Click on the **Edit Description** button (or **Add Description** button if no description yet exists) in the **Metadata** tab of the right-hand panel. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed\n\n 4. Type the description in the text area that appears\n\n 5. Click on the **Save** button to save the changes. To discard your changes, click on the **Cancel** button\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to modify an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Read Status\n\nThe names of items (files and folders) in the Repository are in bold to indicate an item is \"unread\". Once an item has been \"read\", plain text font is used for the name of the item. New items are always unread and are automatically marked as read once they have been opened, viewed or downloaded by a user. The following actions will cause the status of an item to be marked as \"read\":\n\n- Clicking on an image file causing the Viewer to launch\n- Clicking on any other item causing it open in the browser or be downloaded\n\nThe read status is unique for each user and can be toggled at any time, making it useful for tracking items that require further attention.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  The \"read\" status can be changed manually from the <a href=\"#context-menu\">context menu</a> for an item.\n</div></div>\n\n\n## Favorite Status\n\nEach Repository item has a favorite status, which can be toggled by clicking on the ![Empty Star](../images/repository-star-empty.svg) button adjacent to the item’s name. A solid star indicates an item has been marked as a favorite while a hollow star (default) status indicates the item is not a favorite.\n\nThe favorite status is unique for each user and can be toggled at any time, making it useful for tracking items that require further attention.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To view a list of all favorited items </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Star](../images/repository-star-full.svg) **Starred** button in the **TAGS** section of the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle favorite status </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Toggle the ![Empty Star](../images/repository-star-empty.svg) button next to the item to indicate the status\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Properties Dialog\n\nThe Properties dialog shows details about one or more Repository items.\n\nThe following details are displayed:\n- The name of a single item, or the total number of items\n  - A ![Share](../images/repository-share.svg) icon is displayed to the right of this field if at least one item has a share link. Hovering over the icon shows how many share links are associated with the item(s)\n- **Size**: the total estimated size to download the selected items and their children (e.g., image overlays, or folder contents)\n  - Hovering over the ![Info Icon](../images/repository-info-icon.svg) icon shows additional details such as how much of your Repository storage these items are using, or how much space can be recovered by deleting them\n- **Location**: The path in the Repository to the item (or items, if they are all in the same location)\n- **Contents**: The number and types of the items\n- **Created**: The creation date and time of an item (or items, if they are all within the same minute)\n- **Modified**: The last modified date and time of an item (or items, if they are all within the same minute)\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Why are there three different sizes? </summary>\n\n In some cases, the Properties dialog will show differing values for the total size, the size on disk, and the amount that would be recovered by deleting the selected item(s). This is because when entries in the Repository are copied, the underlying files are not duplicated (i.e., copies are linked to the same underlying file) and thus do not consume additional storage.\n\n - The size listed in the dialog represents the total size of the items (e.g., how much storage you would need on your local computer to download these items)\n\n - The space consumed on disk takes into account any copies (i.e., it only counts duplicates once)\n\n - The storage space recovered by deleting the selection also takes into account other copies of the items elsewhere in the Repository (e.g., deleting one copy of an item which still exists in another folder does not delete the underlying file)\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   <strong>Example</strong>\n\n   A user uploads an image of size 100 MiB to the Repository. They then make two copies of the image. The user selects two of these images and opens the Properties dialog.\n\n   The Size reported will be 200 MiB. Hovering over the information icon shows a tooltip containing \"This selection consumes 100 MiB on disk. Deleting it would recover 0 B once the trash can is cleared.\"\n\n   200 MiB - the sum of the image files' sizes\n\n   100 MiB - because the two items are copies, there is only one underlying file\n\n   0 B - because there is still an active copy of the image in the Repository, deleting these items does not recover any storage space\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n## Downloading\n\nIn general, one or more files or folders can be downloaded from the Repository. Depending on the type and number of items downloaded, or the options selected in the download dialog, an archive file may need to be generated before the download can begin. The following will cause this to occur:\n- Selecting multiple items, or a folder of items, for download\n- Including metadata options in the download dialog\n- Downloading a [multi-file image format](/docs/repository/data-ingestion/#multi-file-images), such as MRXS\n\nWhen this is the case, the download dialog will include a dropdown menu to select an archive file format.\n\nCertain item types cannot be combined into a single download. For example, a Figure cannot be downloaded with any other item (including another Figure) because it has a unique export workflow.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Some web browsers may require your permission before downloading files.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Download dialog options </summary>\n\n The following options are available when downloading:\n\n - **Files**: Toggle to include the selected files and folders\n - **Metadata**: Toggle to include metadata about the selected files and folders. You can further customize the additional metadata to include:\n   - **Annotations**: Toggle to include your private annotations as well as shared annotations by others\n   - **Snapshot Coordinates**: Toggle to include snapshot coordinates and properties\n   - **Fields**: Toggle to include [System Fields](/docs/metadata/system-fields/), [Custom Fields](/docs/metadata/custom-fields/), and [Field Sets](/docs/metadata/field-sets/). See the [Metadata](/docs/metadata/tags/) section for more details\n   - **Tags**: Toggle to include tags you have assigned to the items\n   - **Overlays**: Toggle to include overlay images added to images in the selected items\n   - **VIS Results**: Toggle to include analysis results imported from Visiopharm. This option is only available if you have the [Visiopharm Integration](/docs/integrations/visiopharm-integration/) add-on\n   - **HALO Results**: Toggle to include analysis results imported from HALO. This option is only available if you have the [HALO Integration](/docs/integrations/halo-integration/) add-on\n - **Download as JSON** / **Download as CSV**: choose the file format of the selected metadata. These options can only be selected if metadata is included in the download\n - **.tar**: This dropdown menu lets you select the archive format when more than one item and/or metadata are included\n\n   <div class=\"info\"><div>\n     The <b>.tar.gz</b> and <b>.zip</b> archive formats are not available by default in this release. If you require these formats, you may need to contact <a href=\"mailto:support@pathcore.com\">Pathcore Support</a>.\n   </div></div>\n\n   <br />\n\n   <div class=\"info\"><div>\n     <b>.tar</b> archives are natively supported by Microsoft Windows 11, macOS, and all major Linux distributions. For users running Windows 10 or prior, we recommend a third-party archive manager such as [7-Zip](https://www.7-zip.org/).\n   </div></div>\n\nWhen the selection contains a single item, such as an image file, attachment, or report, the file itself will be downloaded. In other cases, such as for a single saved Figure item, the download will trigger an export and preview window. When there are multiple items or a folder selected, a downloadable archive will be generated in the chosen format with the option to include metadata.\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> User restrictions </summary>\n\n Certain permission flags are required to be able to download an item from the Repository. The permissions required depend on the type of item:\n\n | Item Type  | Required Permission Flags |\n | ---------  | ------------------------- |\n | Attachment | Files-&gt;View |\n | Figure     | Images-&gt;View<br/>Protected Information-&gt;View (if slide label is enabled in the Figure) |\n | Image      | Images-&gt;View<br/>Images-&gt;Download<br/>Protected Information-&gt;View |\n\n</details>\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Most downloads can be paused and resumed later (e.g., in the event of a network interruption).\n</div>\n","slug":"docs/repository/repository-operations"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Repository Overview","description":"repository overview"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Repository Overview\ndescription: repository overview\norder: 0\nsection: Repository\n---\n\n\n# Repository Overview\n\n<br />\n\n\n## A Virtual File System\n\nThe Repository is a virtual file system that is accessible from any internet-enabled device. It supports nested folders and all file types, like the file system on your computer, which is convenient for organizing and retaining your team's important files, images and related information.\n\n\n## Built-in Image Viewer\n\nAny of the [supported image formats](/docs/overview/supported-formats/#supported-image-formats), such as whole slide images, DICOM images and photos, can be viewed with the built-in image [Viewer](/docs/viewer/) on-demand, using streaming technologies. However, many of the non-image data files will need to be downloaded and viewed using external software.\n\n\n## Supported Metadata Types\n\nRepositories provide flexible and customizable methods for creating and tracking metadata. The following metadata types are supported at folder-level and file-level:\n\n- [Fields](/docs/metadata/system-fields/) (key-value pairs)\n- [Tags](/docs/metadata/tags/)\n\nAdditionally, for image files (i.e., files that have been identified as images) the following metadata types are also supported:\n\n- [Annotations](/docs/viewer/annotations-panel/)\n- [Snapshots](/docs/viewer/snapshots/)\n- [Overlays](/docs/viewer/overlays/)\n\n\n## Unlimited Folders\n\nFolders in the Repository can be nested to any depth and can contain all types of files. The top level of the Repository can only contain folders (i.e., no files) which is convenient for organizing and permissioning data for different users, groups, years, studies, etc.\n\n\n## Names and IDs\n\nWhile all entries in the Repository have names, names do not have to be unique because each entry has a unique ID. By convention, folders have integer IDs while files have alphanumeric IDs.\n\n\n## Navigation Menu\n\nThe navigation menu provides easy access to the various sections of the application, as well as a quick way to see all items with a given [tag](/docs/metadata/tags/).\n- In desktop mode, the navigation menu appears in the left-hand sidebar\n- On a mobile device, the navigation menu is accessed by tapping on the top left ![Navigation Menu](../images/nav-menu.svg) button\n- In all modes, the sidebar can be collapsed with the ![Collapse](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) **Collapse Sidebar** button and expanded with the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-right.svg) button\n","slug":"docs/repository/repository-overview"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Trash","description":"trash"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Trash\ndescription: trash\norder: 5\nsection: Repository\n---\n\n# Trash\n\n<br />\n\nThe Trash collects items that have been removed from the Repository and marked for deletion, but which have not yet been permanently erased. It provides a space to review and restore recently deleted items.\n\nBy default, items in the Trash are retained for 30 days. A different retention period can be set in the **Settings** under the [Team Customization](/docs/settings/team-customization/) tab, with some packages.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  Access to the Trash requires at least one of the \"Folders-&gt;Delete\" or \"Files-&gt;Delete\" <a href=\"../../settings/permissions/#permission-flags\">permission flags</a>.\n</div></div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To access the Trash </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Trash](../images/nav-trash.svg) **Trash** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Trashed Items List\n\nThe list of items in the Trash is displayed using the same tabular interface as the Repository. The same table columns and sort order are also applied.\n\n- Instead of a **Location** column there is an **Original Location**, which indicates which folder contained the item before it was moved to the Trash\n  - Hover over the **Original Location** value to see the full path\n- To change the view, sort order, or available columns, follow the same procedures as other [folders](/docs/repository/folder-listing/)\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  A banner is displayed above the list of items indicating the current retention period set for items in the Trash.\n</div>\n\n\n## Context Menu\n\nMost operations can be performed via a context menu. This menu is accessed by right-clicking on an item in the search results listing (or one of the currently selected items when using [Multi-Select](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#multi-select)). The same menu can be accessed by clicking the ![Down Arrow](../images/nav-arrow-down.svg) button next to the item's name in the right-hand panel. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  On a mobile device, tap and hold on an item to display the context menu. Alternatively, you may tap on an item to select it and then tap on the <b>1 Selected</b> dropdown menu at the top of the item list, next to the search box.\n</div></div>\n\n<br />\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  The items displayed in the Trash are limited to those deleted from the current viewer's <a href=\"../../settings/accessible-content/\">Accessible Content</a>.\n</div></div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To restore an item (or items) to the Repository </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Trash](../images/nav-trash.svg) **Trash** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. [Select one or more](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#multi-select) items to restore in the list\n\n 3. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 4. Click **Restore**\n\n 5. In the popup dialog, click on the **Restore** button to confirm. To cancel the action, click **Cancel** or press the **Escape** key\n\n 6. If the original location of one or more of the items is no longer available, you will be prompted to select a new folder for them:\n\n    1. In the popup dialog, select the destination folder from the available list\n\n    2. Click on the **Restore** button\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to restore an item which was governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a> when it was moved to the Trash, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete an item (or items) from the Trash </summary>\n\n <div class=\"warning\">\n    Items which are deleted forever cannot be recovered. Be careful with this action.\n </div>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Trash](../images/nav-trash.svg) **Trash** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. [Select one or more](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#multi-select) items to delete in the list\n\n 3. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 4. Click **Delete Forever**\n\n 5. In the popup dialog, click on the **Delete Forever** button to confirm. To cancel the action, click **Cancel** or press the **Escape** key\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To empty the Trash </summary>\n\n When the Trash is emptied, all items within it are deleted forever.\n\n <div class=\"warning\">\n    Items which are deleted forever cannot be recovered. Be careful with this action.\n </div>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Trash](../images/nav-trash.svg) **Trash** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on **Empty Trash** at the right-hand side of the banner above the list of items\n\n 3. In the popup dialog, click on the **Delete Forever** button to confirm. To cancel the action, click **Cancel** or press the **Escape** key\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   <b>Empty Trash</b> requires the \"Files-&gt;Delete\" <a href=\"../../settings/permissions/#permission-flags\">permission flag</a>.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/repository/trash"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"","description":null},"rawBody":"---\nredirect: /docs/overview/supported-formats/\n---\n","slug":"docs/repository/supported-formats"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Unsorted Uploads","description":"unsorted uploads"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Unsorted Uploads\ndescription: unsorted uploads\norder: 4\nsection: Repository\n---\n\n# Unsorted Uploads\n\n<br />\n\nThis page is where all uploaded items that have yet to be sorted are displayed. These files are typically transferred into PathcoreFlow via the [Pathcore Upload Client](/docs/repository/data-ingestion/#upload-client).\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  Access to the Unsorted Uploads page requires the \"Manage uploaded files\" <a href=\"../../settings/permissions/#permission-flags\">permission flag</a>.\n</div></div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To access the Unsorted Uploads page </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Uploads](../images/nav-file.svg) **Uploads** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Uploads List\n\nThe list of items in Unsorted Uploads is displayed using the same tabular interface as the Repository. The same table columns and sort order are also applied.\n\n- To change the view, sort order, or available columns, follow the same procedures as other [folders](/docs/repository/folder-listing/)\n- Many of the Repository operations can be performed on items in the Unsorted Uploads list. See [Repository Operations](/docs/repository/repository-operations/) for more details\n","slug":"docs/repository/unsorted-uploads"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Exporting Results","description":"exporting results"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Exporting Results\ndescription: exporting results\norder: 12\nsection: Search\n---\n\n\n# Exporting Results\n\n<br />\n\nSearch results can be exported as a file in CSV format. The exported file will always contain one row per search result and the columns describe the [System Fields](/docs/metadata/system-fields/) and [Custom Fields](/docs/metadata/custom-fields/) associated with the results. For each row/result, the available columns are populated.\n\nThe first row in the file is a header row that defines the name of all fields associated with the exported results. The columns in the file represent the union of fields available for the exported results.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To export search results </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Search](../images/nav-search.svg) **Search** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Perform a search query. See [Basic Queries](/docs/search/search-overview/#basic-queries) for more details\n\n 3. Click on the ![More](../images/table-more.svg) button at the top right of the search results\n\n 4. In the popup menu, click on **Export as CSV**\n\n 5. In the popup dialog, click on the **Start Export** button. If prompted, select a location to save the downloaded file\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Empty Columns\n\nAn empty column in the exported file is somewhat ambiguous in that it may correspond to a field that is associated with the result but is undefined, or it may correspond to a field that is not associated with the result at all.\n","slug":"docs/search/exporting-results"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Saved Searches","description":"saved searches"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Saved Searches\ndescription: saved searches\norder: 13\nsection: Search\n---\n\n\n# Saved Searches\n##### [BioPharma]\n\nSearch queries can be saved and recalled at the click of a button. Saving may be used for frequently used queries, for complex queries or for sharing a query with team members.\n\nA saved search query is not the same as saving the results of a search. When a saved query is executed, the results may vary depending on available data. To save the results of a search, [export search results](/docs/search/exporting-results/) after the search has been executed.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To save a search query </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Search](../images/nav-search.svg) **Search** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Perform a search query. See [Basic Queries](/docs/search/search-overview/#basic-queries) for more details\n\n 3. Click on the **Save This Search** button\n\n 4. Type a name for the search conditions in the **Name** field\n\n 5. (Optional) Enable the **Share With Team** toggle to share this search with other users\n\n 6. Click on the **Save** button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To execute a previously saved search query </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Search](../images/nav-search.svg) **Search** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Saved Searches** tab at the top of the page\n\n 3. Click on the search query you would like to execute\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Sharing Saved Searches\n\nSaved searches can be shared with other users on the team. Once a saved search is shared, it will be visible to all other users on the team but other users cannot modify the saved search. Saved searches cannot be selectively shared.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To share a saved search with your team </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Search](../images/nav-search.svg) **Search** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Saved Searches** tab at the top of the page\n\n 3. Choose **Edit** from the **More** menu to the right of a saved search query in the list\n\n 4. Enable the **Share With Team** toggle\n\n 5. Click on the **Save** button\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Modifying Saved Searches\n\nSaved search queries cannot be directly modified but there is a simple workaround that involves executing a saved search, modifying the query, re-saving it as a new search and deleting the original query.\n\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To rename a saved search query </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Search](../images/nav-search.svg) **Search** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Saved Searches** tab at the top of the page\n\n 3. Choose **Edit** from the **More** menu to the right of a saved search query in the list\n\n 4. Provide a new name\n\n 5. (Optional) adjust the **Share with Team** toggle\n\n 5. Click on the **Save** button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete a saved search query </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Search](../images/nav-search.svg) **Search** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Saved Searches** tab at the top of the page\n\n 3. Choose **Delete** from the **More** menu to the right of a saved search query in the list\n\n 4. Click on the **Yes** button to confirm deletion\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/search/saved-searches"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Search Operations","description":"search operations"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Search Operations\ndescription: search operations\norder: 11\nsection: Search\n---\n\n\n# Search Operations\n\n<br />\n\nSearch can be used to perform bulk operations on the items in the Repository. All Repository operations can be performed with search results. See [Repository Operations](/docs/repository/repository-operations/) for more details.\n\n\n## Context Menu\n\nMost operations can be performed via a context menu. This menu is accessed by right-clicking on an item in the search results listing (or one of the currently selected items when using [Multi-Select](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#multi-select)). The same menu can be accessed by clicking the ![Down Arrow](../images/nav-arrow-down.svg) button next to the item's name in the right-hand panel. You may need to click on the ![Expand](../images/nav-arrow-left.svg) button if the panel is collapsed.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  On a mobile device, tap and hold on an item to display the context menu. Alternatively, you may tap on an item to select it and then tap on the <b>1 Selected</b> dropdown menu at the top of the item list, next to the search box.\n</div></div>\n\n<br />\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  Depending on your <a href=\"../../settings/permissions/\">Permissions</a> and add-ons some operations may not be available.\n</div></div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Move </summary>\n\n **Move** opens the Move Item dialog, allowing you to move the item (or items) to any accessible folder.\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 2. Click **Move**\n\n 3. In the popup dialog, select the destination folder from the available list\n\n 4. Click on the **Move to Folder** button\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to move an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Copy </summary>\n\n **Copy** opens the Copy Item dialog, allowing you to make a copy of the item (or items) in another folder.\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   When copying entries in the Repository, the underlying files are not duplicated (i.e., copies are linked to the same underlying file) and thus do not consume additional storage. However, the metadata associated with the copied entries, such as annotations, snapshots, and Custom Fields, are duplicated when an entry in the Repository is copied (i.e., duplicated entries will retain an independent copy of the original metadata).\n </div>\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 2. Click **Copy**\n\n 3. In the popup dialog, select the destination folder from the available list\n\n 4. Click on the **Copy to Folder** button\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   The new file or folder will be named \"Copy of <em>item name</em>\".\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Copy URL &mdash; single item only </summary>\n\n **Copy URL** copies the URL of the item to the clipboard.\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Open Folder &mdash; folders only </summary>\n\n **Open Folder** navigates into the selected folder.\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> View Image(s) &mdash; images only</summary>\n\n **View Images** opens the select item (or items) in the [Viewer](/docs/viewer/overview/).\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   Only images can be opened in the Viewer.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Properties </summary>\n\n **Properties** displays the [Properties Dialog](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#properties-dialog) for this folder.\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Retry Type Detection &mdash; attachments only </summary>\n\n **Retry Type Detection** attempts to force the system to detect this attachment as an image again. This can be useful if an image uploaded completely, but for whatever reason is not being recognized by PathcoreFlow as an image. If this still does not work you may need to contact [Pathcore Support](mailto:support@pathcore.com).\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   This operation only applies to attachments.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Rename &mdash; single item only </summary>\n\n **Rename** allows you to change the name of the item.\n While all entries in the Repository have names, names do not have to be unique because each entry has a unique ID, see [Names and IDs](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#names-and-ids).\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   It’s not possible to rename multiple items at the same time.\n </div>\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item\n\n 2. Click **Rename**\n\n 3. In the popup dialog, type a new name for the item\n\n 4. Click on the **Rename** button or press the **Enter** key to save. To discard your changes, click on the **Cancel** button or press the **Escape** key\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to rename an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Edit Metadata </summary>\n\n **Edit Metadata** opens a dialog where you can add, change, or remove [Metadata](/docs/metadata/) fields for the item (or items).\n\n See the [Metadata](/docs/metadata/) section for more details.\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 2. Click **Edit Metadata**\n\n 3. The popup dialog allows you to add or remove metadata [System Fields](/docs/metadata/system-fields/), [Custom Fields](/docs/metadata/custom-fields/), and/or [Field Sets](/docs/metadata/field-sets/)\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to modify an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Share &mdash; single item only </summary>\n\n **Share** opens the [Share Links](/docs/share-links/share-link-overview/) dialog, which allows you to add and manage share links for the item.\n\n See [Managing Share Links](/docs/share-links/managing-share-links/) for more details.\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   It’s not possible to share multiple items at a time. However it is possible to share a folder of items.\n </div>\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item\n\n 2. Click **Share**\n\n 3. The popup dialog allows you to add and manage share links\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Update Fields &mdash; single item only [add-on] </summary>\n\n See [Metadata - Synchronization](/docs/metadata/synchronization/).\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Update Fields (Forced) &mdash; single item only [add-on] </summary>\n\n See [Metadata - Synchronization](/docs/metadata/synchronization/).\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Mark as Read / Mark as Unread </summary>\n\n An item can be marked as \"read\" (name in plain text) or \"unread\" (name in bold) depending on whether or not you have previously viewed it.\n\n See [Read Status](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#read-status) for more details.\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 2. Click **Mark as Read** to enable the read status, or\n\n 3. Click **Mark as Unread** to clear the read status\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Favorite / Unfavorite </summary>\n\n **Favorite** tags the item (or items) as _Starred_. Items tagged this way are quickly and easily accessible from the Starred Items List.\n **Unfavorite** removes this tag.\n\n See [Favorite Status](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#favorite-status) for more details.\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 2. Click **Favorite** to add the _Starred_ tag, or\n\n 3. Click **Unfavorite** to remove the tag\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Download </summary>\n\n **Download** opens the [Download](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#downloading) dialog, allowing you to save items and metadata locally.\n\n See [Downloading](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#downloading) for more details.\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 2. Click **Download**\n\n 3. In the popup dialog, select what you would like to download (files and/or metadata)\n\n 4. Click on the **Download** button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Open in VIS [add-on] </summary>\n\n **Open in VIS** allows you to open the item (or items) in Visiopharm.\n\n See [Visiopharm Integration](/docs/integrations/visiopharm-integration/) for more details.\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 2. Click **Open in VIS**\n\n 3. In the popup dialog, select your options\n\n 4. Click on the **Open** button\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   When opening multiple images in Visiopharm, they must all be in the same folder. Also, no images in Unsorted Uploads can be opened in Visiopharm.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Open in HALO [add-on] </summary>\n\n **Open in HALO** allows you to open the item (or items) in Indica Labs's HALO software.\n\n See [HALO Integration](/docs/integrations/halo-integration/) for more details.\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 2. Click **Open in HALO**\n\n 3. A SIS file will download\n\n 4. Open the SIS file in HALO\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Export Activities &mdash; single item only [add-on] </summary>\n\n **Export Activities** opens the Export Activities dialog, which can generate a CSV file of changes made to the item over a specified period of time.\n\n See [Activity Logs](/docs/repository/activity-logs/) for more details.\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item\n\n 2. Click **Export Activities**\n\n 3. (Optional) In the popup dialog, select the start date from the **Since** field\n\n 4. (Optional) Select the desired output timezone from the **Timezone** dropdown menu\n\n 5. Click on the **Export CSV** button to download a CSV file\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Move to Trash </summary>\n\n **Move to Trash** allows you to move the selected item(s) to the [Trash](/docs/repository/trash/).\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 2. Click **Move to Trash**\n\n 3. Click on the **Yes** button to confirm if you are sure you wish to move the item(s) to the Trash. To cancel the action, click on the **Cancel** button or press the **Escape** key\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to move an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a> to Trash, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Exporting\n\nSearch results can be exported as a file in CSV format. See [Exporting Results](/docs/search/exporting-results/) for more details.\n\n\n## Tagging\n\nSearch results can be bulk tagged. This allows you to quickly apply a tag or set of tags to all items that match the search query.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To apply tags to all search results </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Search](../images/nav-search.svg) **Search** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Perform a search query. See [Basic Queries](/docs/search/search-overview/#basic-queries) for more details\n\n 3. Click on the ![More](../images/table-more.svg) button at the top right of the search results\n\n 4. In the popup menu, click on **Tag All Results**\n\n 5. In the popup dialog, choose a tag from the **Add a tag..** dropdown menu. To create a new tag, type directly into the field and click on the **+ New tag** option\n\n 6. Click on the **Tag Results** button\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/search/search-operations"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"","description":null},"rawBody":"---\nredirect: /docs/search/search-overview/\n---\n","slug":"docs/search/"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Accessible Content","description":"accessible content"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Accessible Content\ndescription: accessible content\norder: 42\nsection: Settings\n---\n\n\n# Accessible Content\n\n## General\n\nA user’s accessible content defines the set of folders that the user can access. These are the set of folders that a user will see in the system. Accessible content limitations are enforced in the Repository, in search, and via the API. Accessible content is related to [Data Groups](/docs/settings/data-groups/).\n\n## Granularity\n\nAccessible content for any user can be configured to include all folders in the Repository or restricted to an arbitrary set of folders in the Repository. A user may also be denied access to the Repository all together. To edit a user’s accessible content, see [Modifying Accessible Content](/docs/settings/user-management/#modifying-accessible-content).\n\n## Effect on Repository\n\nWhen entering the Repository, restricted users will only see folders allowed by their accessible content. Any folder that has been excluded from a user’s accessible content will simply not appear in the Repository. As a result, the Repository may look different for different users, especially at the top most level because it will only show the highest-level ancestor for the folder trees each user can access.\n\n## Special Considerations\n\nThough it’s possible to disallow access to the Repository for any user, there are side effects that make this not suitable for administrators in particular. Users that have no accessible content (i.e., do not have access to any folders) will experience some limitations, regardless of their permission level. For instance, the following capabilities will not be available for these users:\n\n- Cannot see or change the folders associated with groups in the Data Groups tab in Settings\n- Can set a user's Data Group during user creation and in the Edit Accessible Content menu option in the users table, but cannot see any folders for customizing access\n","slug":"docs/settings/accessible-content"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Search Overview","description":"search overview"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Search Overview\ndescription: search overview\norder: 10\nsection: Search\n---\n\n\n# Search Overview\n\n<br />\n\nSearch can be used for finding files and folders based in the Repository. Search uses a versatile query language that can be used to create complex expressions. Search queries can be quite specific with support for various advanced features:\n\n- One or more conditions\n- Condition groups (i.e., brackets are supported)\n- Restricting results to a folder or set of folders\n- Restricting result type (e.g., image, folders, files, etc.)\n\n\n## Quick Search\n\nClicking on a ![Magnifying Glass](../images/repository-search.svg) icon next to a [Custom Field](/docs/metadata/custom-fields/) value anywhere will trigger a search for all items in the Repository that have a field with the same value that was clicked. The search can then be modified to a different value for the same field from the search page.\n\n\n## Search Preambles\n\nSearch queries have preambles that can be used to narrow the search results:\n\n- The results type preamble may be used to narrow the types of items returned\n- The location preamble may be used to narrow the folders that are searched\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To set the result type preamble </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Search](../images/nav-search.svg) **Search** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Choose one or more types from the **Find** dropdown menu\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To set the location preamble </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Search](../images/nav-search.svg) **Search** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the ![Edit](../images/dialog-pen.svg) icon and choose the set of folders for the search\n\n 3. Click on the **X** button when done and continue building the search query\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Basic Queries\n\nTo search for a file or folder in the Repository, start by creating a search query. The search query can reference some of the built-in [System Fields](/docs/metadata/system-fields/) as well as any user-defined [Custom Fields](/docs/metadata/custom-fields/).\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To create a basic search query </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Search](../images/nav-search.svg) **Search** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. (Optional) Configure the [result type preamble](#search-preambles) from the **Find** dropdown menu\n\n 3. (Optional) Configure the [location preamble](#search-preambles) from the ![Edit](../images/dialog-pen.svg) dropdown menu\n\n 4. (Optional) Configure the logical operator from the **Matching** dropdown menu\n\n 5. Click on the **+ Condition** button; repeat as necessary\n\n    a. Select a field from the dropdown menu\n\n    b. Select an operation\n\n    c. Fill the field accordingly\n\n 6. Click on the **Search** button to run the query\n\n   Search results will be displayed on the same page\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Advanced Queries\n\nAdvanced search can be fully customized and may include logical groups (i.e., bracketed expressions).\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To create an advanced search query </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Search](../images/nav-search.svg) **Search** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. (Optional) Configure the [result type preamble](#search-preambles) from the **Find** dropdown menu\n\n 3. (Optional) Configure the [location preamble](#search-preambles) from the ![Edit](../images/dialog-pen.svg) dropdown menu\n\n 4. (Optional) Configure the logical operator from the **Matching** dropdown menu\n\n 5. Click on the **+ Condition** button; repeat as necessary\n\n    a. Select a field from the dropdown menu\n\n    b. Select an operation\n\n    c. Fill the field accordingly\n\n 6. (Optional) Click **+ Condition Group**; repeat as necessary\n\n    a. Repeat step 5 as necessary\n\n 7. Click on the **Search** button to run the query\n\n   Search results will be displayed on the same page\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/search/search-overview"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"","description":null},"rawBody":"---\nredirect: /docs/settings/my-account/\n---\n","slug":"docs/settings/"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"My Account","description":"my account"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: My Account\ndescription: my account\norder: 38\nsection: Settings\n---\n\n\n# My Account\n\n<br />\n\nMany of the restrictions that govern user accounts, such as accessible content (i.e., the files and folders visible in the Repository), roles and permissions (i.e., the actions you can take with the files in the Repository), as well as the ability to modify properties of Custom Fields and report templates, are controlled by your account administrator. Contact your administrator if you have any questions about these topics.\n\n\n## User Profile\n\nUsers can modify certain account properties and preferences such as their name, profile photo and signature. Users cannot change their email address.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the name of your account </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the user icon at the top right of the screen\n\n 2. In the popup menu, click on **My Account**\n\n 3. Click on the Profile tab if necessary\n\n 4. Click on the **Edit** button in the Name section\n\n 5. Edit the text in the textbox\n\n 6. Click on the **Apply** button to save your changes\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To add or change the profile photo of your account </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the user icon at the top right of the screen\n\n 2. In the popup menu, click on **My Account**\n\n 3. Click on the Profile tab if necessary\n\n 4. Click on the current profile photo, or the **Edit** button in the Profile Photo section\n\n 5. Click on **Upload Photo** and select an image from your computer\n\n 6. (Optional) Use the slider beneath the image to adjust the visible content\n\n 7. Click on the **Apply** button to save your changes, or **Cancel** to discard them\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To add or change the signature image for your account </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the user icon at the top right of the screen\n\n 2. In the popup menu, click on **My Account**\n\n 3. Click on the Profile tab if necessary\n\n 4. Click on the **Edit** button to in the Signature section\n\n 5. Click on the **Upload Signature** button and select an image from your PC\n\n 6. Click on the **Apply** button to save your changes\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change your password </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the user icon at the top right of the screen\n\n 2. In the popup menu, click on **My Account**\n\n 3. Click on the Profile tab if necessary\n\n 4. Click on **Change Password**\n\n 5. Enter your current password\n\n 6. Enter a new password\n\n 7. Renter the new password to confirm\n\n 8. Click on the **Apply** button to save your changes\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Preferences\n\n### Visiopharm Preferences [add-on]\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the default application used with the Open in VIS button </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the user icon at the top right of the screen\n\n 2. In the popup menu, click on **My Account**\n\n 3. Click on the Preferences tab\n\n 4. Under the Visiopharm section, locate the **Default Application** setting\n\n 5. Select either _VIS_ or _VIS Basic_, depending on which software you have installed\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the sub-image handling behavior </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the user icon at the top right of the screen\n\n 2. In the popup menu, click on **My Account**\n\n 3. Click on the Preferences tab\n\n 4. Under the Visiopharm section, locate the **Sub-image Handling** setting\n\n 5. Select either _All Sub-images_ or _First Sub-image_\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   <em>All Sub-images</em> is only supported in versions of Visiopharm released after Q2 2022.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Teams\n\nA user may be a member of more than one team within PathcoreFlow. Each team has its own [Repository](/docs/repository/), as well as associated [Data Groups](/docs/settings/data-groups/) and [Roles](/docs/settings/roles/).\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  A user can only be logged into one team at a time.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n <summary> To switch your currently active team </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the user icon at the top right of the screen\n\n 2. Under **Other Teams** select the name of the team to which you want to switch. Your current team is indicated with a check mark\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   <b>Other Teams</b> will only appear in the popup menu if the user is part of more than one team.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Forgotten Password\n\nIn the case a user forgets their password, they can use the self-serve option to reset it.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  Users on a team with <a href=\"../../settings/saml-single-sign-on/\">SSO</a> enforced cannot reset their password in PathcoreFlow and should instead contact their team administrator.\n</div></div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To reset a forgotten password </summary>\n\n 1. Visit the login page for your PathcoreFlow service\n\n 2. Enter your email address in the **Email** field\n\n 3. Click on the **Log in with password** link below the login form\n\n 4. Click on the **Reset password** link below the login form\n\n 5. Enter your email address in the **Email** field\n\n 4. Click on the **Submit** button\n\n 5. Follow the instructions in the email message to reset the password\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/settings/my-account"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Data Groups","description":"data groups"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Data Groups\ndescription: data groups\norder: 43\nsection: Settings\n---\n\n\n# Data Groups\n\n<br />\n\nData Groups can be used to control the accessible content of several users such as specific teams at once. When a user is assigned a data group, they inherit all accessible content from it. Any updates to the data group's accessible content will update the accessible content of users with that data group as well.\n\nTo assign data groups, see [Modifying Accessible Content](/docs/settings/user-management/#modifying-accessible-content).\n\n\n## Creating Data Groups\n\nCreate a data group for user types that need limited access to the content in the Repository. The data group can be used to define a set of folders and can be assigned to the appropriate users.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To create a data group </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Data Groups** tab\n\n 3. Click on the **New Data Group** button\n\n 4. Type in a name for the data group under the **Data Group Name** field\n\n 5. Select accessible folders under the **Access Grants** section\n\n 6. Click on the **Save** button\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Modifying Data Groups\n\nModifying a data group immediately affects all users that are associated with it.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To modify a data group </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Data Groups** tab\n\n 3. Select a data group to edit\n\n 4. Click on the **Edit Data Group** button\n\n 5. (Optional) Type in a new name for the data group under the **Data Group Name** field\n\n 6. (Optional) Select accessible folders under the **Access Grants** section\n\n 7. Click on the **Save** button\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Deleting Data Groups\n\nData groups can only be deleted if they are not associated with any user. Before deleting a data group, ensure its user associations are cleared. See [Modifying Accessible Content](/docs/settings/user-management/#modifying-accessible-content) for more details.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete a data group </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Data Groups** tab\n\n 3. Select a data group to delete\n\n 4. Click on the **Delete** button\n\n 5. Click on the **Yes** button to confirm\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/settings/data-groups"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Permissions","description":"permissions"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Permissions\ndescription: permissions\norder: 40\nsection: Settings\n---\n\n\n# Permissions\n\n<br />\n\nPermissions define the set of actions that users can perform with the data that is accessible to them (e.g., download, edit, view).\n\n\n## Permission Flags\n\nUser permissions are achieved through a set of fine-grained flags that team administrators can use to manage what actions users can perform with the data they can access. Permissions are divided into several categories of privileges that span actions at team level, image level, folder level, and file level.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  All entries in the Repository that are detected as a supported image format are treated as an \"Image\" type and have dedicated permissions flags. All other entries in the Repository (e.g., reports, Figures, attachments) are treated as \"Files\" and also have dedicated permissions.\n</div>\n\n\n### Team Permissions\n\nThe following flags govern team administration.\n\n| Flag                    | Description |\n| ----------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------ |\n| Manage users            | Allows a user to view, edit, create or delete [Users](/docs/settings/user-management/). |\n| Manage roles            | Allows a user to view, edit, create or delete [Data Groups](/docs/settings/data-groups/) and [Roles](/docs/settings/roles/). |\n| Manage fields           | Allows a user to view, edit, create or delete [Fields](/docs/metadata/system-fields/) and [Field Sets](/docs/metadata/field-sets/). |\n| Manage report templates | Allows a user to view, edit, create or delete [Report Templates](/docs/report-templates/report-templates-overview/). |\n| Manage assignment rules | Allows a user to view, edit, create or delete assignment rules for cases. |\n| Manage uploaded files   | Allows a user to view or create unsorted uploads. |\n| Manage team             | Allows a user to edit the [Team Settings](/docs/settings/team-customization/). |\n| Export activities       | Allows a user to export detailed [Activity Logs](/docs/repository/activity-logs/). |\n| Preview activities      | Allows a user to access the Activities tab. |\n| Manage policies         | Allows a user to view, edit, create or delete [policies](/docs/settings/policies/). |\n\n\n### Image Permissions\n\nThe following flags govern all entries in the Repository that are detected as a supported image format. The entries are treated as images and given the Image type.\n\n| Flag                       | Description |\n| -------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------ |\n| View                       | Allows a user to view an image and its metadata including fields, snapshots, overlays. |\n| View shared annotations    | Allows a user to view shared annotations on an image to which they have access. |\n| Create shared annotations  | Allows a user to create and delete shared annotations and change the state of a private annotation, which the user has created, to shared. |\n| Create private annotations | Allows a user to create private annotations. |\n| Download                   | Allows a user to download an image or attachment. |\n| Edit metadata              | Allows a user to:<br />- Edit image metadata fields<br />- Edit image description<br />- Edit, create, or delete image overlays<br />- Edit, create, or delete image snapshots<br />- Edit or delete any user’s shared annotations<br />- Set default image rotation |\n| Manage share links         | Allows a user to edit, create, or delete share links for images. |\n| View shared image settings | Allows a user to save private image settings and see collections of image settings shared by other members of their team. |\n| Share image settings       | Allows a user to share image settings with the rest of their team.<br />\"View shared image settings\" is a prerequisite for this permission, and it does not appear until that permission is granted. |\n| Manage image settings      | Allows a user to change the preferred and shared status of all image settings for their team.<br />\"Share image settings\" is a prerequisite for this permission, and it does not appear until that permission is granted. |\n\n\n### Folder Permissions\n\nThe following flags govern folders in the Repository and/or Cases in the Dashboard.\n\n| Flag               | Description |\n| ------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------ |\n| View               | Allows a user to view the Repository and its folders, and cases. |\n| Create             | Allows a user to create folders and cases. |\n| Edit metadata      | Allows a user to edit folder-level Fields and case reports. |\n| Manage share links | Allows a user to edit, create or delete share links for folders. |\n| Delete             | Allows a user to delete folders. |\n\n\n### File Permissions\n\nThe following flags govern all entries in the Repository that are not detected as an image (e.g., reports, Figures, attachments). The entries are treated as files and have dedicated permissions.\n\n| Flag               | Description |\n| ------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------ |\n| View               | Allows a user to view attachments, snapshots, reports and report templates. |\n| Upload             | Allows a user to upload files, generate reports and link DICOM resources from a connected PACS into folders. |\n| Edit metadata      | Allows a user to edit Fields for non-image files and reports, and run type detection on a file. |\n| Manage share links | Allows a user to edit, create, or delete share links for non-image files. |\n| Delete             | Allows a user to delete all files (including image files). |\n\n\n### Protected Information (PI) Flags\n\nThe following flags govern metadata Fields.\n\n| Flag     | Description |\n| -------- | ------------------------------------------------------------ |\n| View     | Allows a user to view field values that have been marked with the Protected Information (PI) flag and slide labels. |\n","slug":"docs/settings/permissions"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Policies","description":"policies"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Policies\ndescription: policies\norder: 47\nsection: Settings\n---\n\n\n# Policies\n##### [add-on]\n\nPolicies may be used to control when and where certain features apply to a user's actions. For example, a policy could be defined which requires users to provide a reason when they change any metadata associated with images in a specific subfolder.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  The Reason for change tracking add-on and \"Manage policies\" permission flag is required to create or edit policies.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To view the list of configured policies </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Policies** tab\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To sort the policy list </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Policies** tab\n\n 3. From the table header, click on a column until the desired sort order is shown (sort order is shown with ![Up Arrow](../images/table-sort-up-arrow.svg) for ascending order and ![Down Arrow](../images/table-sort-down-arrow.svg) for descending order in the table header adjacent to the selected column)\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To enable or disable a policy </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Policies** tab\n\n 3. Set the **Active** toggle next to the policy's name\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete a policy </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Policies** tab\n\n 3. Select one or more policies from the table by holding the **Ctrl** key (on Windows) or **&#x2318; / Command** key (on macOS) key and clicking on them\n\n 4. Bring up the context menu for the policy (or policies)\n\n 5. Click **Delete**\n\n 6. Click on the **Yes** button to confirm\n\n</details>\n\n## Reason for Change Tracking\n\nWhen **reason for change tracking** is enabled, users are prompted to input a reason for any change made to an item in the Repository or Viewer. Policies provide the ability to fine-tune when and where reason for change tracking is required for the team. This feature was designed to allow both GLP (Good Laboratory Practice) and non-GLP studies to be run within the same team without disrupting the existing folder structure.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To create a reason for change tracking policy </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Policies** tab\n\n 3. Click on the **Add Repository Policy** button\n\n 4. Type a name for the policy in the **Policy name** field\n\n 5. Click on the ![Edit](../images/dialog-pen.svg) button next to **Folders Tracked**\n    1. In the popup dialog, set the **Apply tracking to all folders in the repository** toggle (only appears if no other policies exist)\n    2. Select the Repository folders to which this policy will apply, if the above toggle was disabled or other policies already exist\n    3. Click on the **Apply** button\n\n 6. Click on the ![Edit](../images/dialog-pen.svg) button next to **Data Types**\n    1. In the popup dialog, set the toggle for the data types that will require a reason for change. The default is to enable all data types\n    2. Click on the **Apply** button\n\n 7. Click on the **Create Policy** button\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n    Only folders that are not already the target of a reason for change tracking policy may be selected for a new policy.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To edit a reason for change tracking policy </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Policies** tab\n\n 3. Bring up the context menu for a policy\n\n 4. Click **Edit**\n\n 5. (Optional) Type a new name for the policy in the **Policy name** field\n\n 6. (Optional) Click on the ![Edit](../images/dialog-pen.svg) button next to **Folders Tracked**\n    1. In the popup dialog, select the Repository folders to which this policy will apply\n    2. Click on the **Apply** button\n\n 7. (Optional) Click on the ![Edit](../images/dialog-pen.svg) button next to **Data Types**\n    1. In the popup dialog, set the toggle for the data types that will require a reason for change. The default is to enable all data types\n    2. Click on the **Apply** button\n\n 8. Click on the **Save Policy** button\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/settings/policies"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Roles","description":"roles"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Roles\ndescription: roles\norder: 41\nsection: Settings\n---\n\n\n# Roles\n\n<br />\n\nWhile the permissions assigned to each user can be customized on a user-by-user basis, it’s convenient to use roles for expressing the collection of permissions for different user types (e.g., viewers, editors, administrators). Roles are a convenient shorthand for defining and assigning permissions to users.\n\n\n## System Roles\n\nThere are a number of roles that are predefined in the system. These roles cannot be modified and are always available. The predefined roles are as follows:\n\n- **Administrator**: has all possible permissions\n- **Editor**: has all permissions except for the ability to manage team-level settings, plus the ability to preview activities\n- **Viewer**: has permissions to view and download files and metadata but cannot edit or delete any data\n- **Anonymized Viewer**: has all the permissions of the Viewer except they cannot view PI, download items, or preview activities\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To view system roles </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Roles** tab\n\n 3. Look for Yes in the **System Role?** column of the roles table\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Custom Roles\n##### [BioPharma]\n\nTo complement the builtin System Roles, you may need to create additional roles. A major benefit of custom Roles comes from inheritance; changes made to a role are inherited by all users that are associated with the role. In this sense, custom roles allow administrators to control the permissions of several users at once.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To create a new custom role </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Roles** tab\n\n 3. Click on the **New Role** button\n\n 4. Type a name for the new role in the **Role Name** field\n\n 5. Select [Permission Flags](/docs/settings/permissions/#permission-flags) for the new role\n\n 6. Click on the **Save** button\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Editing Custom Roles\n\nEditing roles is a convenient way to modify the permission of all users that are associated with a particular role. For this reason, use caution when editing roles.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  System roles cannot be modified.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To edit a non-system role </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Roles** tab\n\n 3. Select a role from the table\n\n 4. Click on the **Edit Role** button above the table\n\n 5. Modify the role’s properties\n    1. Edit the role’s name\n    2. Modify the associated [Permission Flags](/docs/settings/permissions/#permission-flags)\n\n 6. Click on the **Save** button\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Deleting Custom Roles\n\nWhen a role is deleted, all the users associated with the role retain the permissions they had before the role was deleted. All users that were associated with the deleted role became users with custom permissions.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  System roles cannot be deleted.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete a non-system role </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Roles** tab\n\n 3. Select a role from the table\n\n 4. Click on the **Delete** button above the table\n\n 5. Click on the **Yes** button to confirm\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/settings/roles"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"","description":null},"rawBody":"---\nredirect: /docs/settings/saml-sso/\n---\n","slug":"docs/settings/saml-single-sign-on"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"SAML SSO","description":"saml sso"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: SAML SSO\ndescription: saml sso\norder: 46\nsection: Settings\n---\n\n\n# SAML SSO\n##### [add-on]\n\nSecurity Assertion Markup Language, or SAML, can be configured as an option for authenticating users. This allows an organization to set up users in a single, centralized place and manage their access to multiple applications. Users only have to remember a single set of credentials across the systems they use. Administrators can enforce their desired password policies at the SAML identity provider, and many providers support additional security features such as multi-factor authentication (MFA).\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  The SAML SSO add-on and \"Manage team\" permission flag is required to view and change the SAML SSO configuration.\n</div>\n\n\n## SP Details\n\nThe SP Details form provides the information needed to configure SAML SSO with your identity provider. It also provides an easy way to copy these values for use in setting up your SAML single sign-on. These values cannot be altered via this form.\n\n- **Entity ID**: The unique ID used by your identity provider to identify your PathcoreFlow team\n- **Assertion Consumer Service URL**: The URL used by the identity provider to send the SAML assertion. This is sometimes also called a \"Reply URL\"\n- **Name ID Format**: The format of the user identifier expected by PathcoreFlow in responses from the identity provider. The only format that is accepted is email address\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To view the SAML service provider (SP) details </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **SAML SSO** tab\n\n 3. Review the values in the [SP Details](#sp-details) section\n\n 4. (Optional) Click on the ![Copy to Clipboard](../images/dialog-clipboard.svg) button to the right of a field to copy its contents to the clipboard\n\n</details>\n\n\n## IdP Details\n\nIn order to enable SSO, an identity provider must be configured in PathcoreFlow by a team administrator.\n\n- **Entity ID**: This is a unique identifier for your configured SSO application at the identity provider\n- **Single Sign On URL**: The URL at the identity provider where users are redirected to complete the log in\n- **Certificate**: A public key provided by your identity provider in either PEM or DER format\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Only one identity provider can be configured for a team at a time.\n</div>\n\n<br />\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  The \"email\" attribute sent from the identity provider is used to match a user account by their email address set in PathcoreFlow. These values must match.\n\n  The \"name\" attribute sent from the IdP is used to update an account's display name.\n</div>\n\nInstructions for external providers are provided for convenience. If you require assistance in setting up the SAML identity provider, please contact the support for that provider.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To configure Google Workspace as your identity provider </summary>\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   The user setting up SAML SSO must also be an active user in Google Workspace.\n </div>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **SAML SSO** tab\n\n 3. Review the values in the [SP Details](#sp-details) section\n\n 4. Follow the instructions for [setting up your own custom SAML app](https://support.google.com/a/answer/6087519) in Google Workspace Admin Help\n\n    1. The following table lists the PathcoreFlow [SP Details](#sp-details) and their equivalent fields in Google Workspace's **Service Provider Details** section:\n\n       | PathcoreFlow Setting           | Google Workspace Field |\n       | --------------------           | ---------------------- |\n       | Entity ID                      | Entity ID              |\n       | Assertion Consumer Service URL | ACS URL                |\n       | (unused)                       | Start URL              |\n\n    2. Set the following Name ID settings in Google Workspace:\n       - **Name ID format**: \"UNSPECIFIED\"\n       - **Name ID**: \"Primary email\"\n\n    3. Configure the following in **SAML attribute mapping**:\n\n       | Google Directory               | App                    |\n       | ----------------               | ---------------------- |\n       | Primary email                  | email                  |\n       | First name                     | name                   |\n\n 5. Enter information from Google Workspace into the fields under the [IdP Details](#idp-details) section. The following table lists the PathcoreFlow settings and their equivalent fields in Google Workspace:\n\n    | PathcoreFlow Setting           | Google Workspace Field |\n    | --------------------           | ---------------------- |\n    | Entity ID                      | Entity ID              |\n    | Single Sign On (SSO) URL       | SSO URL                |\n    | Certificate                    | Certificate            |\n\n 6. Complete the configuration by following the instructions in the [Configuration](#configuration) section\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To configure JumpCloud as your identity provider </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **SAML SSO** tab\n\n 3. Review the values in the [SP Details](#sp-details) section\n\n 4. Follow the instructions for setting up [SSO using Custom SAML Application Connectors](https://jumpcloud.com/support/sso-using-custom-saml-application-connectors) in JumpCloud Support\n\n    1. The following table lists the PathcoreFlow [SP Details](#sp-details) and their equivalent fields in JumpCloud's **SSO** section:\n\n       | PathcoreFlow Setting           | JumpCloud              |\n       | --------------------           | ---------------------- |\n       | Entity ID                      | SP Entity ID           |\n       | Assertion Consumer Service URL | ACS URLs -> Add URL    |\n\n    2. Set the following Name ID settings in JumpCloud:\n       - **SAMLSubject NameID**: \"email\"\n       - **SAMLSubject NameID Format**: \"urn:oasis:names:tc:SAML:1.1:nameid-format:emailAddress\"\n\n    3. Configure the following **User Attribute** mappings:\n\n       | Service Provider Attribute Name | JumpCloud Attribute Name |\n       | ------------------------------- | ------------------------ |\n       | email                           | email                    |\n       | name                            | displayname              |\n\n 5. Download the certificate from JumpCloud and paste the contents of the file into the **Certificate** field under the [IdP Details](#idp-details) section\n\n 6. Enter information from JumpCloud into the fields under the [IdP Details](#idp-details) section. The following table lists the PathcoreFlow settings and their equivalent fields in JumpCloud:\n\n    | PathcoreFlow Setting           | JumpCloud Field        |\n    | --------------------           | ---------------------- |\n    | Entity ID                      | IdP Entity ID          |\n    | Single Sign On (SSO) URL       | IDP URL                |\n\n 7. Complete the configuration by following the instructions in the [Configuration](#configuration) section\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To configure Microsoft Entra ID (formerly Azure AD) as your identity provider </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **SAML SSO** tab\n\n 3. Review the values in the [SP Details](#sp-details) section\n\n 4. Follow the instructions for [enabling SSO for an enterprise application](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/entra/identity/enterprise-apps/add-application-portal-setup-sso) in Microsoft Learn. You will need to **Create your own application**\n\n    1. The following table lists the PathcoreFlow [SP Details](#sp-details) and their equivalent fields in Microsoft Entra's **Basic SAML Configuration** section:\n\n       | PathcoreFlow Setting           | Microsoft Entra Field  |\n       | --------------------           | ---------------------- |\n       | Entity ID                      | Identifier (Entity ID) |\n       | Assertion Consumer Service URL | Reply URL (Assertion Consumer Service URL) |\n       | (unused)                       | Sign on URL            |\n       | (unused)                       | Relay State            |\n       | (unused)                       | Logout Url             |\n\n    2. Configure the following in **Attributes &amp; Claims**:\n\n       | Claim Name                       | Namespace     | Value                  |\n       | --------------------             | ---------     | ---------------------- |\n       | Unique User Identifier (Name ID) | (default)     | user.userprincipalname |\n       | email\\*                          | (leave blank) | user.userprincipalname |\n       | name\\*                           | (leave blank) | user.displayname       |\n\n       \\* This will need to be added as a new claim, as the default does not allow a blank namespace.\n\n 5. Download the **Certificate (Base64)** from Microsoft Entra and paste the contents of the file in the **Certificate** field under the [IdP Details](#idp-details) section\n\n 6. Enter information from Microsoft Entra into the fields under the [IdP Details](#idp-details) section. The following table lists the PathcoreFlow settings and their equivalent fields in Microsoft Entra's **Set up &lt;Application Name&gt;** section:\n\n    | PathcoreFlow Setting           | Microsoft Entra Field  |\n    | --------------------           | ---------------------- |\n    | Entity ID                      | Microsoft Entra Identifier |\n    | Single Sign On (SSO) URL       | Login URL              |\n\n 7. Complete the configuration by following the instructions in the [Configuration](#configuration) section\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To configure Okta as your identity provider </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **SAML SSO** tab\n\n 3. Review the values in the [SP Details](#sp-details) section\n\n 4. Follow the instructions to [create a SAML app integration](https://help.okta.com/oie/en-us/content/topics/apps/apps_app_integration_wizard_saml.htm) in Okta Docs\n\n    1. The following table lists the PathcoreFlow [SP Details](#sp-details) and their equivalent fields in Okta's **Application Integration Wizard**:\n\n       | PathcoreFlow Setting           | Okta                   |\n       | --------------------           | ---------------------- |\n       | Entity ID                      | Audience URI (SP Entity ID) |\n       | Assertion Consumer Service URL | Single sign-on URL     |\n\n    2. Set the following Name ID settings in Okta:\n       - **Application username**: \"Email\"\n       - **Name ID format**: \"EmailAddress\"\n\n    3. Configure the following **Attribute Statements**:\n\n       | Name                            | Value                    |\n       | ------------------------------- | ------------------------ |\n       | email                           | user.email               |\n       | name                            | user.firstName + \" \" + user.lastName |\n\n 5. Enter information from Okta into the fields under the [IdP Details](#idp-details) section. The following table lists the PathcoreFlow settings and their equivalent fields in Okta:\n\n    | PathcoreFlow Setting           | Okta Field             |\n    | --------------------           | ---------------------- |\n    | Entity ID                      | Identity Provider Issuer |\n    | Single Sign On (SSO) URL       | Identity Provider Single Sign-On URL |\n    | Certificate                    | X.509 Certificate      |\n\n 6. Complete the configuration by following the instructions in the [Configuration](#configuration) section\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To configure OneLogin as your identity provider </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **SAML SSO** tab\n\n 3. Review the values in the [SP Details](#sp-details) section\n\n 4. Follow the instructions for setting up an [Advanced SAML Custom Connector](https://onelogin.service-now.com/support?id=kb_article&sys_id=8a1f3d501b392510c12a41d5ec4bcbcc&kb_category=de885d2187372d10695f0f66cebb351f) and [Configuring SSO for SAML-Enabled Applications](https://onelogin.service-now.com/support?id=kb_article&sys_id=08e6b9d9879a6990c44486e5cebb3556) in OneLogin Support\n\n    1. The following table lists the PathcoreFlow [SP Details](#sp-details) and their equivalent fields in OneLogin:\n\n       | PathcoreFlow Setting           | OneLogin               |\n       | --------------------           | ---------------------- |\n       | Entity ID                      | Audience (EntityID)    |\n       | Assertion Consumer Service URL | Recipient              |\n       | (the regex escaped ACS URL)    | ACS (Consumer) URL Validator |\n       | Assertion Consumer Service URL | ACS (Consumer) URL     |\n\n    2. Set the following Name ID settings in OneLogin:\n       - **SAML initiator**: \"OneLogin\"\n       - **SAML nameID format**: \"Email\"\n\n    3. Configure the following **Parameters**:\n\n       | Service Provider Attribute Name | OneLogin Parameter Name  |\n       | ------------------------------- | ------------------------ |\n       | email                           | Email                    |\n       | name                            | Name                     |\n\n 5. Enter information from OneLogin into the fields under the [IdP Details](#idp-details) section. The following table lists the PathcoreFlow settings and their equivalent fields in OneLogin:\n\n    | PathcoreFlow Setting           | OneLogin Field         |\n    | --------------------           | ---------------------- |\n    | Entity ID                      | Issuer URL             |\n    | Single Sign On (SSO) URL       | SAML 2.0 Endpoint (HTTP) |\n    | Certificate                    | X.509 Certificate      |\n\n 6. Complete the configuration by following the instructions in the [Configuration](#configuration) section\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To configure another service as your identity provider </summary>\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   The terms used by your identity provider may differ.\n </div>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **SAML SSO** tab\n\n 3. Review the values in the [SP Details](#sp-details) section\n\n 4. Follow the instructions from your identity provider to set up a new SAML application\n\n    1. The following table lists the PathcoreFlow [SP Details](#sp-details) and some common equivalent fields used by identity providers:\n\n       | PathcoreFlow Setting           | Alternate Names        |\n       | --------------------           | ---------------------- |\n       | Entity ID                      | Audience, Identifier, Issuer, SP ID |\n       | Assertion Consumer Service URL | ACS URL, Reply URL, Single Sign-On URL, SSO URL |\n\n    2. Set the following Name ID settings. Name ID may also be called SAMLSubject, Unique User ID, or App Username:\n       - **Name ID**: A user's primary email address\n       - **Name ID format**: \"EmailAddress\" or `urn:oasis:names:tc:SAML:1.1:nameid-format:emailAddress`\n\n    3. Configure the following SAML attribute mappings:\n\n       | Name                           | Value                  |\n       | ----------------               | ---------------------- |\n       | email                          | User's email address   |\n       | name                           | User's display name or full name |\n\n 5. Enter information from your identity provider into the fields under the [IdP Details](#idp-details) section. The following table lists the PathcoreFlow settings and some common equivalent fields used by identity providers:\n\n    | PathcoreFlow Setting           | Alternate Names        |\n    | --------------------           | ---------------------- |\n    | Entity ID                      | Identifier, Identity Provider Issuer, IdP Entity |\n    | Single Sign On (SSO) URL       | Login URL, SSO URL     |\n    | Certificate                    | Public key, X.509      |\n\n 6. Complete the configuration by following the instructions in the [Configuration](#configuration) section\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Configuration\n\n- **Default Permissions**: The [role](/docs/settings/roles/) to assign to users created in PathcoreFlow by [JIT Provisioning](#jit-provisioning)\n- **Default Accessible Content**: The [data group](/docs/settings/data-groups/) to assign to users created in PathcoreFlow by [JIT Provisioning](#jit-provisioning). Can be set to \"Nothing\" so that an administrator must assign accessible content to new users after they successfully log in\n- **Enable SAML Authentication**: This toggle enables the option to log in using the configured identity provider\n- **Enforce SAML SSO**: This toggle will _require_ that all users log in using the configured identity provider. Enabling this will automatically **Enable SAML Authentication**\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Users with the system-defined Administrator role can always login via their password to prevent being locked out entirely.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To finalize your SAML SSO configuration </summary>\n\n 1. Select the desired [role](/docs/settings/roles/) from the **Default Permissions** dropdown menu\n\n 2. Select the desired [data group](/docs/settings/data-groups/) from the **Default Accessible Content** dropdown menu\n\n 3. Click on the **Verify Configuration** link to validate your configuration. This must complete successfully before you can save your changes\n\n 4. (Optional) Enable the **Enable SAML Authentication** toggle\n\n 5. (Optional) Enable the **Enforce SAML SSO** toggle if you want to require all users to use the designated identity provider to log in\n\n 6. Click on the **Save Changes** button\n\n\n <div class=\"warning\"><div>\n   If you have enabled <b>Enforce SAML SSO</b>, all users on the team must authenticate through the configured identity provider (IdP). Therefore, all users will require valid credentials for the designated provider.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To disable SAML SSO for a team </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **SAML SSO** tab\n\n 3. Disable the **Enable SAML Authentication** toggle\n\n 4. Click on the **Save Changes** button\n\n</details>\n\n\n## JIT Provisioning\n\nPathcoreFlow supports just-in-time (JIT) provisioning of users by default when SAML SSO is enabled. JIT provisioning creates users in PathcoreFlow the first time they attempt to log in from their identity provider using SSO. This allows administrators to manage access to PathcoreFlow directly through their identity provider.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  A user created by JIT provisioning will be assigned the role and data group set in the <a href=\"#configuration\">Configuration</a> section.\n</div></div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> First time JIT log in steps </summary>\n\n 1. Log in to your identity provider. Contact your team administrator if you require assistance\n\n 2. Locate the PathcoreFlow app and launch it. The name of this app within your identity provider is configured by your team administrator and may be something different (e.g., \"Pathcore\" or \"Flow\"). You will be redirected to the PathcoreFlow login page\n\n 3. You will need to activate your account to continue. Check your email for a message which has instructions to [activate your account](/docs/settings/user-management/#account-activation). Follow those instructions. You need to set a password for PathcoreFlow, but then you will be able to log in using your identity provider credentials\n\n 4. You are now registered with the PathcoreFlow team\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   A user only needs to activate their account once per team.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/settings/saml-sso"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Storage Statistics","description":"storage statistics"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Storage Statistics\ndescription: storage statistics\norder: 44\nsection: Settings\n---\n\n\n# Storage Statistics\n\n<br />\n\nStorage statistics provide an overview of storage capacity and consumption as well as other statistics about the data in the Repository.\n\n\n## Statistics\n\nThe following storage information is reported\n\n- Total storage available\n- Storage used / free\n- Total data uploaded this week\n- Total data uploaded this month\n- Number of folders\n- Number of images\n- Number of snapshots created\n- Number of annotations created\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To view storage statistics </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Storage** tab\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/settings/storage-statistics"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Team Customization","description":"team customization"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Team Customization\ndescription: team customization\norder: 45\nsection: Settings\n---\n\n\n# Team Customization\n\n<br />\n\nEach team has a customizable name and icon that appear at the top of the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu). The name does not appear in desktop mode while the menu is collapsed.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  The \"Manage team\" permission flag is required to change the team name and logo.\n</div>\n\n\n## General\n\nAn administrator can change the team icon and name. The **Team URL** is informative only and cannot be changed on this page.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Maximum file size for a logo is 10 MiB.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To add or replace a team icon </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Team Customization** tab\n\n 3. Click on the current team icon, or the **Edit** button next to it\n\n 4. Click on **Upload Photo** and select an image from your computer\n\n 5. (Optional) Use the slider beneath the image to adjust the visible content\n\n 6. Click on the **Apply** button to save your changes, or **Cancel** to discard them\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To remove a team icon </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Team Customization** tab\n\n 3. Click on the current team icon, or the **Edit** button next to it\n\n 4. Click on **Remove** to remove the icon and revert to the default\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change a team name </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Team Customization** tab\n\n 3. Click on the **Team Name** field and type the new name into the field\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   Changes in the <b>Team Name</b> field are saved automatically.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Repository\n\n### Trash Retention Period\n##### [BioPharma]\n\nThe trash retention period defines how long items which have been moved to the [Trash](/docs/repository/trash/) will be retained before they are automatically deleted forever.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  The default retention period is <strong>30 days</strong>.\n</div></div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the trash retention period for a team </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Team Customization** tab\n\n 3. Click on the **Trash Retention Period** field\n\n 4. In the popup dialog, select from one of the preset periods, or select \"Custom\" and type in the number of days\n\n 5. Click on the **Apply** button to save your changes, or **Cancel** to discard them\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   A <img src=\"../images/repository-warning-icon.svg\" alt=\"Warning\" /> icon is shown next to the selected retention period if it is shorter than the current value, as this may cause some items in the Trash to be permanently deleted imminently.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/settings/team-customization"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Advanced Share Link Options","description":"advanced share link options"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Advanced Share Link Options\ndescription: advanced share link options\nsection: Share Links\norder: 26\n---\n\n\n# Advanced Share Link Options\n##### [add-on]\n\nAdvanced share link options can be used to track viewing patterns of recipients and to customize the controls that are accessible in the Viewer when the share link is accessed.\n\nTo enable advanced options, see [Image Share Links](/docs/share-links/share-link-overview/#image-share-links) and [Folder Share Links](/docs/share-links/share-link-overview/#folder-share-links).\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  The Advanced Share Links add-on is required to access these options.\n</div>\n\n\n## Advanced Options\n\n### View Tracking\n\nView tracking is a feature of share links and has been designed for studying the viewing habits of pathologists. When enabled for a given share link, the image regions displayed in the Viewer are logged when the image is accessed via the share link. The logged information includes a timestamp for every region displayed.\n\nView tracking can be enabled for an image share link and for a folder share link. When view tracking is enabled for a folder, viewing logs will be generated for all of the images within the folder and its subfolders, recursively, when the folder share link is used to access images.\n\nTo enable view tracking, see [Image Share Links](/docs/share-links/share-link-overview/#image-share-links) and [Folder Share Links](/docs/share-links/share-link-overview/#folder-share-links). To download logs associated with view tracking history, see [Downloading Logs](#downloading-logs).\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  All access (from any user) to the image via the share link will affect the logged information.\n</div>\n\n\n### Collection of Annotations\n\nWhile share links are typically read-only, an exception exists for annotations. Share links can be configured to allow their recipients to create annotations. Any of the supported annotation types can be individually allowed for a given share link, to provide maximum control over the collection.\n\nAnnotations that are created via the share link will appear as shared annotations in the [Annotations Panel](/docs/viewer/annotations-panel/) for the image, are associated with the \"Anonymous\" user, and are visible by anyone that accesses the share link.\n\nTo enable collection of annotations, see [Image Share Links](/docs/share-links/share-link-overview/#image-share-links) and [Folder Share Links](/docs/share-links/share-link-overview/#folder-share-links). To download logs associated with annotations, see [Downloading Logs](#downloading-logs).\n\n\n### Hiding Viewer Tools\n\nThe set of Viewer tools that are visible in the Viewer when an image is accessed via a share link can be controlled to some extent. The following Viewer tools can be hidden: [Rotation Controls](/docs/viewer/basic-controls/#rotation-controls), [Color Management](/docs/viewer/basic-controls/#color-management), and the [Overview Tool](/docs/viewer/overview-tool/).\n\n\n## Downloading Logs\n\nSome of the advanced share link options can generate logs, including [view tracking](#view-tracking) and [collection of annotations](#collection-of-annotations). However, logs will only be generated when the view tracking has been enabled.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To download logs of regions viewed for a share link </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Bring up the [context menu](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#context-menu) for the item\n\n 3. Click **Share**\n\n 4. In the popup dialog, click on the name of a share link with the _View Tracking Enabled_ label\n\n 5. Select the **Advanced** tab\n\n 6. Click on the ![Download](../images/dialog-download.svg) **Download Data** button underneath the **Track view history** toggle\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To download logs of regions viewed for all share links associated with an item </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Bring up the [context menu](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#context-menu) for the item\n\n 3. Click **Share**\n\n 4. In the popup dialog, click on the ![Download](../images/dialog-download.svg) button to the right of the **New Share Link** button\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Log File Format\n\nThe log file is provided in the TSV (tab separated value) file format and is compatible with popular spreadsheet applications.\n\nEach entry in the log file has the following columns:\n\n- **Timestamp**: provides event time\n- **Source**: describes the reason the event generated the event\n- **Source ID**:\n  - for Viewport events, the ID of the image\n  - for Annotation events, the ID of the annotation\n- **Data**: contains the event data\n- **Data Type**: describes the type of data in the Data column\n- **Modification Method**: describes the action taken\n- **Magnification**: for Viewport events, the new magnification\n- **Image Rotation**: for Viewport events, the new rotation value (in degrees)\n- **Width**: the width of the image region on display in image coordinates @ base-level\n- **Height**: the height of the image region on display in image coordinates @ base-level\n- **Client Height**: width of the viewport in screen pixels\n- **Client Width**: height of the viewport in screen pixels\n- **Region Download Link**: a URL that provides image region overlapping with certain events and currently only supported for rect annotations (i.e., when Source is \"Annotation\" and Data Type is \"rect\")\n\n#### Source Types\n\nThe following source types are possible:\n\n- **Annotation**: produced when the annotation is created\n- **Viewport**: produced when the displayed image region changes (i.e., a pan or zoom)\n\n#### Data Types\n\nThe following Data Types are possible:\n\n- **Arrow**: Indicate the Data column contains a JSON blob that describes a series of two points produced by the arrow annotation tool\n- **Freehand**: Indicate the Data column contains a JSON blob that describes a series of points produced by the freehand annotation tool\n- **Point**: Indicate the Data column contains a JSON blob that describes a series of points produced by the bookmark annotation tool\n- **Polygon**: Indicate the Data column contains a JSON blob that describes a series of points produced by the closed polygon annotation tool\n- **Rect:** Indicate the Data column contains a JSON blob that describes a rectangle\n- **Ruler**: Indicate the Data column contains a JSON blob that describes a series of points produced by the freehand annotation tool\n\n#### Modification Methods\n\nThe following modification methods are possible:\n\n- **create**: A new annotation was created\n- **delete**: An annotation was deleted\n- **modify**: An annotation was modified\n- **move**: The displayed image region was changed\n\n### Log File Example\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Example of an abbreviated log file </summary>\n\n| Timestamp                     | Source     | Source ID  | Data                                                                                                   | Data Type | Modification Method | Magnification | Image Rotation | Width | Height | Client Width | Client Height | Region Download Link |\n|:----------------------------- |:---------- |:---------- |:------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |:--------- |:------------------- |:------------- |:-------------- |:----- |:------ |:------------ |:------------- |:-------------------- |\n| 2022-09-21T16:09:24.951-03:00 | Viewport   | 6GCMGgpoSS | `[{'x': -6900, 'y': 0}, {'x': 24900, 'y': 0}, {'x': 24900, 'y': 15847}, {'x': -6900, 'y': 15847}]`     | rect      | move                | 1.14          | 0              | 31799 | 15847  | 1856         | 943           | |\n| 2022-09-21T16:09:35.048-03:00 | Annotation | 23         | `[{'x': 7032, 'y': 4831}]`                                                                             | bookmark  | create              | 1.14          | 0              |       |        | 1856         | 943           | |\n| 2022-09-21T16:09:38.714-03:00 | Annotation | 24         | `[{'x': 8139, 'y': 6184}, {'x': 9580, 'y': 6184}, {'x': 9580, 'y': 9030}, {'x': 8139, 'y': 9030}]`     | rect      | create              | 1.14          | 0              | 1441  | 2846   | 1856         | 943           | `https://demo.pathcore.com/api/image/6GCMGgpoSS/region?area=8139,6184,1441,2846` |\n| 2022-09-21T16:09:44.326-03:00 | Annotation | 24         | `[{'x': 7840, 'y': 9733}, {'x': 9281, 'y': 9733}, {'x': 9281, 'y': 12579}, {'x': 7840, 'y': 12579}]`   | rect      | modify              | 1.14          | 0              | 1441  | 2846   | 1856         | 943           | `https://demo.pathcore.com/api/image/6GCMGgpoSS/region?area=7840,9733,1441,2846` |\n| 2022-09-21T16:09:50.518-03:00 | Annotation | 24         |                                                                                                        | rect      | delete              | 1.14          | 0              |       |        | 1856         | 943           | |\n| 2022-09-21T16:09:53.885-03:00 | Viewport   | 6GCMGgpoSS | `[{'x': -6900, 'y': 0}, {'x': 24900, 'y': 0}, {'x': 24900, 'y': 15847}, {'x': -6900, 'y': 15847}]`     | rect      | move                | 1.14          | 299            | 31799 | 15847  | 1856         | 943           | |\n| 2022-09-21T16:09:58.879-03:00 | Viewport   | 6GCMGgpoSS | `[{'x': -5602, 'y': 615}, {'x': 23472, 'y': 615}, {'x': 23472, 'y': 15104}, {'x': -5602, 'y': 15104}]` | rect      | move                | 1.25          | 299            | 29074 | 14489  | 1856         | 943           | |\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Example of an abbreviated log file in raw format </summary>\n\n```\nTimestamp\tSource\tSource ID\tData\tData Type\tModification Method\tMagnification\tImage Rotation\tWidth\tHeight\tClient Width\tClient Height\tRegion Download Link\n2022-09-21T16:09:24.951-03:00\tViewport\t6GCMGgpoSS\t[{'x': -6900, 'y': 0}, {'x': 24900, 'y': 0}, {'x': 24900, 'y': 15847}, {'x': -6900, 'y': 15847}]\trect\tmove\t1.14\t0\t31799\t15847\t1856\t943\n2022-09-21T16:09:35.048-03:00\tAnnotation\t23\t[{'x': 7032, 'y': 4831}]\tbookmark\tcreate\t1.14\t0\t\t\t1856\t943\n2022-09-21T16:09:38.714-03:00\tAnnotation\t24\t[{'x': 8139, 'y': 6184}, {'x': 9580, 'y': 6184}, {'x': 9580, 'y': 9030}, {'x': 8139, 'y': 9030}]\trect\tcreate\t1.14\t0\t1441\t2846\t1856\t943\thttps://pathcore.com/api/image/6GCMGgpoSS/region?area=8139,6184,1441,2846\n2022-09-21T16:09:44.326-03:00\tAnnotation\t24\t[{'x': 7840, 'y': 9733}, {'x': 9281, 'y': 9733}, {'x': 9281, 'y': 12579}, {'x': 7840, 'y': 12579}]\trect\tmodify\t1.14\t0\t1441\t2846\t1856\t943\thttps://pathcore.com/api/image/6GCMGgpoSS/region?area=7840,9733,1441,2846\n2022-09-21T16:09:50.518-03:00\tAnnotation\t24\t\trect\tdelete\t1.14\t0\t\t\t1856\t943\n2022-09-21T16:09:53.885-03:00\tViewport\t6GCMGgpoSS\t[{'x': -6900, 'y': 0}, {'x': 24900, 'y': 0}, {'x': 24900, 'y': 15847}, {'x': -6900, 'y': 15847}]\trect\tmove\t1.14\t299\t31799\t15847\t1856\t943\n2022-09-21T16:09:58.879-03:00\tViewport\t6GCMGgpoSS\t[{'x': -5602, 'y': 615}, {'x': 23472, 'y': 615}, {'x': 23472, 'y': 15104}, {'x': -5602, 'y': 15104}]\trect\tmove\t1.25\t299\t29074\t14489\t1856\t943\n```\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/share-links/advanced-share-link-options"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"User Management","description":"user management"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: User Management\ndescription: user management\norder: 39\nsection: Settings\n---\n\n\n# User Management\n\n<br />\n\nThe user management capabilities allow administrators to create new users and manage attributes of existing user accounts.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  The \"Manage users\" permission flag is required to see the list of users.\n</div>\n\n\n## User Accounts\n\nEach user account in the system has the following attributes:\n\n- A name\n- An email address\n- A role - the actions users can perform with the content they can access\n- Accessible content - the data accessible to a user\n- Account status (e.g., active, disabled, awaiting activation)\n- Account creation time\n\nThe account name and email address are defined by an administrator when the account is created. Beyond this point, only the user can change these properties (e.g., name, password, picture, and signature) from the user’s [My Account](/docs/settings/my-account/).\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To view the list of accounts currently registered, and their properties </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Users** tab\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To sort the user account list </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Users** tab\n\n 3. From the table header, click on a column until the desired sort order is shown (sort order is shown with ![Up Arrow](../images/table-sort-up-arrow.svg) for ascending order and ![Down Arrow](../images/table-sort-down-arrow.svg) for descending order in the table header adjacent to the selected column)\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To search for an existing user account by name or email address </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Users** tab\n\n 3. Type a few characters in the search bar above the user table\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To show/hide accounts that are not active </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Users** tab\n\n 3. Click on the ![Filter](../images/table-filter.svg) **Filter** button\n\n 4. Enable the **Show disabled users** toggle to include in the listing users which have been disabled by an administrator\n\n 5. Enable the **Show non-activated users** toggle to include in the listing users who have not yet completed the activation process\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Creating User Accounts\n\n### Account Creation\n\nBefore creating users, it is recommended to have an understanding of [Permissions](/docs/settings/permissions/) and [Accessible Content](/docs/settings/accessible-content/). To streamline user creation, please review the existing [Roles](/docs/settings/roles/) and [Data Groups](/docs/settings/data-groups/) to ensure you are familiar with the available options and if necessary, create new roles and data groups to suit the needs of new users.\n\nNewly created accounts will be marked as \"awaiting activation\" and the new user will not be able to log in until [Account Activation](#account-activation) is completed.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Newly created users cannot access any data by default, unless a Data Group and/or Role is selected during user creation.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To create a user account </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Users** tab\n\n 3. Click on the **Create User** button\n\n 4. Enter the user’s name in the **Name** field\n\n 5. Enter the user’s email address in the **Email** field\n\n 6. (Optional) Choose one of the following options for the user’s permissions:\n    1. Select an option from the **Role** dropdown menu; or\n    2. Click on the **Customize Permissions** button and select individual [Permission Flags](/docs/settings/permissions/#permission-flags)\n\n 7. (Optional) Choose one of the following options for the user’s accessible content:\n    1. Select an option from the **Data Group** dropdown menu; or\n    2. To allow access to all data: click on the **Customize Accessible Content** button and enable the **Grant access to all team content** toggle at the top of the Accessible Content popup dialog; or\n    3. To limit the access to a set of folders: click on the **Customize Accessible Content** button and select the folders that should be accessible to the user\n\n 8. Click on the **Create User** button to finish\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Account Activation\n\nAfter a user account has been created by a team administrator, the system will automatically send an account activation notification to the new user by email. Once received, the user may click on the **Activate** button from their email to choose a password, review the terms and conditions and complete other activation steps as may be required.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Activation emails are incorrectly marked as spam by some email services. Be sure to check your spam filter.\n</div>\n\n\n### Resending Activation Notification\n\nIf the user is having difficulty finding an activation email, even after checking their spam folder, or for any other reason, the notification can be resent by the team administrator.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To resend a user account activation notification </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Users** tab\n\n 3. Locate the user in the users table and click on the **More** menu on the right-hand side of the row\n\n 4. Select the **Resend Activation Link** option in the popup menu\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Modifying User Accounts\n\nAn administrator can modify permissions of users, their accessible content and account status. However, names associated with accounts can only be changed by the user via [My Account](/docs/settings/my-account/).\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  The \"Manage users\" permission flag is required to modify user accounts.\n</div>\n\n\n### Modifying Permissions\n\n[Permissions](/docs/settings/permissions/) define the set of actions that users can perform with the data they can access (e.g., download, edit, view). While the permissions assigned to each user can be customized, it may be more convenient to create a common [Role](/docs/settings/roles/) to express the permissions for user types (e.g., viewer, editor, administrator).\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To modify the permission/role associated with a user’s account </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Users** tab\n\n 3. Locate the user in the users table and click on the **More** menu on the right-hand side of the row\n\n 4. Select the **Edit Role/Permissions** option in the popup menu\n\n 5. Choose one of the following options:\n    1. Select an option from the **Role** dropdown menu; or\n    2. Click on the **Customize Permissions** button and select individual [Permission Flags](/docs/settings/permissions/#permission-flags)\n\n 6. Click on the **Save** button\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Modifying Accessible Content\n\n[Accessible Content](/docs/settings/accessible-content/) defines the set of folders that can be accessed by users. While accessible content can be customized for each user, it may be convenient to create a common [Data Group](/docs/settings/data-groups/) for users that require access to the same folders (e.g., staff in a department or team). A Data Group can be associated with multiple users.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To modify the accessible content or the data group associated with user accounts </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Users** tab\n\n 3. Locate the user in the users table and click on the **More** menu on the right-hand side of the row\n\n 4. Select the **Edit Accessible Content** option in the popup menu\n\n 5. Choose one of the following options:\n    1. Select an option from the **Data Group** dropdown menu; or\n    2. To allow access to all data: enable the **Grant access to all team content** toggle at the top of the Accessible Content popup dialog; or\n    3. To limit the access to a set of folders: select the folders that should be accessible to the user\n\n 6. Click on the **Save** button\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Invalidate User’s Session(s)\n\nBy default, users are not required to re-authenticate until they have logged out or until the application cookies have been cleared. However, an administrator can force a user to re-authenticate by invalidating their sessions.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To invalidate a user’s session </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Users** tab\n\n 3. Locate the user in the users table and click on the **More** menu on the right-hand side of the row\n\n 4. Select the **Invalidate Sessions** option in the popup menu\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Disable User Accounts\n\nIf an account is no longer required it can be disabled. At this time, there is no way to delete user accounts, since these may be connected to [activity logs](/docs/repository/activity-logs/) that are collected during normal application use. It’s important to note that the application does not collect personal information other than a user’s name and email address. In order to meet any regulatory requirements with respect to user privacy, please contact our support team.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To disable a user account or to enable a previously disabled account </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Settings](../images/nav-settings.svg) **Settings** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu)\n\n 2. Click on the **Users** tab\n\n 3. Locate the user in the users table and click on the **More** menu on the right-hand side of the row\n\n 4. Select the **Disable Account** or **Enable Account** option in the popup menu as appropriate\n\n 5. Click on **Yes** to confirm\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/settings/user-management"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Embedding an Image","description":"embedding an image"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Embedding an Image\ndescription: embedding an image\nsection: Share Links\norder: 25\n---\n\n\n# Embedding an Image\n\n<br />\n\nThe embed feature of share links may be used to create interactive experiences with images on your own web pages or to simply show notable images and annotations. To embed an image into a webpage, copy the HTML snippet provided in the share link properties dialog into your own website. Image embedding uses the HTML <iframe\\> tag and behaves like embedded maps that are commonly used on many websites.\n\nEmbedded images are powered by share links and have the same restrictions and behave in a similar fashion. The embed code retrieved from the Viewer provides additional flexibility &mdash; primarily the ability to control the recipient's initial view. However, the initial view for embedded images may be affected by the size of the <iframe\\> window that renders the image.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Embedded images may not work in browsers that restrict third-party cookies.\n</div>\n\n<br />\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Images embedded in local HTML files do not work in Apple Safari. This limitation does not apply to webpages served over a network.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To retrieve the embed code for an image from the Repository </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Bring up the [context menu](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#context-menu) for the image\n\n 3. Click **Share**\n\n 4. In the popup dialog, click on the name of the share link or click on the **New Share Link** button to create a new one\n\n 5. Click on the **Embed Image** tab\n\n 6. (Optional) Configure the embedded image settings\n    1. (Optional) Set the **Width** (may include units such as % and px)\n    2. (Optional) Set the **Height** (may include units such as % and px)\n\n 7. Click on the ![Copy to Clipboard](../images/dialog-clipboard.svg) button to the right of the HTML snippet to copy it to the clipboard\n\n 8. Paste the HTML snippet into your webpage\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To retrieve the embed code for an image from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Share](../images/viewer-nav-share.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the name of the share link or click on the **New Share Link** button to create a new one\n\n 4. Click on the **Embed Image** tab\n\n 5. (Optional) Configure the embedded image settings\n    1. (Optional) Set the **Width** (may include units such as % and px)\n    2. (Optional) Set the **Height** (may include units such as % and px)\n    3. (Optional) Enable the **Start at current location** toggle to use the current view as the initial view for the embedded image\n\n 6. Click on the ![Copy to Clipboard](../images/dialog-clipboard.svg) button to the right of the HTML snippet to copy it to the clipboard\n\n 7. Paste the HTML snippet into your webpage\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/share-links/embedding-an-image"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"","description":null},"rawBody":"---\nredirect: /docs/share-links/share-link-overview/\n---\n","slug":"docs/share-links/"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Share Link Overview","description":"share link overview"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Share Link Overview\ndescription: share link overview\nsection: Share Links\norder: 23\n---\n\n\n# Share Link Overview\n\n<br />\n\nHave files or folders you would like to share? You can generate a unique and, optionally, time-limited share link for an image or a folder. Share links provide read-only access (unless [Collection of Annotations](/docs/share-links/advanced-share-link-options/#collection-of-annotations) is enabled) to the item(s) being shared and their children, but do not require the recipient to authenticate (i.e., can be accessed without logging in). Share links can be used by anyone that knows the share link URL, without an account.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Anyone with access to the share link URL will be able to view the content associated with the share link. It’s recommended to use share links only with trusted collaborators or for public data sharing.\n</div>\n\n\n## Image Share Links\n\nAn image share link provides read-only access (unless [Collection of Annotations](/docs/share-links/advanced-share-link-options/#collection-of-annotations) is enabled) to a single image and its metadata such as shared annotations, Custom Fields, and analysis results. Image share links can be created from the Repository page or from within the Viewer.\n\nShare links created from within the Viewer provide additional flexibility &mdash; primarily the ability to control the recipient's initial view. See [Link to Current Location](#link-to-current-location) for more details.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To create an image share link from the Repository </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Bring up the [context menu](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#context-menu) for the image\n\n 3. Click **Share**\n\n 4. Click on the **New Share Link** button\n\n 5. (Optional) Configure the link. See [Share Link Properties](#share-link-properties) for more details\n    1. (Optional) Document the purpose of the link in the **Name** field\n    2. (Optional) Choose an expiry date by clicking on the **Expires** field, or choose a preset lifetime from below the field\n    3. (Optional) Enable the **Anonymize data** toggle. See [Anonymize Data](#anonymize-data) for more details\n    4. (Optional) Enable the **Show annotations** toggle to make shared annotations visible via the share link\n\n 6. (Optional) Select the **Advanced** tab to configure [advanced share link options](/docs/share-links/advanced-share-link-options/)\n    1. (Optional) Enable **Track view history**. See [View Tracking](/docs/share-links/advanced-share-link-options/#view-tracking) for more details\n    2. (Optional) In the **Customize viewer** section, you may configure the Viewer by [hiding certain tools](/docs/share-links/advanced-share-link-options/#hiding-viewer-tools)\n    3. (Optional) In the **Allow annotations** section, you may enable the [collection of annotations](/docs/share-links/advanced-share-link-options/#collection-of-annotations) by selecting tools that will be enabled for the share link\n\n 7. (Optional) In the **Link** tab, click on the ![Copy to Clipboard](../images/dialog-clipboard.svg) button to the right of the link field to copy the URL\n\n 8. (Optional) Email the share link to the intended recipients\n    1. Add one or more email addresses to the **Email this link** section\n    2. (Optional) Add a message for the recipients to the **Message** section\n    3. Click on the **Send Email** button\n\n 9. Click on the **X** button at the top right of the popup dialog or anywhere outside of the dialog box to close it\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   All changes are saved automatically.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To create an image share link from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Share](../images/viewer-nav-share.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the **New Share Link** button\n\n 4. (Optional) Configure the link. See [Share Link Properties](#share-link-properties) for more details\n    1. (Optional) Document the purpose of the link in the **Name** field\n    2. (Optional) Choose an expiry date by clicking on the **Expires** field, or choose a preset lifetime from below the field\n    3. (Optional) Enable the **Link to current location** toggle to set the ROI when the link is first opened to match the current position in the Viewer\n    4. (Optional) Enable the **Anonymize data** toggle. See [Anonymize Data](#anonymize-data) for more details\n    5. (Optional) Enable the **Show annotations** toggle to make shared annotations visible via the share link\n\n 5. (Optional) Select the **Advanced** tab to configure [advanced share link options](/docs/share-links/advanced-share-link-options/)\n    1. (Optional) Enable **Track view history**. See [View Tracking](/docs/share-links/advanced-share-link-options/#view-tracking) for more details\n    2. (Optional) In the **Customize viewer** section, you may configure the Viewer by [hiding certain tools](/docs/share-links/advanced-share-link-options/#hiding-viewer-tools)\n    3. (Optional) In the **Allow annotations** section, you may enable the [collection of annotations](/docs/share-links/advanced-share-link-options/#collection-of-annotations) by selecting tools that will be enabled for the share link\n\n 6. (Optional) In the **Link** tab, click on the ![Copy to Clipboard](../images/dialog-clipboard.svg) button to the right of the link field to copy the URL\n\n 7. (Optional) Email the share link to the intended recipients\n    1. Add one or more email addresses to the **Email this link** section\n    2. (Optional) Add a message for the recipients to the **Message** section\n    3. Click on the **Send Email** button\n\n 8. Click on the **X** button at the top right of the popup dialog or anywhere outside of the dialog box to close it\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   All changes are saved automatically.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Folder Share Links\n\nA folder share link provides read-only access (unless [Collection of Annotations](/docs/share-links/advanced-share-link-options/#collection-of-annotations) is enabled) to the contents of a folder and its subfolders recursively, including all the metadata associated with these items. A folder share link can be used to navigate the folder and its children, including any images that are contained within them. Folder share links are ideal for sharing an entire dataset, case or study.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To create a share link for the current folder </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Click on the ![Down Arrow](../images/nav-arrow-down.svg) button next to the current folder's breadcrumb\n\n 3. Click **Share**\n\n 4. Click on the **New Share Link** button\n\n 5. (Optional) Configure the link. See [Share Link Properties](#share-link-properties) for more details\n    1. (Optional) Document the purpose of the link in the **Name** field\n    2. (Optional) Choose an expiry date by clicking on the **Expires** field, or choose a preset lifetime from below the field\n    3. (Optional) Enable the **Anonymize data** toggle. See [Anonymize Data](#anonymize-data) for more details\n    4. (Optional) Enable the **Show annotations** toggle to make shared annotations visible via the share link\n\n 6. (Optional) Select the **Advanced** tab to configure [advanced share link options](/docs/share-links/advanced-share-link-options/)\n    1. (Optional) Enable **Track view history**. See [View Tracking](/docs/share-links/advanced-share-link-options/#view-tracking) for more details\n    2. (Optional) In the **Customize viewer** section, you may configure the Viewer by [hiding certain tools](/docs/share-links/advanced-share-link-options/#hiding-viewer-tools)\n    3. (Optional) In the **Allow annotations** section, you may enable the [collection of annotations](/docs/share-links/advanced-share-link-options/#collection-of-annotations) by selecting tools that will be enabled for the share link\n\n 7. (Optional) In the **Link** tab, click on the ![Copy to Clipboard](../images/dialog-clipboard.svg) button to the right of the link field to copy the URL\n\n 8. (Optional) Email the share link to the intended recipients\n    1. Add one or more email addresses to the **Email this link** section\n    2. (Optional) Add a message for the recipients to the **Message** section\n    3. Click on the **Send Email** button\n\n 9. Click on the **X** button at the top right of the popup dialog or anywhere outside of the dialog box to close it\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   All changes are saved automatically.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To create a share link for a folder </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Bring up the [context menu](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#context-menu) for the folder\n\n 3. Click **Share**\n\n 4. Click on the **New Share Link** button\n\n 5. (Optional) Configure the link. See [Share Link Properties](#share-link-properties) for more details\n    1. (Optional) Document the purpose of the link in the **Name** field\n    2. (Optional) Choose an expiry date by clicking on the **Expires** field, or choose a preset lifetime from below the field\n    3. (Optional) Enable the **Anonymize data** toggle. See [Anonymize Data](#anonymize-data) for more details\n    4. (Optional) Enable the **Show annotations** toggle to make shared annotations visible via the share link\n\n 6. (Optional) Select the **Advanced** tab to configure [advanced share link options](/docs/share-links/advanced-share-link-options/)\n    1. (Optional) Enable **Track view history**. See [View Tracking](/docs/share-links/advanced-share-link-options/#view-tracking) for more details\n    2. (Optional) In the **Customize viewer** section, you may configure the Viewer by [hiding certain tools](/docs/share-links/advanced-share-link-options/#hiding-viewer-tools)\n    3. (Optional) In the **Allow annotations** section, you may enable the [collection of annotations](/docs/share-links/advanced-share-link-options/#collection-of-annotations) by selecting tools that will be enabled for the share link\n\n 7. (Optional) In the **Link** tab, click on the ![Copy to Clipboard](../images/dialog-clipboard.svg) button to the right of the link field to copy the URL\n\n 8. (Optional) Email the share link to the intended recipients\n    1. Add one or more email addresses to the **Email this link** section\n    2. (Optional) Add a message for the recipients to the **Message** section\n    3. Click on the **Send Email** button\n\n 9. Click on the **X** button at the top right of the popup dialog or anywhere outside of the dialog box to close it\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   All changes are saved automatically.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Attachment Share Links\n\nAn attachment share link provides read-only access to any file in the Repository other than an image. Share links for attachments do not have advanced options.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To create a share link for an attachment </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Bring up the [context menu](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#context-menu) for the item\n\n 3. Click **Share**\n\n 4. Click on the **New Share Link** button\n\n 5. (Optional) Configure the link. See [Share Link Properties](#share-link-properties) for more details\n    1. (Optional) Document the purpose of the link in the **Name** field\n    2. (Optional) Choose an expiry date by clicking on the **Expires** field, or choose a preset lifetime from below the field\n\n 6. (Optional) In the **Link** tab, click on the ![Copy to Clipboard](../images/dialog-clipboard.svg) button to the right of the link field to copy the URL\n\n 7. (Optional) Email the share link to the intended recipients\n    1. Add one or more email addresses to the **Email this link** section\n    2. (Optional) Add a message for the recipients to the **Message** section\n    3. Click on the **Send Email** button\n\n 8. Click on the **X** button at the top right of the popup dialog or anywhere outside of the dialog box to close it\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   All changes are saved automatically.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Share Link Properties\n\nShare links have a number of properties that make it easier to share exactly the content that is required.\n\n\n### Name\n\nShare link names can be used to distinguish different links and/or to summarize the reason for which they were created. The name is not visible to recipients of the share link.\n\n\n### Expiry Date\n\nAn expiry date may be set to limit the duration of time that share links can be accessed by recipients. Without an expiry date, recipients can access data until the links are deleted.\n\nEmbedded images inherit the expiry date of a share link, if set. After a share link has expired, the related embedded images will no longer work.\n\n\n### Anonymize Data\n\nShare links can be anonymized by enabling the **Anonymize data** toggle. With this option selected the following restrictions are applied to the share link:\n\n- Custom Fields values that have been marked as having PI are hidden, see [Custom Fields Settings](/docs/metadata/custom-fields/#custom-field-settings) for details\n- Slide labels associated with WSI, other than burned-in annotations, are hidden\n- Recipients will not be able to download images\n\nEmbedded images inherit the anonymization property of a share link.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  If the user creating a share link lacks the \"View Protected Information\" permission flag, then the <b>Anonymize data</b> toggle defaults to enabled and cannot be disabled.\n</div></div>\n\n<br />\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  The option to anonymize data only applies to share links for images and folders. Share links to attachments do not have this toggle.\n</div>\n\n\n### Show Annotations\n\nTo make the annotations of an image visible to share link recipients, enable the **Show annotations** toggle. With this toggle selected, all shared annotations will be visible to recipients but your private annotations remain hidden.\n\nEmbedded images inherit this property from share links. When enabled, annotations on the image will be visible via an embedded image.\n\n\n### Link to Current Location\n\nThe **Link to current location** toggle, when enabled, configures the share link to replicate the current scene in the Viewer, at the moment the share link is generated, when the link is first accessed. This option is only available if a share link is created from within the Viewer. The scene is defined by the point at the center of the viewport and current magnification.\n\nEmbedded images inherit this property from share links. When enabled, the code snippet in the embedded image tab will be configured to show the current scene as the default view.\n","slug":"docs/share-links/share-link-overview"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Managing Share Links","description":"managing share links"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Managing Share Links\ndescription: managing share links\nsection: Share Links\norder: 24\n---\n\n\n# Managing Share Links\n\n<br />\n\nShare links can be viewed, edited and deleted after they have been created. In order to see the share links that have been generated for an item, bring up the [context menu](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#context-menu) for the item in the Repository and select **Share**. At present, there is no way to see all the shared links that have been generated by all users and for all images and folders.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  If there are any share links associated with an item, a share icon is displayed to the right of its name in the Repository listing. Hovering over the icon shows how many share links are associated with the item.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To edit a share link for the current folder from the Repository </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Click on the ![Share](../images/repository-share.svg) button next to the current folder's breadcrumb. This icon only appears if at least one share link has been created for the current folder\n\n 3. In the popup dialog, click on the name of the share link to edit\n\n 4. (Optional) Configure the link. See [Share Link Properties](/docs/share-links/share-link-overview/#share-link-properties) for more details\n    1. (Optional) Document the purpose of the link in the **Name** field\n    2. (Optional) Choose an expiry date by clicking on the **Expires** field, or choose a preset lifetime from below the field\n    3. (Optional) Enable the **Anonymize data** toggle. See [Anonymize Data](/docs/share-links/share-link-overview/#anonymize-data) for more details\n    4. (Optional) Enable the **Show annotations** toggle to make shared annotations visible via the share link\n\n 5. (Optional) In the **Link** tab, click on the ![Copy to Clipboard](../images/dialog-clipboard.svg) button to the right of the link field to copy the URL\n\n 6. (Optional) Email the share link to the intended recipients\n    1. Add one or more email addresses to the **Email this link** section\n    2. (Optional) Add a message for the recipients to the **Message** section\n    3. Click on the **Send Email** button\n\n 7. Click on the **X** button at the top right of the popup dialog or anywhere outside of the dialog box to close it\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   All changes are saved automatically.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete a share link for the current folder from the Repository </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Click on the ![Share](../images/repository-share.svg) button next to the current folder's breadcrumb. This icon only appears if at least one share link has been created for the current folder\n\n 3. In the popup dialog, click on the ![Delete](../images/dialog-delete.svg) button adjacent to the share link\n\n 4. Click on the **Delete Link** button to confirm if you are sure you wish to remove the item. To cancel the delete action, click on the **Cancel** button or press the **Escape** key\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To edit a share link for any item from the Repository </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Bring up the [context menu](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#context-menu) for the item\n\n 3. Click **Share**\n\n 4. In the popup dialog, click on the name of the share link to edit\n\n 5. (Optional) Configure the link. See [Share Link Properties](/docs/share-links/share-link-overview/#share-link-properties) for more details\n    1. (Optional) Document the purpose of the link in the **Name** field\n    2. (Optional) Choose an expiry date by clicking on the **Expires** field, or choose a preset lifetime from below the field\n    3. (Optional) Enable the **Anonymize data** toggle. See [Anonymize Data](/docs/share-links/share-link-overview/#anonymize-data) for more details\n    4. (Optional) Enable the **Show annotations** toggle to make shared annotations visible via the share link\n\n 6. (Optional) In the **Link** tab, click on the ![Copy to Clipboard](../images/dialog-clipboard.svg) button to the right of the link field to copy the URL\n\n 7. (Optional) Email the share link to the intended recipients\n    1. Add one or more email addresses to the **Email this link** section\n    2. (Optional) Add a message for the recipients to the **Message** section\n    3. Click on the **Send Email** button\n\n 8. Click on the **X** button at the top right of the popup dialog or anywhere outside of the dialog box to close it\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   All changes are saved automatically.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete a share link for any item from the Repository </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Bring up the [context menu](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#context-menu) for the item\n\n 3. Click **Share**\n\n 4. In the popup dialog, click on the ![Delete](../images/dialog-delete.svg) button adjacent to the share link\n\n 5. Click on the **Delete Link** button to confirm if you are sure you wish to remove the item. To cancel the delete action, click on the **Cancel** button or press the **Escape** key\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To edit a share link for an image from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Share](../images/viewer-nav-share.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the name of the share link to edit\n\n 4. (Optional) Configure the link. See [Share Link Properties](/docs/share-links/share-link-overview/#share-link-properties) for more details\n    1. (Optional) Document the purpose of the link in the **Name** field\n    2. (Optional) Choose an expiry date by clicking on the **Expires** field, or choose a preset lifetime from below the field\n    3. (Optional) Enable the **Link to current location** toggle to set the ROI when the link is first opened to match the current position in the Viewer\n    4. (Optional) Enable the **Anonymize data** toggle. See [Anonymize Data](/docs/share-links/share-link-overview/#anonymize-data) for more details\n    5. (Optional) Enable the **Show annotations** toggle to make shared annotations visible via the share link\n\n 5. (Optional) In the **Link** tab, click on the ![Copy to Clipboard](../images/dialog-clipboard.svg) button to the right of the link field to copy the URL\n\n 6. (Optional) Email the share link to the intended recipients\n    1. Add one or more email addresses to the **Email this link** section\n    2. (Optional) Add a message for the recipients to the **Message** section\n    3. Click on the **Send Email** button\n\n 7. Click on the **X** button at the top right of the popup dialog or anywhere outside of the dialog box to close it\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   All changes are saved automatically.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete a share link for an image from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Share](../images/viewer-nav-share.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. In the popup dialog, click on the ![Delete](../images/dialog-delete.svg) button adjacent to the share link\n\n 4. Click on the **Delete Link** button to confirm if you are sure you wish to remove the item. To cancel the delete action, click on the **Cancel** button or press the **Escape** key\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/share-links/managing-share-links"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Basic Controls","description":"basic controls"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Basic Controls\ndescription: basic controls\nsection: Viewer\norder: 15\n---\n\n\n# Basic Controls\n\n<br />\n\n\n## Panning\n\nThe Viewer supports multiple ways for navigating images in the Viewer using the mouse and keyboard.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To pan an image with the mouse from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. Press and hold the left mouse button anywhere on the image\n\n 2. Drag with the mouse to navigate the image\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To pan an image with the keyboard from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. Click anywhere on the image (to set focus)\n\n 2. Use the arrow keys (up, down, left, right) to navigate the image\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To show the current position of the cursor </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Enable cursor location reporting](../images/viewer-topbar-location.svg) button in the Viewer top bar\n\n 2. Hover over the image to display a tooltip with the cursor's x and y position. It also includes the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) values for brightfield images\n\n 3. (Optional) Click on the ![Disable cursor location reporting](../images/viewer-topbar-location-off.svg) button to turn off the tooltip.\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Magnification\n\nMagnification controls are automatically provided for images that define an objective magnification and for images that are heuristically determined to be whole slide images (e.g., a TIFF file containing a description from a known WSI scanner manufacturer that also has a well-defined pixel size).\n\nThe Viewer will provide preset magnification buttons that are appropriate for the current image, if this information is provided by the image or can be determined heuristically. The preset buttons are accessible from the bottom left side of the image viewport, above the current magnification. For any image where magnification cannot be determined, the magnification controls are replaced with scaling controls (e.g., 50%, 100%).\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  The current magnification is displayed in the Viewer top bar and at the bottom left corner of each image\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change magnification (or scale factor) using the mouse from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. Click anywhere on the image (to set focus)\n\n 2. Use the wheel on the mouse to change magnification fluidly\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change magnification using the keyboard from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. Click anywhere on the image (to set focus)\n\n 2. Use the +/- buttons to change magnification in small increments\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Heuristically Determined Magnification\n\nImage pixel size is loosely related to the scanned magnification. WSI scanner manufacturers typically define a conversion between pixel size and magnification. Where magnification is not explicitly defined in an image, the pixel size will be used to infer the equivalent objective magnification of the image. In many cases, scanned magnification of 20x is approximately equal to 0.5&mu;m per pixel.\n\n\n### Digital Zoom\n\nYou can zoom an image beyond its native resolution up to 400%. For example, if an image has a maximum magnification of 20x, it can be scaled up to 80x.\n\nThe current magnification is always visible in the bottom left corner of an image. When digital zoom is enabled for an image, the current magnification is shown with a blue border and an adjacent \"Digital Zoom\" indicator.\n\n\n## Focal Planes\n\nFocal planes are automatically detected when present in supported images. If the image has multiple [sub-images](/docs/viewer/overview/#sub-images), the focal plane for each sub-image can be independently configured by selecting the appropriate sub-image from the dropdown menu.\n\nThe focal plane controls are visible in the bottom left bottom of the image viewport only when focal planes are detected in an image.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To see available focal planes for an image </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the current focal plane indicator\\* to reveal the focal plane dialog\n\n 2. Click into the Focal Plane dropdown menu to view available planes\n\n 3. Click on the **x** button to close the focal plane dialog\n\n\n \\* The focal plane controls consist of ![Up Arrow](../images/viewer-nav-arrow-up.svg) and ![Down Arrow](../images/viewer-nav-arrow-down.svg) arrows and a numeric indicator displaying the current focal plane offset (e.g., \"0 &mu;m\"). If available for the current image, these controls are located on the bottom left-hand side of the image viewport immediately above the magnification controls.\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the focal plane using the mouse </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Up Arrow](../images/viewer-nav-arrow-up.svg) or ![Down Arrow](../images/viewer-nav-arrow-down.svg) buttons on the focal plane controls\\*\n\n\n \\* The focal plane controls consist of ![Up Arrow](../images/viewer-nav-arrow-up.svg) and ![Down Arrow](../images/viewer-nav-arrow-down.svg) arrows and a numeric indicator displaying the current focal plane offset (e.g., \"0 &mu;m\"). If available for the current image, these controls are located on the bottom left-hand side of the image viewport immediately above the magnification controls.\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the focal plane using the mouse wheel </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the image\n\n 2. Hold down the **Shift** key on the keyboard and simultaneously use the mouse wheel to fly through the available focal planes\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Rotation Controls\n\nThe rotation tool is located on the bottom left corner of the image viewport. The rotation value is always saved for each user and will be preserved the next time you view the image.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To enable the rotation tool </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on the image to reveal the toolbar at the top left of the panel\n\n 2. Click on the ![Expand Toolbar](../images/viewer-toolbar-expand.svg) button to expand the toolbar if necessary\n\n 3. Click on the ![Rotate](../images/viewer-toolbar-rotate.svg) button in the toolbar to show or hide the rotation tool\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To rotate using the mouse </summary>\n\n 1. Click and drag the ball around the outside of the rotation tool to the desired value\n\n 2. Click in the middle of the rotation tool (where the rotation value is displayed) and type a value between (-360) to +360 degrees\n\n 3. To reset rotation to 0&deg;, click in the middle of the rotation tool and type 0\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   The rotation tool accepts values with a precision of 0.1.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To rotate using the keyboard </summary>\n\n 1. Hold the **Alt** key and press the **up arrow** or **down arrow** key to rotate by 1&deg; clockwise or counter-clockwise, respectively\n\n 2. Hold the **Alt** key and press the **PageUp** or **PageDown** key to rotate by 10&deg; clockwise or counter-clockwise, respectively\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Color Management\n\nThe color management tools can be used to apply an ICC color profile within the Viewer. The application of ICC profiles ensures a high degree of color reproducibility across different monitors and can be used to overcome/reduce color variability across multiple devices.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Color Management is available for RGB images and disabled by default; users can choose their preference.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the color management profile </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on the image to reveal the toolbar at the top left of the panel\n\n 2. Click on the ![Expand Toolbar](../images/viewer-toolbar-expand.svg) button to expand the toolbar if necessary\n\n 3. Click on the ![Palette](../images/viewer-toolbar-palette.svg) button dropdown menu in the toolbar to reveal the color management dialog\n\n 4. Select one of the available ICC color profiles\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Full Screen Mode\n\nTo enlarge the image viewport, so that it fills your screen, click on the ![Fullscreen](../images/viewer-topbar-fullscreen.svg) button in the Viewer top bar. When done, press the **Escape** key on your keyboard to exit full screen mode.\n\n\n## Keyboard Shortcuts\n\nThe following keyboard shortcuts are available when using the keyboard:\n\n| Shortcut | Action |\n| -------- | ------ |\n| A        | Draw an arrow annotation |\n| B        | Draw a bookmark annotation |\n| C        | Draw an ellipse annotation |\n| P        | Draw a polygon annotation |\n| F        | Draw a freehand annotation |\n| R        | Draw a rectangle annotation |\n| U        | Draw a ruler annotation |\n| S        | Create a snapshot |\n| Alt + ↑  | Rotate clockwise 1&deg; |\n| Alt + ↓  | Rotate counter-clockwise 1&deg; |\n| Alt + PageUp | Rotate clockwise 10&deg; |\n| Alt + PageDown | Rotate counter-clockwise 10&deg; |\n| Ctrl + → | Next Image |\n| Ctrl + ← | Previous Image |\n","slug":"docs/viewer/basic-controls"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Figure Maker","description":"figure maker"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Figure Maker\ndescription: figure maker\nsection: Viewer\norder: 27\n---\n\n\n# Figure Maker\n##### [add-on]\n\nFigure Maker extends the capabilities of [Split View](/docs/viewer/split-view/) for creating publication-ready Figures. Using Figure Maker it's possible to decorate image panels created with [Split View](/docs/viewer/split-view/) using markup tools and export the result in common formats for use in other applications. Figure Maker reduces the need for image editing software when preparing Figures by providing the ability to:\n\n- Save image panels created with [Split View](/docs/viewer/split-view/)\n- Add markup such as scale bars, text labels, and slide labels to image panels\n- Easily configure the visibility of annotations and image overlays\n- Export image panels in common image formats\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  The Figure maker add-on is required to create or edit Figures.\n</div>\n\n\n## Creating a Figure\n\nFigures are created when image panels, that are created using [Split View](/docs/viewer/split-view/), are saved. Therefore, a Figure may have one or more images, the number of images and their arrangement can be adjusted in the usual way, and each image can be individually manipulated (panned, zoomed) or synchronized to find desired ROIs within each panel.\n\nWhen saving a Figure using Figure Maker, the properties that affect the appearance of the Figure are saved including the layout and arrangement of panels, the ROI within each panel and the markup configuration of panels. Panel properties are recorded relative to the current image viewing area.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  If you attempt to modify an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n</div></div>\n\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To create a Figure from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. Open one or more images in the Viewer to create image panel(s). See [Split View](/docs/viewer/split-view/) for more details\n\n 2. (Optional) Configure the markup for the panel(s). See [Figure Markup](#figure-markup) for more details\n\n 3. Click on the ![Menu](../images/viewer-topbar-menu.svg) icon at the right corner of the Viewer top bar\n\n 4. Select **Save As** from the dropdown menu\n\n 5. In the **Save As** dialog that pops up, navigate to a folder using the folder browser\n    - Click on the folder name dropdown menu at the top of the dialog to see a list of folders related to the current view, and a list of recently visited folders\n\n 6. Enter a **Name** in the text box at the bottom left\n\n 7. Click on the **Save** button\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   Changes that affect the appearance of image panel(s) are saved, including the panel layout, ROI, and markup.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To save changes made to a Figure </summary>\n\n 1. Make changes to the Figure, such as adding annotations and labels. See [Figure Markup](#figure-markup) for more details\n\n 2. Click on the ![Menu](../images/viewer-topbar-menu.svg) icon at the right corner of the Viewer top bar\n\n 3. Select **Save** from the dropdown menu\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   Changes that affect the appearance of image panel(s) are saved, including the panel layout, ROI, and markup.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To open a previously saved Figure </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Click on an item with the ![Figure](../images/repository-figure.svg) icon or that has the **Type** of \"Figure\" in the file listing\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   Figures automatically scale to the on-screen space available to the Viewer/application when opened. While the on-screen size of image panels can change depending on the context, Figure Maker aims to retain the ROI within each panel by scaling the images appropriately (i.e., setting a lower or higher magnification when the on-screen panel dimensions get smaller or larger, respectively).\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To rename a Figure from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the current name of the Figure at the top left of the Viewer (defaults to \"Untitled View\"), or the ![Edit](../images/viewer-topbar-pen.svg) icon next to it\n\n 2. Type the new name for the Figure\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To rename a Figure from the Repository </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Right click on an item with the ![Figure](../images/repository-figure.svg) icon or that has the **Type** of \"Figure\" in the file listing to bring up the context menu\n\n 3. Click **Rename**\n\n 4. In the popup dialog, type a new name for the Figure\n\n 5. Click on the **Rename** button or press the **Enter** key to save. To discard your changes, click on the **Cancel** button or press the **Escape** key\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Figure Markup\n\nMany of the markup features that are available in the Viewer can be configured for each of the images in the Figure. The markup for each of the image panels can be independently controlled.\n\n\n### Image Annotations\n\nThe annotations that have been previously created can be made visible on an image panel. In addition, new annotations can be created directly from the Figure Maker environment.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Annotations can only be created when annotations on the panel are visible.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle the visibility of annotations on an image panel </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on the image to reveal the toolbar at the top left of the panel\n\n 2. Click on the ![Expand Toolbar](../images/viewer-toolbar-expand.svg) button to expand the toolbar if necessary\n\n 3. Click on the ![Pen](../images/viewer-toolbar-pen.svg) button to reveal the markup menu\n\n 4. Adjust the **Annotations** toggle to show or hide image annotations\n\n 5. (Optional) Click on **Annotations** to expand the section and click on **Apply to All Slides** to apply the visibility setting to all panels\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   Borders of snapshots are not included in exported Figures even when annotations are visible.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To create annotations on an image panel </summary>\n\n 1. Ensure annotations for the image panel are visible (see above)\n\n 2. Right-click on the image to open up the annotation ring\n\n 3. Select an annotation tool and follow the on-screen instructions to create a new annotation. See [Creating Annotations](/docs/viewer/annotations-panel/#creating-annotations) for more details\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Slide Label\n\nThe slide label can be overlaid on an image panel and made visible until it's removed.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle the visibility of the slide label on an image panel </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on the image to reveal the toolbar at the top left of the panel\n\n 2. Click on the ![Expand Toolbar](../images/viewer-toolbar-expand.svg) button to expand the toolbar if necessary\n\n 3. Click on the ![Pen](../images/viewer-toolbar-pen.svg) button to reveal the markup menu\n\n 4. Adjust the **Slide Label** toggle to show or hide the label\n\n 5. Click on **Slide Label** to expand the section and adjust preferences\n    1. (Optional) Adjust the location of the label by clicking one of the four corners in the control to the right of **Alignment**\n    2. (Optional) Click on the ![Rotate](../images/viewer-panel-rotate.svg) button to rotate the label\n    3. (Optional) Click on **Apply to All Slides** to apply these settings to all panels\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Text Label\n\nA text label can be overlaid on an image panel and made visible until it’s removed.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To include a text label on an image panel </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on the image to reveal the toolbar at the top left of the panel\n\n 2. Click on the ![Expand Toolbar](../images/viewer-toolbar-expand.svg) button to expand the toolbar if necessary\n\n 3. Click on the ![Pen](../images/viewer-toolbar-pen.svg) button to reveal the markup menu\n\n 4. Adjust the **Label** toggle to show or hide the label\n\n 5. Click on **Label** to expand the section and adjust preferences\n    1. (Optional) Adjust the label text in the field below the toggle (default text will be the image name)\n    2. (Optional) Adjust the location of the label by clicking one of the four corners in the control to the right of **Alignment**\n    3. (Optional) Adjust the text color by clicking in the colored box to the right of **Foreground**, then selecting a color\n    4. (Optional) Adjust the text background color by clicking in the colored box to the right of **Background**, then selecting a color\n    5. (Optional) Click on **Apply to All Slides** to apply these settings to all panels\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Scale Bar\n\nA scale bar can be overlaid on an image panel and made visible until it’s removed.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To include a scale bar on an image panel </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on the image to reveal the toolbar at the top left of the panel\n\n 2. Click on the ![Expand Toolbar](../images/viewer-toolbar-expand.svg) button to expand the toolbar if necessary\n\n 3. Click on the ![Pen](../images/viewer-toolbar-pen.svg) button to reveal the markup menu\n\n 4. Adjust the **Scale Bar** toggle to show or hide the scale bar\n\n 5. Click on **Scale Bar** to expand the section and adjust preferences\n    1. (Optional) Adjust the location of the scale bar by clicking one of the four corners in the control to the right of **Alignment**\n    2. (Optional) Adjust the text and scale bar color by clicking in the colored box to the right of **Color**, then selecting a color\n    3. (Optional) Adjust the **Show measurement text** toggle to show or hide the measurement\n    4. (Optional) Adjust the **Show border** toggle to show or hide a border around the text and scale bar\n    5. (Optional) Adjust the **Automatic length** toggle to determine the size of the scale bar\n       - When enabled the size is determined automatically\n       - When disabled the user can specify the size of the scale bar and select a unit of measurement from the dropdown menu\n    6. (Optional) Select the location of the measurement text relative to the scale bar by clicking one of the **Text Alignment** options: ![Align Left](../images/viewer-panel-align-left.svg) (left), ![Align Center](../images/viewer-panel-align-center.svg) (center), or ![Align Right](../images/viewer-panel-align-right.svg) (right)\n    7. (Optional) Click on **Apply to All Slides** to apply these settings to all panels\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Downloading Figures\n\nThe contents of a Figure can be exported as a common image format (PNG, JPEG, TIFF, or PDF) for use in presentations or other documents.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To export a Figure from the Repository </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select a Figure object from the folder listing\n\n 3. Bring up the context menu for the item\n\n 4. Click on **Export Figure** to bring up the **Download Figure** popup dialog\n\n 5. Click on the **Download** menu at the bottom right of the dialog\n\n 6. Adjust preferences such as\n    - **Size**: adjust the width or height to specify the desired size\n    - **File type**: select the desired format from the dropdown menu\n    - **White Background**: Enable to use a white background instead of the default black in the exported image\n\n 7. Click on the **Download** button\n\n 8. If prompted, select a location to save the downloaded file\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To export a Figure from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. Create a new Figure or open an existing Figure in the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Camera](../images/viewer-topbar-snapshot.svg) button in the Viewer top bar to display the Download dialog\n\n 3. Adjust preferences such as\n    - **Size**: adjust the width or height to specify the desired size\n    - **File type**: select the desired format from the dropdown menu\n    - **White Background**: Enable to use a white background instead of the default black in the exported image\n\n 4. Click on the **Download** button\n\n 5. If prompted, select a location to save the downloaded file\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Deleting Figures\n\nFigures can be moved to the [Trash](/docs/repository/trash/) from the Repository.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To move a Figure to the Trash from the Repository </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select a Figure object from the folder listing\n\n 3. Bring up the context menu for the item\n\n 4. Click on **Move to Trash**\n\n 5. Click on the **Yes** button to confirm\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/viewer/figure-maker"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Annotations Panel","description":"annotations panel"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Annotations Panel\ndescription: annotations panel\nsection: Viewer\norder: 22\n---\n\n\n# Annotations Panel\n\n<br />\n\nThe Annotations panel contains a list of all geometric annotations that have been drawn onto the image and allows the user to modify many of their properties.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle the visibility of the Annotations panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Annotations](../images/viewer-nav-pen.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Annotations panel\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To resize the Annotations panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Annotations](../images/viewer-nav-pen.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click and drag the right border of the panel to resize it\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Creating Annotations\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To create annotations </summary>\n\n 1. From within the Viewer, right-click on an image to open up the annotation ring\n\n 2. Select an annotation tool\n\n 3. Follow the on-screen instructions at the top of the Viewer to draw\n\n 4. Follow the on-screen instructions at the top of the Viewer to end drawing\n\n</details>\n\nThe following annotation types are available:\n\n| Tool     | Instruction to create                                        |\n| -------- | ------------------------------------------------------------ |\n| Rect     | Click and drag to contain an area of interest.               |\n| Arrow    | Click and drag to point to an area of interest. The starting point will be the arrowhead. |\n| Polygon  | Click to add points.<br />Click on the first point to close (end) the drawing or press **Z** to close automatically.<br />Press **Ctrl + Z** to undo the last point.<br />To pan while drawing, hold the **Shift** key and drag with the mouse. |\n| Freehand | Click and drag to draw on the image.                         |\n| Ruler    | Click and drag to measure the area of interest.              |\n| Ellipse  | Click and drag to contain the area of interest. The starting point will be the center of the ellipse. |\n| Bookmark | Click to place a bookmark pin on the image. |\n\n\n## Editing Annotations\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  If you attempt to modify an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n</div></div>\n\n### Adjustments\n\nThe following adjustments can be made to an annotation by clicking on it in the Viewer, which exposes the control points for the shape.\n\n#### Moving Annotations\n\nAll annotation types can be moved.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To move an annotation </summary>\n\n 1. Select an annotation to reveal its control points by clicking the border of the rectangle, ellipse or other shape\n\n 2. Click and drag the shape to move it around the Viewer\n\n</details>\n\n#### Resizing Annotations\n\nAll annotation types except for bookmarks can be resized.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To resize an annotation </summary>\n\n 1. Select an annotation to reveal its control points by clicking the border of the rectangle, ellipse or other shape\n\n 2. (Optional) Hold down the **Ctrl** key on the keyboard to maintain the current aspect ratio of the shape\n\n 3. Click and drag the control points to adjust the annotation width (side points), height (top and bottom points), or both (corner points)\n\n</details>\n\n#### Moving Individual Annotation Points\n\nIndividual points can only be changed for polygon and freehand annotations.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change an annotation's individual points </summary>\n\n 1. Double click the border of a polygon or freehand shape to reveal its individual points\n\n 2. Click and drag the points to adjust the annotation\n\n</details>\n\n### Properties\n\nThe following annotation properties can be changed from the Annotations panel or by clicking on the annotation in the Viewer, which exposes a popup dialog.\n\n#### Annotation Color\n\nThere are 6 possible colors for annotations, these can be changed from within the Viewer or from the Annotations panel.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change an annotation color from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. Select an annotation to reveal a dialog by clicking the border of the rectangle, ellipse or other shape\n\n 2. Click on the solid circle at the top right of the popup dialog\n\n 3. Select one of the available colors\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change an annotation color from the Annotations panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Annotations](../images/viewer-nav-pen.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Identify the annotation entry to be modified\n\n 4. Click on the solid circle at the top right of the entry\n\n 5. Select one of the available colors\n\n</details>\n\n\n#### Annotation Name\n\nThe name is a single line text field that supports unicode characters. The name is displayed on the annotation and can be changed from within the Viewer or from the Annotations panel.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To rename an annotation from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. Select an annotation to reveal a dialog by clicking the border of the rectangle, ellipse or other shape\n\n 2. Click on the first line of text in the popup dialog (default: \"Untitled\")\n\n 3. Provide a name or edit the existing text\n\n 4. Press the **Enter** key or click away from the textbox to save your changes\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To rename an annotation from the Annotations panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Annotations](../images/viewer-nav-pen.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Identify the annotation entry to be modified\n\n 4. Click on the first line of text in the entry (default: \"Untitled\")\n\n 5. Provide a name or edit the existing text\n\n 6. Press the **Enter** key or click away from the textbox to save your changes\n\n</details>\n\n\n#### Annotation Description\n\nThe description is a multiline text field that supports unicode characters and can be modified from within the Viewer or from the Annotations panel. Enter new lines by pressing **Shift + Enter**.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To edit an annotation description from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. Select an annotation to reveal a dialog by clicking the border of the rectangle, ellipse or other shape\n\n 2. Click on the second line of text in the popup dialog (default: \"No description\")\n\n 3. Provide a description or edit the existing text\n\n 4. Press the **Enter** key or click away from the textbox to save your changes\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To edit an annotation description from the Annotations panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Annotations](../images/viewer-nav-pen.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Identify the annotation entry to be modified\n\n 4. Click on the second line of text in the entry (default: \"No description\")\n\n 5. Provide a description or edit the existing text\n\n 6. Press the **Enter** key or click away from the textbox to save your changes\n\n</details>\n\n\n#### Annotation Visibility\n\nAnnotations are visible on the image by default once drawn. If you need to declutter the image, you may hide individual annotations or all annotations at once.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the visibility of individual annotations </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Annotations](../images/viewer-nav-pen.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Identify the annotation entry to be modified\n\n 4. Click on the ![Eye](../images/viewer-panel-eye.svg) button to toggle visibility\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the visibility of all annotations </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Annotations](../images/viewer-nav-pen.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the ![Eye](../images/viewer-panel-eye.svg) button at the top right corner of the Annotations panel to toggle visibility for all annotations\n\n</details>\n\n\n#### Annotation Sharing\n\nAnnotations may be shared with your team or kept private for the user that created them. Shared annotations are visible to all users in your team while private annotations are only visible to the user that created them.\n\nBy default, annotations are created as shared annotations. This preference can be changed from the Annotations panel by toggling the ![Open Lock](../images/viewer-panel-lock-open.svg)/![Closed Lock](../images/viewer-panel-lock-closed.svg) button at the top right corner of the Annotations panel.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle the sharing mode for individual annotation </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Annotations](../images/viewer-nav-pen.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Identify the annotation entry to be modified\n\n 4. Click on the ![Shared](../images/viewer-panel-lock-open.svg) **Shared**/![Private](../images/viewer-panel-lock-closed.svg) **Private** button to toggle the annotation’s sharing mode\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Locating an Annotation\n\nWhile on the Viewer, annotations are easily visible and accessible.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To locate a corresponding annotation object (on the image) from the Annotations panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Annotations](../images/viewer-nav-pen.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Identify the annotation entry\n\n 4. Click on the ![Jump to Annotation](../images/viewer-panel-gps.svg) button to jump to the annotation in the Viewer\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Deleting Annotations\n\nAnnotations can be deleted from within the Viewer or from the Annotations panel.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete an annotation from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. Select an annotation to reveal a dialog by clicking the border of the rectangle, ellipse or other shape\n\n 2. Click on the ![Delete](../images/viewer-panel-trash.svg) button at the bottom right of the popup dialog\n\n 3. Click on the **OK** button to confirm\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete an annotation from the Annotations panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Annotations](../images/viewer-nav-pen.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Identify the annotation entry to be deleted in the list\n\n 4. Click on the ![Delete](../images/viewer-panel-trash.svg) button\n\n 5. Click on the **OK** button to confirm\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/viewer/annotations-panel"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Browse Folder Panel","description":"browse folder panel"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Browse Folder Panel\ndescription: browse folder panel\nsection: Viewer\norder: 18\n---\n\n\n# Browse Folder Panel\n\n<br />\n\nThe Browse Folder panel displays the list of images in the same folder as the file currently on display in the Viewer. You can view the images in List view, Icon view or Compact List view. The Browse Folder panel can be accessed by clicking the ![Folder](../images/viewer-nav-folder.svg) button located on the left-hand sidebar of the Viewer.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle the visibility of the Browse Folder panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Folder](../images/viewer-nav-folder.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Browse Folder panel\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To resize the Browse Folder panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Folder](../images/viewer-nav-folder.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click and drag the right border of the panel to resize it\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To open the current image's folder </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Folder](../images/viewer-nav-folder.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the folder name at the top of the panel\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To open the current image's folder in a new browser tab </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Folder](../images/viewer-nav-folder.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the ![Open in New Tab](../images/viewer-panel-open-new.svg) button to the right of the folder name\n\n</details>\n\n\n## List Mode\n\nThe Browse Folder panel can list items using three formats: List, Compact List, and Icon.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the list mode </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Folder](../images/viewer-nav-folder.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the **Display Mode** button at the top right of the item list. This button will appear different depending on the current display mode: List (![List](../images/viewer-panel-display-list.svg)), Compact List (![Compact List](../images/viewer-panel-display-compact.svg)), or Icon (![Icon](../images/viewer-panel-display-icon.svg))\n\n 4. Click on the desired list view mode\n\n 5. (Optional) Toggle the display of image labels in the list by clicking on **Show Labels**\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Sort Order\n\nThe list of items in the Browse Folder panel can be sorted by any metadata field.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the sort order </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Folder](../images/viewer-nav-folder.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the sort order dropdown menu at the top right of the list of files. It shows the currently selected field by which it is sorting (defaults to \"Name\")\n\n 4. (Optional) Click on the arrow immediately to the right of the field name to toggle between sorting in ![Up Arrow](../images/viewer-panel-sort-up-arrow.svg) ascending order or ![Down Arrow](../images/viewer-panel-sort-down-arrow.svg) descending order\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Name Filter\n\nThe list of items can be filtered by name for quicker browsing.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To filter the list </summary>\n\n 1. Click in the search box indicated by the ![Magnifying Glass](../images/viewer-panel-search.svg) icon and the text \"Filter by name...\"\n\n 2. Type in the filter you wish to apply to the names. Only the items matching this text will be displayed\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   The filter can include one or more wildcard characters (<code>*</code>) which matches any character zero or more times.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## File Read Status\n\nThe file read status indicates if a file has been previously clicked on (i.e., viewed) by the currently logged-in user. An unread status is indicated by a boldface font in the Browse Folder panel and the read status is indicated by a plain face font.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle the read status </summary>\n\n 1. Bring up the [context menu](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#context-menu) for any entry in the Browse Folder panel\n\n 2. Click **Mark as Read** to enable the read status, or\n\n 3. Click **Mark as Unread** to clear the read status\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle the read status on multiple items </summary>\n\n 1. Select one or more items by holding the **Ctrl** key (on Windows) or **&#x2318; / Command** key (on macOS) key and clicking on them\n\n 2. Click the **# Selected** dropdown menu which appears at the top left of the list of files\n\n 3. Click **Mark as Read** to enable the read status, or\n\n 4. Click **Mark as Unread** to clear the read status\n\n</details>\n\n\n## File Favorite Status\n\nAny file that has been tagged as _Starred_ by the currently logged-in user is considered a favorite. Items tagged this way are quickly and easily accessible from the Starred Items List, and are indicated by a solid star in the Browse Folder panel.\nSee [Favorite Status](/docs/repository/repository-operations/#favorite-status) for more details.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle the favorite status </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Empty Star](../images/viewer-panel-star-empty.svg) button to the left of an item name in the Browse Folder panel to add the _Starred_ tag, or\n\n 2. Click on the ![Star](../images/viewer-panel-star-full.svg) button to the left of an item name in the Browse Folder panel to remove the tag\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle the favorite status on multiple items </summary>\n\n 1. Select one or more items by holding the **Ctrl** key (on Windows) or **&#x2318; / Command** key (on macOS) key and clicking on them\n\n 2. Click the **# Selected** dropdown menu which appears at the top left of the list of files\n\n 3. Click **Favorite** to add the _Starred_ tag, or\n\n 4. Click **Unfavorite** to remove the tag\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/viewer/browse-folder-panel"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Help Panel","description":"help panel"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Help Panel\ndescription: help panel\norder: 25\nsection: Viewer\n---\n\n\n# Help Panel\n\n<br />\n\nThe Help panel provides a quick and convenient reference for mouse actions and keyboard shortcuts within the Viewer.\n\nIt also includes a color guide for the [Overview Tool Heatmap](/docs/viewer/overview-tool/#heatmap).\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle the visibility of the Help panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Help](../images/viewer-nav-help.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Help panel\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To resize the Help panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Help](../images/viewer-nav-help.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click and drag the right border of the panel to resize it\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/viewer/help-panel"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Image Adjustments Panel","description":"image adjustments panel"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Image Adjustments Panel\ndescription: image adjustments panel\norder: 20\nsection: Viewer\n---\n\n\n# Image Adjustments Panel\n\n<br />\n\nThe Image Adjustments panel can be used to add basic filters to an image.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle the visibility of the Image Adjustments panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Adjustments](../images/viewer-nav-exposure.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Adjustments panel\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To resize the Image Adjustments panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Adjustments](../images/viewer-nav-exposure.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Adjustments panel\n\n 3. Click and drag the right border of the panel to resize it\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To add a filter to an image </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Adjustments](../images/viewer-nav-exposure.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Adjustments panel\n\n 3. Click on the icon of the desired filter and make adjustments. See [Filters](#filters) for more details\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the order in which filters are applied </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Adjustments](../images/viewer-nav-exposure.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Adjustments panel\n\n 3. Click on the ![Up Arrow](../images/viewer-nav-arrow-up.svg) or ![Down Arrow](../images/viewer-nav-arrow-down.svg) to the right of the filter name to move it up or down the list\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   The image filters are applied in order from top to bottom.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To remove a filter currently applied to the image </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Adjustments](../images/viewer-nav-exposure.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Adjustments panel\n\n 3. Click on the **X** to the right of the filter name to remove it from the list\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Filters\n\nThe following filters can be applied to an image. These only apply to the image as it is displayed in the Viewer, not the underlying image data.\n\n### ![Contrast](../images/viewer-panel-contrast.svg) Contrast\n\nThe contrast filter allows you to change the apparent contrast of the displayed image. Negative values reduce the contrast while positive values increase it.\n\nThe slider sets the adjustment value in the range \\[-255, 255\\] with a default value of 0.\n\n### ![Brightness](../images/viewer-panel-brightness.svg) Brightness\n\nThe brightness filter adjusts the displayed image by adding a constant value to the pixel intensities.\n\nThe slider sets the adjustment value in the range \\[-255, 255\\] with a default value of 0.\n\n### ![Threshold](../images/viewer-panel-threshold.svg) Threshold\n\nThe threshold filter converts the entire image to black and white. Pixels with an average intensity below the threshold value are converted to black and all others are converted to white.\n\nThe slider sets the threshold value in the range [0, 255] with a default value of 128.\n\n### ![Invert](../images/viewer-panel-invert.svg) Invert\n\nThe invert filter inverts the colors displayed in the image.\n\n### ![Window](../images/viewer-panel-window.svg) Window\n\nThe window filter converts the image to grayscale and scales all of the intensity values to fit within the configured range of values.\n\nThe **Center** slider determines the midpoint of the range of valid values. This slider is in the range [0 - 256] with a default value of 128.\n\nThe **Width** slider sets the upper and lower bounds of the range of valid values; half of the width below the **Center** and half above. This slider is in the range [1 - 256] with a default value of 256.\n\n### ![Isolate](../images/viewer-panel-isolate.svg) Isolate\n\nThe isolate filter allows you to display one of the red, green, or blue channels of the image as grayscale.\n\nThe **Channel** slider can be adjusted to 0 (red), 1 (green), or 2 (blue).\n","slug":"docs/viewer/image-adjustments-panel"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Image Settings Panel","description":"image settings panel"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Image Settings Panel\ndescription: image settings panel\norder: 19\nsection: Viewer\n---\n\n\n# Image Settings Panel\n##### \\[BioPharma] [Research+]\n\nThe Image Settings panel can be used to alter how images in the Viewer are rendered, including adjusting the individual channels of multi-channel images. These settings are saved as preferences for the current user, with the option to name the collection of settings, apply them to other images, and share them with your team.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle the visibility of the Image Settings panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To resize the Image Settings panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click and drag the right border of the panel to resize it\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Controls\n\n### Context Menu\n\nMany operations in the various dialogs are performed via a context menu. This menu is accessed by right-clicking on an item in the list (or one of the currently selected items when using [Multi-Select](#multi-select)).\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  On a mobile device, tap and hold on an item to display the context menu.\n</div>\n\n### Multi-Select\n\nOne or more items can be selected in a dialog in order to perform operations on items at once.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To select more than one item </summary>\n\n 1. In the dialog, click on an item in the list\n\n 2. While holding the **Ctrl** key (on Windows) or **&#x2318; / Command** key (on macOS) select another item\n\n 3. Repeat step 3 as necessary\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n<summary> To select more than one item in a continuous range </summary>\n\n 1. In the dialog, click on the first item in the range from the list\n\n 2. While holding the **Shift** key, select the last item in the range\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Image Settings\n\nThe Image Settings panel provides options for adjusting how the currently selected image is rendered, saving those settings, and sharing them with your team.\n\n\n### Managing Image Settings\n\nThe dropdown menu at the top of the Image Settings panel can be used to select and apply to the current image a previously saved collection of settings, some of which may be [shared from other members of your team](#sharing-settings-with-your-team).\n\nBy default, the list of saved settings is displayed with those you have set as [preferred](#preferred-settings) at the top, followed by the remaining options sorted by creation date in descending order. You may also set this order manually in the **Saved Settings** dialog.\n\nIf you have made any adjustments since you last saved, the dropdown menu will display _Unsaved Settings_.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To save the current image settings </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Click on the ![Ellipsis](../images/viewer-panel-ellipsis.svg) button to the right of the dropdown menu at the top of the panel to display the context menu\n\n 4. Click **Save Settings As** in the context menu\n\n 5. Type a name for these settings in the **Name** field\n\n 6. (Optional) Select **Share with Team** to make these settings available to other members of your team\n\n 7. (Optional) Select **Mark as Preferred** to keep this collection of settings at the top of the list\n\n 8. Click on the **Save** button\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   Only users with the \"View shared image settings\" permission flag can save sets of image settings.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To load a previously saved collection of image settings </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Click on the dropdown menu at the top of the panel\n\n 4. (Optional) Begin typing the name of the collection you want to apply to filter the list\n\n 5. Select one of the collections of image settings from the list\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To reset the current image settings to their default values </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Click on the ![Ellipsis](../images/viewer-panel-ellipsis.svg) button to the right of the dropdown menu at the top of the panel to display the context menu\n\n 4. Click **Apply Default Image Settings** in the context menu\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the order that image settings appear in the dropdown menu </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Click on the ![Ellipsis](../images/viewer-panel-ellipsis.svg) button to the right of the dropdown menu at the top of the panel to display the context menu\n\n 4. Click **Manage Settings** in the context menu\n\n 5. In the **Saved Settings** dialog that pops up, move an item up and down by clicking on the ![Drag](../images/viewer-panel-drag-handle.svg) handle to the left of the name and dragging it to the new position\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete a saved collection of image settings </summary>\n\n <div class=\"warning\">\n   Deleting a collection of image settings you have shared removes it for everyone on your team.\n </div>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Click on the ![Ellipsis](../images/viewer-panel-ellipsis.svg) button to the right of the dropdown menu at the top of the panel to display the context menu\n\n 4. Click **Manage Settings** in the context menu\n\n 5. [Select one or more](#multi-select) items to delete in the **Saved Settings** dialog that pops up\n\n 6. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 7. Click **Delete** in the context menu\n\n 8. Click on the **Yes** button to confirm\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Copying Image Settings\n##### [BioPharma]\n\nImage settings can be copied from one image to another, or to a folder. Copying to a folder makes the settings available to all of the images in that folder.\n\nWhen settings are copied to another image, the collection of values for black point, white point, brightness, gamma, and visible channels is added to the dropdown menu of the target image under a name of your choosing. You can also set these settings as preferred or share them with your team at the same time.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Transferring settings may not deliver the expected results if target and source files have different numbers of sub-images or channels within each sub-image. Therefore, this feature works best for files that use a similar scanning protocol.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To copy the currently applied image settings to another image </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Click on the ![Ellipsis](../images/viewer-panel-ellipsis.svg) button to the right of the dropdown menu at the top of the panel to display the context menu\n\n 4. Hover over **Copy Settings To** in the context menu to expand that menu\n\n 5. Click **Files** in the expanded menu to display the **Copy Settings To** dialog\n\n 6. Locate the image to which you wish to copy these settings\n\n 7. (Optional) Type a name for these settings in the **Name** field at the bottom left. Leaving this field blank will retain the current name\n\n 8. (Optional) Enable **Share with Team** to also [share these settings with your team](#sharing-settings-with-your-team)\n\n 9. (Optional) Enable **Mark as Preferred** to also mark these settings as [preferred](#preferred-settings)\n\n 10. Click on the **Apply** button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To copy the currently applied image settings to a folder </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Click on the ![Ellipsis](../images/viewer-panel-ellipsis.svg) button to the right of the dropdown menu at the top of the panel to display the context menu\n\n 4. Hover over **Copy Settings To** in the context menu to expand that menu\n\n 5. Click **Folder** in the expanded menu to display the **Copy Settings To** dialog\n\n 6. Locate the folder to which you wish to copy these settings\n\n 7. (Optional) Type a name for these settings in the **Name** field at the bottom left. Leaving this field blank will retain the current name\n\n 8. (Optional) Enable **Share with Team** to also [share these settings with your team](#sharing-settings-with-your-team)\n\n 9. (Optional) Enable **Mark as Preferred** to also mark these settings as [preferred](#preferred-settings)\n\n 10. (Optional) Enable **Apply Recursively** to copy these settings to all images and folders contained in subfolders (and subfolders of those folders, etc.) of the target folder instead of just the direct children\n\n 11. Click on the **Apply** button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To copy a saved collection of image settings to another image </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Click on the ![Ellipsis](../images/viewer-panel-ellipsis.svg) button to the right of the dropdown menu at the top of the panel to display the context menu\n\n 4. Click **Manage Settings** in the context menu\n\n 5. [Select one or more](#multi-select) items to copy in the **Saved Settings** dialog that pops up\n\n 6. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 7. Hover over **Copy Settings To** in the context menu to expand that menu\n\n 8. Click **Files** in the expanded menu to display the **Copy Settings To** dialog\n\n 9. Locate the image to which you wish to copy these settings\n\n 10. (Optional) Type a name for these settings in the **Name** field at the bottom left. Leaving this field blank will retain the current name\n\n 11. (Optional) Enable **Share with Team** to also [share these settings with your team](#sharing-settings-with-your-team)\n\n 12. (Optional) Enable **Mark as Preferred** to also mark these settings as [preferred](#preferred-settings)\n\n 13. Click on the **Apply** button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To copy a saved collection of image settings to a folder </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Click on the ![Ellipsis](../images/viewer-panel-ellipsis.svg) button to the right of the dropdown menu at the top of the panel to display the context menu\n\n 4. Click **Manage Settings** in the context menu\n\n 5. [Select one or more](#multi-select) items to copy in the **Saved Settings** dialog that pops up\n\n 6. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 7. Hover over **Copy Settings To** in the context menu to expand that menu\n\n 8. Click **Folder** in the expanded menu to display the **Copy Settings To** dialog\n\n 9. Locate the folder to which you wish to copy these settings\n\n 10. (Optional) Type a name for these settings in the **Name** field at the bottom left. Leaving this field blank will retain the current name\n\n 11. (Optional) Enable **Share with Team** to also [share these settings with your team](#sharing-settings-with-your-team)\n\n 12. (Optional) Enable **Mark as Preferred** to also mark these settings as [preferred](#preferred-settings)\n\n 13. (Optional) Enable **Apply Recursively** to copy these settings to all images and folders contained in subfolders (and subfolders of those folders, etc.) of the target folder instead of just the direct children\n\n 14. Click on the **Apply** button\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Applying Image Settings\n##### [BioPharma]\n\nYou also have the option to apply a set of image channel adjustments to another image, or an entire folder. Like copying, applying the settings to a folder applies them to all of the images in that folder.\n\nThe apply action will transfer channel settings from each sub-image of the source file to the same channel and sub-image of the target file (i.e., matching is performed using the sub-image and channel indices). For example, when transferring settings from \"Image A\" to \"Image B\": the values for channel index _i_ of sub-image _j_ will be transferred from \"Image A\" to the same indices in \"Image B\", for the range of _i_ and _j_ that is valid (exist) in both files.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Image channel names are not used for matching, nor are they copied.\n</div>\n\n<br />\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Transferring settings may not deliver the expected results if target and source files have different numbers of sub-images or channels within each sub-image. Therefore, this feature works best for files that use a similar scanning protocol.\n</div>\n\n<br />\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Some image formats (e.g., SVS, MRXS) have a single sub-image while other formats (e.g., CZI, VSI) may have multiple sub-images, where sub-images are specific ROIs that have been imaged within the scan area. SVS and MRXS use a single sub-image spanning the complete scan area while CZI and VSI may use multiple sub-images to sparsely image the scan area.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To apply the currently applied image settings to another image </summary>\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   This will replace any currently applied image settings for the target image, but not copy the named collection to that image's saved settings.\n </div>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Click on the ![Ellipsis](../images/viewer-panel-ellipsis.svg) button to the right of the dropdown menu at the top of the panel to display the context menu\n\n 4. Hover over **Apply Settings To** in the context menu to expand that menu\n\n 5. Click **Files** in the expanded menu to display the **Apply Settings To** dialog\n\n 6. Locate the image to which you wish to apply these settings\n\n 7. Click on the **Apply** button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To apply the currently applied image settings to a folder </summary>\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   This will replace any currently applied image settings for the target images, but not copy the named collection to those images' saved settings.\n </div>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Click on the ![Ellipsis](../images/viewer-panel-ellipsis.svg) button to the right of the dropdown menu at the top of the panel to display the context menu\n\n 4. Hover over **Apply Settings To** in the context menu to expand that menu\n\n 5. Click **Folder** in the expanded menu to display the **Apply Settings To** dialog\n\n 6. Locate the folder to which you wish to apply these settings\n\n 7. (Optional) Enable **Apply Recursively** to apply these settings to all images and folders contained in subfolders (and subfolders of those folders, etc.) of the target folder instead of just the direct children\n\n 8. Click on the **Apply** button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To apply a saved collection of image settings to another image </summary>\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   This option is not available when multiple items are selected.\n </div>\n\n <br />\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   This will replace any currently applied image settings for the target image, but not copy the named collection to that image's saved settings.\n </div>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Click on the ![Ellipsis](../images/viewer-panel-ellipsis.svg) button to the right of the dropdown menu at the top of the panel to display the context menu\n\n 4. Click **Manage Settings** in the context menu\n\n 5. In the **Saved Settings** dialog that pops up, locate the settings to apply and bring up the [context menu](#context-menu)\n\n 6. Hover over **Apply Settings To** in the context menu to expand that menu\n\n 7. Click **Files** in the expanded menu to display the **Apply Settings To** dialog\n\n 8. Locate the image to which you wish to apply these settings\n\n 9. Click on the **Apply** button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To apply a saved collection of image settings to a folder </summary>\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   This option is not available when multiple items are selected.\n </div>\n\n <br />\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   This will replace any currently applied image settings for the target images, but not copy the named collection to those images' saved settings.\n </div>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Click on the ![Ellipsis](../images/viewer-panel-ellipsis.svg) button to the right of the dropdown menu at the top of the panel to display the context menu\n\n 4. Click **Manage Settings** in the context menu\n\n 5. In the **Saved Settings** dialog that pops up, locate the settings to apply and bring up the [context menu](#context-menu)\n\n 6. Hover over **Apply Settings To** in the context menu to expand that menu\n\n 7. Click **Folder** in the expanded menu to display the **Apply Settings To** dialog\n\n 8. Locate the folder to which you wish to apply these settings\n\n 9. (Optional) Enable **Apply Recursively** to apply these settings to all images and folders contained in subfolders (and subfolders of those folders, etc.) of the target folder instead of just the direct children\n\n 10. Click on the **Apply** button\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Preferred Settings\n\nIn order to make a previously saved collection of image settings more readily available, you can mark it as preferred. By default, preferred image settings are listed first in the dropdown menu for quick access. These preferred saved settings are also easily identified by the ![Preferred](../images/viewer-panel-preferred.svg) icon next to their name in both the dropdown menu and **Saved Settings** dialog.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Only users with the \"Share image settings\" permission flag are able to change the preferred status of image settings.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle the preferred status of the currently applied image settings </summary>\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   Image settings must be saved before they can be set as preferred.\n </div>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Click on the ![Ellipsis](../images/viewer-panel-ellipsis.svg) button to the right of the dropdown menu at the top of the panel to display the context menu\n\n 4. Click **Set as Preferred**/**Unset as Preferred** in the context menu to toggle the preferred status of these settings\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To set a saved collection of image settings as preferred </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Click on the ![Ellipsis](../images/viewer-panel-ellipsis.svg) button to the right of the dropdown menu at the top of the panel to display the context menu\n\n 4. Click **Manage Settings** in the context menu\n\n 5. In the **Saved Settings** dialog that pops up, locate the desired item and bring up the [context menu](#context-menu)\n\n 6. Click **Set as Preferred**/**Unset as Preferred** in the context menu to toggle the preferred status of these settings\n\n</details>\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Marking a collection of settings as preferred applies for all team members if the collection is shared.\n</div>\n\n\n### Sharing Settings With Your Team\n\nOnce saved, a collection of image settings can be shared with other users on your team. This allows multiple people to review an image with consistent adjustments applied. And when combined with the ability to apply these settings to a folder, this provides a convenient method of maintaining consistency across an entire data set.\n\nShared image settings can be identified by the ![Shared](../images/viewer-panel-share.svg) icon next to their name in both the dropdown menu and **Saved Settings** dialog. Additionally, the avatar of the user who saved these settings is displayed to the left of the entry in these listings. Hovering over the avatar shows you the user's name.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Only users with the \"Share image settings\" permission flag are able to share their private settings with their team.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To share the currently applied image settings with your team </summary>\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   Image settings must be saved before they can be shared.\n </div>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Click on the ![Ellipsis](../images/viewer-panel-ellipsis.svg) button to the right of the dropdown menu at the top of the panel to display the context menu\n\n 4. Click **Share with Team/Unshare with Team** in the context menu to toggle whether or not the current settings are shared with your team\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To share a saved collection of image settings with your team </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Click on the ![Ellipsis](../images/viewer-panel-ellipsis.svg) button to the right of the dropdown menu at the top of the panel to display the context menu\n\n 4. Click **Manage Settings** in the context menu\n\n 5. In the **Saved Settings** dialog that pops up, locate the desired item and bring up the [context menu](#context-menu)\n\n 6. Click **Share with Team/Unshare with Team** in the context menu to toggle whether or not the current settings are shared with your team\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To see sharing details for a collection of image settings </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Click on the dropdown menu at the top of the panel\n\n 4. Hover over the ![Shared](../images/viewer-panel-share.svg) icon next to a name to show a tooltip which includes the user who shared it and the date it was created\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   The share icon in the <b>Saved Settings</b> dialog can also be used in this way.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Histogram\n\nA histogram provides a visual representation of the frequency of intensity values in an image. The histogram in the Viewer plots a separate line for each channel of a multi-channel image, using the same color as the [pseudocolor](#pseudocolor) set in the [Channel List](#channel-list). The horizontal axis of the histogram represents the intensity values and the vertical axis represents the number of pixels of that intensity.\n\nThe histogram can be used to make images more readable to users by allowing them to adjust values such as black point, white point, brightness, and gamma for one or more channels at a time.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the channel group </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Select an option from the **Channel Group** dropdown menu. See [Channel Group](#channel-group) for more details\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   The channel group determines which channels are affected by histogram adjustments, not which channels are displayed. To change the channels which are plotted in the histogram, see <b>Channels Displayed</b> in the <a href=\"#histogram-options\">Histogram Options</a> dialog.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To see values in the histogram </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Hover over any location in the histogram to display a crosshair with the intensity value connected to the vertical segment and the count of pixels with that value connected to the horizontal segment\n\n    When the cursor is hovering over a line representing a channel, that channel name and color is also displayed\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   Clicking an image channel line in the histogram highlights the area under the plotted line with the same color.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To see the intensity range of the currently displayed histogram </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Hover over the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) icon below the histogram to show a tooltip with the currently displayed intensity range\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Histogram Options\n\nThe settings in the **Histogram Options** dialog are used to modify how the histogram in the Image Settings panel is rendered.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the histogram rendering options </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Click on the ![Histogram Options](../images/viewer-panel-chart.svg) button at the top right corner of the Image Settings panel to display the **Histogram Options** dialog\n\n 4. Select an option from the **Channels Displayed** dropdown menu to change which image channels are plotted in the histogram:\n    - **All**: all channels are plotted\n    - **Visible**: only plot the channels which are currently visible. See [Channel List](#channel-list) for more details\n\n    <div class=\"info\"><div>\n      The <b>Channels Displayed</b> option only controls which image channels are plotted in the histogram &mdash; it does not affect which channels are modified by adjustments to the histogram. To change which channels are modified, see <a href=\"#channel-group\">Channel Group</a> in the <b>Channel Settings</b> dialog.\n    </div></div>\n\n 5. Select an option from the **Vertical Axis** dropdown menu to change the scale used for the histogram's vertical axis: either a **Linear Scale** or a **Logarithmic Scale**\n\n 6. Select an option from the **Horizontal Axis** dropdown menu to change the effective width of the histogram (i.e., the range of values for the horizontal axis):\n    - **16-bit**: Up to 2<sup>16</sup> (65,536) different values\n    - **14-bit**: Up to 2<sup>14</sup> (16,384) different values\n    - **12-bit**: Up to 2<sup>12</sup> (4,096) different values\n    - **10-bit**: Up to 2<sup>10</sup> (1,024) different values\n    - **8-bit**: Up to 2<sup>8</sup> (256) different values\n    - **Auto Range**: automatically attempt to set the width to a value that fully contains the image intensity range\n\n    <div class=\"info\"><div>\n      A <img src=\"../images/viewer-panel-alert.svg\" alt=\"Warning\" /> icon is shown to the left of the <img src=\"../images/viewer-panel-chart.svg\" alt=\"Histogram Options\" /> button in the Image Settings panel when the intensity range of the image is greater than the range selected for the horizontal axis.\n    </div></div>\n\n 7. Adjust the **Show Gridlines** toggle to show or hide a grid in the background of the histogram\n\n 8. Click on the **X** button at the top right of the **Histogram Options** dialog to close it\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   All changes are saved automatically.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Channel Settings\n\nThe channel settings can be used to adjust how groups of image channels are rendered in the Viewer.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the channel settings </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Click on the ![Channel Settings](../images/viewer-panel-options.svg) button to the right of the **Channel Group** dropdown menu to display the **Channel Settings** dialog\n\n 4. Select the appropriate [channel group](#channel-group)\n\n 5. Adjust the [black and white points](#black-and-white-points)\n\n 6. Adjust the [brightness](#brightness)\n\n 7. Adjust the [gamma](#gamma)\n\n 8. (Optional) Undo all changes you have made since opening this dialog by clicking on the **Undo All** button\n\n 9. Click on the **X** button at the top right of the **Channel Settings** dialog to close it\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   All changes are saved automatically.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  A <img src=\"../images/varies-number.svg\" alt=\"Varies Number\" /> icon in a value field or a <img src=\"../images/varies-percent.svg\" alt=\"Varies Percent\" /> icon in a percentile field indicates that multiple image channels in the currently selected group have been adjusted independently. Hover over the icon to show a tooltip with the range of values in the channel group.\n</div></div>\n\n#### Channel Group\n\nThe channel group selection determines which image channels are affected by adjustments to the histogram. This allows multiple related channels to be manipulated at the same time, while still providing the control to make adjustments to individual channels if needed.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  A <img src=\"../images/viewer-panel-alert.svg\" alt=\"Warning\" /> icon is shown to the right of the dropdown menu if any of the channels included in the channel group are not currently visible in the histogram. Click on the icon to open the <a href=\"#histogram-options\">Histogram Options</a> dialog to change the <b>Channels Displayed</b>.\n</div></div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change which image channel group is affected by adjustments to the histogram </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Select an option from the **Channel Group** dropdown:\n    - **All**: All image channels\n    - **Visible**: Only those image channels which are visible in the Viewer. See [Channel Visibility](#channel-visibility) for more details on toggling the visibility of individual channels\n    - **Selected**: Only those image channels which are currently selected in the [Channel List](#channel-list)\n    - **(Names)**: The remaining items in the dropdown menu refer to the names of image channels in the current image. All image channels which share the name are affected.\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   The <b>Channel Group</b> dropdown menu is also available in the <a href=\"#channel-settings\">Channel Settings</a> dialog.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n#### Black and White Points\n\nYou can adjust the rendered dynamic range of an image channel (or group of channels) by setting the **Black Point** and **White Point** values. These define the lowest intensity to display &mdash; below which is rendered as zero (the black point) &mdash; and the highest intensity to display &mdash; above which is rendered as the maximum value (the white point). The remaining intensity values are scaled evenly between these two points, improving contrast.\n\nThe valid range for black and white point values is [`0`, `(2 ^ (bits per channel) - 1)`] &mdash; the same range as the horizontal axis of the histogram. The number of bits per channel can be adjusted under **Horizontal Axis** in the [Histogram Options](#histogram-options) dialog.\n\nA percentile value sets the black or white point value to exclude the respective intensity values from the left- or right-hand side of the channel histogram. For example:\n- A 99.99% threshold for white point sets the white point to a value that eliminates 0.01% of pixels from the right-hand side of the histogram\n- A 2% threshold for black point sets the black point to a value that eliminates 2% of pixels from the left-hand side of the histogram\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Changing either the value or the percentile value for these settings automatically updates the other.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To manually adjust the black and white points for the current channel group </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Adjust the black point of the current [channel group](#channel-group) by clicking on the ![Arrow Up Handle](../images/viewer-panel-arrow-up-handle.svg)/![Arrow Up Handle Dashed](../images/viewer-panel-arrow-up-handle-dashed.svg) handle to the bottom left of the histogram and dragging it to the right or left\n\n 4. Adjust the white point of the current [channel group](#channel-group) by clicking on the ![Arrow Up Handle](../images/viewer-panel-arrow-up-handle.svg)/![Arrow Up Handle Dashed](../images/viewer-panel-arrow-up-handle-dashed.svg) handle to the bottom right of the histogram and dragging it to the left or right\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   The dashed handle indicates that the black or white points of multiple channels in the group have been adjusted independently and have differing values.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To set the black and white points for an image channel group </summary>\n\n 1. In the **Channel Settings** dialog, select the appropriate [channel group](#channel-group)\n\n 2. Set either the **Black Point** and **White Point** values or their percentile values. Both fields accept numbers with 2 decimal points of precision (e.g., differences as small as 0.01)\n\n 3. (Optional) Click on the ![Undo](../images/viewer-panel-undo.svg) button to the right of the fields to undo changes you have made to the black or white points since opening the **Channel Settings** dialog\n\n 4. Click on the **X** button at the top right of the **Channel Settings** dialog to close it\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   All changes are saved automatically.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To automatically configure the black and white points for an image channel group </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Select the appropriate option from the [Channel Group](#channel-group) dropdown\n\n 4. Click on the **Best Fit** button below the histogram. This button is also available in the [Channel Settings](#channel-settings) dialog below the black and white point fields\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   <b>Best Fit</b> attempts to set the black and white points for each channel in the group individually, using available information in the following order of precedence:<br />\n   <ol>\n     <li>The minimum and maximum pixel values derived from the channel histogram</li>\n     <li>The minimum and maximum pixel values suggested in the image file</li>\n     <li>The minimum and maximum values supported by the pixel type of each channel</li>\n   </ol>\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To reset the black and white points for an image channel group </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Select the appropriate option from the [Channel Group](#channel-group) dropdown\n\n 4. Click on the **Reset** button below the histogram. This button is also available in the [Channel Settings](#channel-settings) dialog below the black and white point fields\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   The default values are determined from the following information, in order of precedence:\n   <ol>\n     <li>The minimum and maximum pixel values suggested in the image file</li>\n     <li>The minimum and maximum values supported by the pixel type of each channel</li>\n   </ol>\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To set the black and white points to their respective minimum and maximum values for an image channel group </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Settings panel\n\n 3. Select the appropriate option from the [Channel Group](#channel-group) dropdown\n\n 4. Click on the **Min/Max** button below the histogram. This button is also available in the [Channel Settings](#channel-settings) dialog below the black and white point fields\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   This sets the black and white points to the minimum and maximum values of the histogram's current horizontal axis, respectively.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n#### Brightness\n\nThe **Brightness** setting allows you to adjust the brightness of an image by applying an offset to the intensity value of all the pixels of the image. A positive value increases the brightness and a negative value decreases it. This offset is applied linearly (i.e., it is applied equally to all pixels in the image).\n\nThe valid range of values for the brightness setting is [`-1.0`, `1.0`]. This represents a linear scale from `-(2 ^ (bits per channel) -1 )` to `+(2 ^ (bits per channel) -1 )`, with the default value being `0` (no change applied).\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To set the brightness for an image channel group </summary>\n\n 1. In the **Channel Settings** dialog, select the appropriate [channel group](#channel-group)\n\n 2. Adjust the **Brightness** slider to the desired value; or\n\n 3. Click on the number to the right of the slider and type the desired value directly. This field accepts numbers with 2 decimal points of precision (e.g., differences as small as 0.01)\n\n 4. (Optional) Click on the ![Undo](../images/viewer-panel-undo.svg) button to the right of the field to undo changes you have made to the brightness since opening the **Channel Settings** dialog\n\n 5. Click on the **X** button at the top right of the **Channel Settings** dialog to close it\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   All changes are saved automatically.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n#### Gamma\n\nThe **Gamma** value allows you to apply gamma correction &mdash; a contrast enhancing transform that can be used to improve visualization of poorly exposed images. Unlike the [brightness](#brightness) setting, gamma correction is a nonlinear transform that alters image intensities according to `I’ = Imax (I / Imax)^gamma`. Supported values are in the range of [`0.1`, `3.0`].\n\n![Gamma Correction Formula](../images/gamma-correction-formula.png)\n\nThe gamma correction function is visualized in the histogram as a gray line or curve. If gamma values have been set independently for multiple image channels in the group currently represented in the histogram, then the two curves representing the highest and lowest values are plotted with the area between them highlighted.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To set the gamma value for an image channel group </summary>\n\n 1. In the **Channel Settings** dialog, select the appropriate [channel group](#channel-group)\n\n 2. Adjust the **Gamma** slider to the desired value; or\n\n 3. Click on the number to the right of the slider and type the desired value directly. This field accepts numbers with 1 decimal point of precision (e.g., differences as small as 0.1)\n\n 4. (Optional) Click on the ![Undo](../images/viewer-panel-undo.svg) button to the right of the field to undo changes you have made to the gamma since opening the **Channel Settings** dialog\n\n 5. Click on the **X** button at the top right of the **Channel Settings** dialog to close it\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   All changes are saved automatically.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To use a preset gamma value for an image channel group </summary>\n\n 1. In the **Channel Settings** dialog, select the appropriate [channel group](#channel-group)\n\n 2. Click on a button below the **Gamma** slider to use its preset value:\n    - **0.45**: The inverse of a common gamma value used by monitors (can be expressed as `1 / 2.2`)\n    - **1**: The default value\n    - **2.2**: A common gamma value used by monitors\n\n 3. (Optional) Click on the ![Undo](../images/viewer-panel-undo.svg) button to the right of the field to undo changes you have made to the gamma since opening the **Channel Settings** dialog\n\n 4. Click on the **X** button at the top right of the **Channel Settings** dialog to close it\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Channel List\n\nThe channel list provides controls for toggling the visibility and color of each channel independently or in groups.\n\nThe list shows all sub-images for the current image, numbered starting at zero (`0`). Each sub-image may have zero or more image channels.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  The context menu can also be accessed by clicking on <b>x Channels Selected</b> which appears to the right of <b>Channel List</b>.\n</div></div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To filter the channel list </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click in the search box indicated by the ![Magnifying Glass](../images/viewer-panel-search.svg) icon and the text \"Filter by channel name...\"\n\n 4. Type in all or part of a channel name; only the items matching this text will be displayed in the list below\n\n</details>\n\n### Channel Visibility\n\nThe visibility of each channel for non-RGB images or sub-images can be controlled independently.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle the visibility of an image channel or sub-image </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Hover over the channel or sub-image you wish to display or hide in the **Channel List**\n\n 4. Click on the ![Eye](../images/viewer-panel-eye.svg)/![Eye Off](../images/viewer-panel-eye-off.svg) icon to the right of the channel or sub-image name to toggle its visibility\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   Sub-images can be distinguished from image channels because all sub-images have the same name as the image file itself and no color assigned.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle the visibility of all image channels in a sub-image </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the sub-image name in the **Channel List** to bring up its context menu\n\n 4. Click **Show All Channels** or **Hide All Channels** in the context menu\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle the visibility of a specific selection of image channels </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. [Select one or more](#multi-select) image channels in the **Channel List**\n\n 4. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 5. Click **Show Selected** or **Hide Selected** in the context menu\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To hide all image channels except a specific selection </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. [Select one or more](#multi-select) image channels in the **Channel List**\n\n 4. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 5. Click **Show Selected Only** in the context menu\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle the visibility of all image channels of a certain type </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for a channel in the **Channel List**\n\n 4. Click **Show All <_Name_>** or **Hide All <_Name_>** in the context menu\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   All image channels with the same name as the selected item are affected.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Image Channel Properties\n\n#### Name\n\nEach image channel has a name. These are originally set from the image metadata, but can be changed. By setting multiple channels to the same name, they can be grouped and acted upon as one.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To rename an image channel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the name of the channel in the **Channel List**\n\n 4. Type a new name for the channel\n\n 5. Press the **Enter** key or click away from the textbox to save your changes\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To rename several image channels at once </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. [Select one or more](#multi-select) image channels in the **Channel List**\n\n 4. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 5. Click **Rename** in the context menu\n\n 6. In the **Rename Channel** dialog that pops up, type a new name for the channels\n\n 7. Click on the **Apply** button or press the **Enter** key to save. To discard your changes, click on the **Cancel** button or press the **Escape** key\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   All of the selected channels will share the new name.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n#### Pseudocolor\n\nEach channel in a multi-channel image is displayed with a pseudocolor, which can be changed to any RGB value.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the pseudocolor of an image channel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the colored square next to the channel name in the **Channel List** to open the color palette\n\n 4. In the **Edit Color** dialog that pops up, select a color using the palette\n\n 5. Click on the **X** button at the top right of the dialog to close it\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   The new color is saved automatically. Click on the <b>Undo Changes</b> button to revert the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the pseudocolor of several image channels at once </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. [Select one or more](#multi-select) image channels in the **Channel List**\n\n 4. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 5. Click **Edit Color** in the context menu\n\n 6. In the **Edit Color** dialog that pops up, select a color using the palette\n\n 7. Click on the **X** button at the top right of the dialog to close it\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   The new color is saved automatically and will apply to all of the selected channels. Click on the <b>Undo Changes</b> button to revert the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n#### Restoring Default Settings\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To reset an image channel name to its default value </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Locate the channel in the **Channel List**\n\n 4. Click on the ![Undo](../images/viewer-panel-undo.svg) icon to the right of the channel name\n\n 5. Click **Restore Name to Default** in the context menu\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To reset several image channel names </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. [Select one or more](#multi-select) image channels in the **Channel List**\n\n 4. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 5. Click **Restore Names to Default** in the context menu\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To reset the pseudocolor of an image channel to its default value </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Locate the channel in the **Channel List**\n\n 4. Click on the ![Undo](../images/viewer-panel-undo.svg) icon to the right of the channel name\n\n 5. Click **Restore Color to Default** in the context menu\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To reset the pseudocolor of several image channels </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. [Select one or more](#multi-select) image channels in the **Channel List**\n\n 4. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 5. Click **Restore Colors to Default** in the context menu\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To reset both the name and color of an image channel to their default values </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Locate the channel in the **Channel List**\n\n 4. Click on the ![Undo](../images/viewer-panel-undo.svg) icon to the right of the channel name\n\n 5. Click **Restore All to Default** in the context menu\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To reset both the name and color of several image channels to their default values </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. [Select one or more](#multi-select) image channels in the **Channel List**\n\n 4. Bring up the [context menu](#context-menu) for the item (or items)\n\n 5. Click **Restore All to Default** in the context menu\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Pixel Value Reporting\n\nIt is possible to enable the display of the value for all visible channels in a multispectral image. When enabled, the intensity of the pixel below the cursor is displayed for each image channel, to the right of its name, in the [Channel List](#channel-list).\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To enable or disable pixel value reporting </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Image Settings](../images/viewer-nav-options.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the ![Enable pixel value report](../images/viewer-panel-numbers.svg) button to the right of **Channel List** to enable the display of pixel values; or\n\n 4. Click on the ![Disable pixel value report](../images/viewer-panel-numbers-inverted.svg) button to disable the feature\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/viewer/image-settings-panel"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Image Settings (Legacy)","description":"image settings (legacy)"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Image Settings (Legacy)\ndescription: image settings (legacy)\norder: 40\nsection: Viewer\n---\n\n\n# Image Settings (Legacy)\n\n<br />\n\nThe Image Settings dialog can be used to alter the rendering of multi-channel images in the Viewer.\n\n<div class=\"warning\"><div>\n  The Image Settings dialog has been replaced with the <a href=\"../image-settings-panel/\">Image Settings Panel</a>, which provides all of the same functionality as well as features not found in this legacy dialog.\n</div></div>\n\n<br />\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Image settings are saved for each user individually. Changes made by one user are not reflected when another user opens the same image.\n</div>\n\n## Sub-images\n\nThe visibility of [sub-images](/docs/viewer/overview/#sub-images) can be set individually.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To adjust the visibility of sub-images </summary>\n\n 1. From within the Viewer, click on the ![Layers](../images/viewer-layers.svg) button at the bottom left of the Viewer to reveal the Image Settings dialog\n\n 2. Click on the ![Eye](../images/viewer-panel-eye.svg) icon to toggle the visibility of any sub-image\n\n 3. Close the Image Settings dialog by clicking on the **X** button at the top right corner of the popup dialog\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   Sub-images can be distinguished from image channels because all sub-images have the same name as the image file itself.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Channel Visibility\n\nThe visibility of each channel for non-RGB images or sub-images can be controlled independently. Once these settings are adjusted, they will be saved as preferences for the currently logged-in user.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To adjust the visibility of an image channel </summary>\n\n 1. From within the Viewer, click on the ![Layers](../images/viewer-layers.svg) button at the bottom left of the Viewer to reveal the Image Settings dialog\n\n 2. Click on the ![Eye](../images/viewer-panel-eye.svg) icon to toggle the visibility of any channel\n\n 3. Close the Image Settings dialog by clicking on the **X** button at the top right corner of the popup dialog\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   Sub-images can be distinguished from image channels because all sub-images have the same name as the image file itself.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Channel Color Corrections\n\nThere are a number of color correction options available that can be used to alter how a multi-channel image renders on-screen. The values that are shown by default are obtained from the image file itself, if available. Once these settings are adjusted, they will be saved as preferences for the currently logged-in user.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Color correction cannot be used on interlaced pixel types (e.g., RGB pixel type commonly used for brightfield images).\n</div>\n\n<br />\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  The channels for each <a href=\"#sub-images\">sub-image</a> can be adjusted independently.\n</div></div>\n\n\n### Pseudocolor\n\nThe default color of each channel can be modified to any RGB value.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the pseudocolor of a channel </summary>\n\n 1. From within the Viewer, click on the ![Layers](../images/viewer-layers.svg) button at the bottom left of the Viewer to reveal the Image Settings dialog\n\n 2. Click on the colored square next to the channel name to open the color palette\n\n 3. Select a color in the palette\n\n 4. Close the Image Settings dialog by clicking on the **X** button at the top right corner of the popup dialog\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To reset the pseudocolor of a channel to its default value </summary>\n\n 1. From within the Viewer, click on the ![Layers](../images/viewer-layers.svg) button at the bottom left of the Viewer to reveal the Image Settings dialog\n\n 2. Click on the ![Undo](../images/viewer-panel-undo.svg) button next to the channel name\n\n 3. Close the Image Settings dialog by clicking on the **X** button at the top right corner of the popup dialog\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Histogram Corrections\n\nThough the histogram is not visible, its properties for each image channel can be adjusted using the following parameters:\n\n- White Point, in the range [0.0, 1.0], is the saturation point on the RHS of the histogram\n- Black Point, in the range [0.0, 1.0], is the saturation point on the LHS of the histogram\n- Gamma, in the range [-2.0, 2.0], is the gamma correction factor\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To adjust the histogram </summary>\n\n 1. From within the Viewer, click on the ![Layers](../images/viewer-layers.svg) button at the bottom left of the Viewer to reveal the Image Settings dialog\n\n 2. Click on the channel name to open a panel of sliders\n\n 3. Adjust any of the sliders\n\n 4. Close the Image Settings dialog by clicking on the **X** button at the top right corner of the popup dialog\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To reset the histogram to its default value </summary>\n\n 1. From within the Viewer, click on the ![Layers](../images/viewer-layers.svg) button at the bottom left of the Viewer to reveal the Image Settings dialog\n\n 2. Click on the channel name to open a panel of sliders\n\n 3. Click on the ![Undo](../images/viewer-panel-undo.svg) button next to any of the histogram values\n\n 4. Close the Image Settings dialog by clicking on the **X** button at the top right corner of the popup dialog\n\n</details>\n\n\n#### Auto Scale\n\nThe \"Auto Scale\" feature automatically configures the black and white points of multispectral images based on the dynamic range of each channel. This can be used to improve contrast and establish baseline values for the black and white points quickly.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  This feature is only available for multispectral images.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To automatically configure the black and white points for a single channel </summary>\n\n 1. From within the Viewer, click on the ![Layers](../images/viewer-layers.svg) button at the bottom left of the Viewer to reveal the Image Settings dialog\n\n 2. Click on the channel name to open a panel of sliders\n\n 3. Click on the **Auto Scale** button below the sliders\n\n 4. Close the Image Settings dialog by clicking on the **X** button at the top right corner of the popup dialog\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To automatically configure the black and white points for all channels </summary>\n\n 1. From within the Viewer, click on the ![Layers](../images/viewer-layers.svg) button at the bottom left of the Viewer to reveal the Image Settings dialog\n\n 2. Click on the **Auto Scale** button at the bottom of the dialog\n\n 3. Close the Image Settings dialog by clicking on the **X** button at the top right corner of the popup dialog\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To reset all black and white points to their default values </summary>\n\n 1. From within the Viewer, click on the ![Layers](../images/viewer-layers.svg) button at the bottom left of the Viewer to reveal the Image Settings dialog\n\n 2. Click on the **Reset Scale** button at the bottom of the dialog\n\n 3. Close the Image Settings dialog by clicking on the **X** button at the top right corner of the popup dialog\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/viewer/image-settings"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"","description":null},"rawBody":"---\nredirect: /docs/viewer/overview/\n---\n","slug":"docs/viewer/"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Overlays Panel","description":"overlays panel"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Overlays Panel\ndescription: overlays panel\norder: 21\nsection: Viewer\n---\n\n\n# Overlays Panel\n\n<br />\n\nThe overlay feature allows one or more images to be attached to an image in the Repository. This feature has been designed for visualizing image analysis results such as segmentation results.\n\nWhen multiple overlays are attached to an image, the z-position of each overlay in the stack is determined by the position of the overlay in the Overlays panel. The first entry in the panel is visually on the bottom of the stack and subsequent entries are positioned higher in the stack. The image that overlays are attached to is positioned visually below all of the overlays.\n\n\n## Attaching Overlays\n\nOverlays are by default positioned at the top left corner of the image they have been attached to, at the base resolution layer. The initial height and width of the overlay will match the overlay's base resolution layer (i.e., pixel scaling of the overlay is not considered). An overlay image can be repositioned using the [Transform](#overlay-transform) properties.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  <a href=\"../overview/#sub-images\">Sub-images</a> may complicate overlay positioning for the following reasons: 1) if the image has multiple sub-images, the overlay’s position is determined relative to the first sub-image, at the base resolution layer; and 2) if the overlay contains multiple sub-images, only the first sub-image is viewable.\n</div></div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Attach an overlay using drag and drop </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Overlays](../images/viewer-nav-layers.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Upload an image from your computer by dragging a [supported image](/docs/overview/supported-formats/#supported-image-formats) file onto the sidebar\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Attach an overlay using the file selection dialog </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Overlays](../images/viewer-nav-layers.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the **+** button at the top of the sidebar to reveal the **Add image overlay** dialog\n\n 3. Click in the blue box to activate the file selection dialog or simply drag an image into the blue box\n\n 4. Click on the **Start upload** button\n\n 5. Click on the **X** button at the top right of the popup dialog or anywhere outside of the dialog box to close it\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Deleting Overlays\n\nOverlays can be deleted from the Overlays panel.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete an overlay from the Overlays panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Overlays](../images/viewer-nav-layers.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Identify the overlay entry to be modified\n\n 4. Click on the ![Delete](../images/viewer-panel-trash.svg) button\n\n 5. Click on the **OK** button to confirm\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Overlay Properties\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  If you attempt to modify an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n</div></div>\n\n### Overlay Name\n\nThe name is a single line text field that supports unicode characters.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To rename an overlay from the Overlays panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Overlays](../images/viewer-nav-layers.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Identify the overlay entry to be modified\n\n 4. Click on the name of the entry\n\n 5. Provide a name or edit the existing text\n\n 6. Press the **Enter** key or click away from the textbox to save your changes\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Overlay Visibility\n\nOverlays are visible on the image by default once attached.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the visibility of individual overlays </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Overlays](../images/viewer-nav-layers.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Identify the overlay entry to be modified\n\n 4. Click on the ![Eye](../images/viewer-panel-eye.svg) button to toggle visibility\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the visibility of all overlays </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Overlays](../images/viewer-nav-layers.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the ![Eye](../images/viewer-panel-eye.svg) button at the top right corner of the Overlays panel to toggle visibility for all overlays\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Overlay Transform\n\nBy default, overlays are positioned at the origin (top left corner of the image's first sub-image's base resolution layer). If an uploaded overlay is meant to span a different region of interest, an appropriate transform may be defined.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To reposition an overlay </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Overlays](../images/viewer-nav-layers.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the ![Show Transformation](../images/viewer-panel-transform.svg) button next to an entry name in the panel to open the transform controls\n\n 4. Perform one of the following:\n    1. Set the X and Y values to specify the coordinates of the top left corner (with respect to the image) and set the W (width) and H (height) values to specify the extent of the overlay, or\n    2. Click on the ![Scale to Fit](../images/viewer-panel-scale.svg) button to scale the overlay so that it fits the image width\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   All values should be provided in pixel coordinates relative to the base resolution level of the image\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n### Transform Limitations\n\nTransform operations may be limited for a given overlay depending on how it was generated.\n\n- Manually created overlays can be moved and resized\n- Overlays imported from [Indica Labs HALO](/docs/integrations/halo-integration/) cannot be moved or resized\n- [Visiopharm](/docs/integrations/visiopharm-integration/) MLD files converted to overlays can be moved, however the point of origin is the default position of the overlay and not the top left corner\n  - These overlays can also be resized, but doing so may affect their position\n- Heatmap overlays imported from Visiopharm can be moved and resized.\n\n\n## Overlay Rendering\n\nOverlays have a number of properties that define how they are rendered. These properties are shared for all team members and therefore, changes made by any user will be visible to other users.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the opacity of an overlay </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Overlays](../images/viewer-nav-layers.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Adjust the opacity slider in the range of [0, 100] for an entry in the Overlays panel\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To add pseudocolor to an overlay </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Overlays](../images/viewer-nav-layers.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the **+ Add Pseudocolor** button for an entry in the Overlays panel\n\n 3. (Optional) Click on the color block to open the color palette and select a color from the palette\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To remove pseudocolor from an overlay </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Overlays](../images/viewer-nav-layers.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the **x Remove** button next to the color block of an entry in the Overlays panel (only available if a pseudocolor has been previously defined)\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the composite operation for an overlay </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Overlays](../images/viewer-nav-layers.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Select a composite mode from the dropdown menu for an entry in the Overlays panel. See [compositing operations](#compositing-operations) for more details. The default composite operation is \"Normal\"\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Compositing Operations\n\nVarious compositing techniques are available for rendering overlaid images. These are a number of other modes that may be helpful depending on the types of images and desired effects.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> Overlay composition modes </summary>\n\n | Composite mode    | Description |\n | ----------------- | ------------- |\n | Normal            | Draw this image on top of existing content. |\n | Source In         | Draw this image only where it overlaps existing content. Non-overlapping areas are made transparent. |\n | Source Out        | Draw this image only where it doesn’t overlap existing content. |\n | Source Atop       | Draw this image only where it overlaps existing content. |\n | Destination Over  | Draw this image behind existing content. |\n | Destination In    | Draw existing content only where it overlaps this image. Non-overlapping areas are made transparent. |\n | Destination Out   | Draw existing content only where it does not overlap this image. |\n | Destination Atop  | Draw existing content only where it overlaps this image. This image is drawn behind existing content. |\n | Lighter           | Add color values of this image with the color values of the existing content. |\n | Copy              | Replace the existing content with this image. |\n | XOR               | This image and existing content are drawn only where there is no overlap. |\n | Multiply          | Multiply the color values of this image with the color values of existing content. |\n | Screen            | Color values of this image and the existing content are inverted, multiplied, then inverted again. |\n | Overlay           | A combination of multiply and screen. |\n | Hard Light        | Like overlay, but with the top and bottom layers swapped. |\n | Soft Light        | A softer version of hard light. |\n | Darken            | Retain the darkest pixel between this image and the existing content. |\n | Color Dodge       | Divide the color values of the existing content by the inverted color values of this image. |\n | Color Burn        | Divide the inverted color values of the existing content by the color values of this image, and then invert the result. |\n | Difference        | Subtract the color values of this image from the color values of the existing content and compute the absolute value. |\n | Exclusion         | Like difference, but with lower contrast. |\n | Hue               | Preserve the luma and chroma of the existing content while adopting the hue of this image. |\n | Saturation        | Preserve the luma and hue of the existing content while adopting the chroma of this image. |\n | Color             | Preserve the luma of the existing content while adopting the hue and chroma of this image. |\n | Luminosity        | Preserve the hue and chroma of the existing content while adopting the luma of this image. |\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/viewer/overlays"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Image Information Panel","description":"image information panel"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Image Information Panel\ndescription: image information panel\norder: 17\nsection: Viewer\n---\n\n\n# Image Information Panel\n\n<br />\n\nThe Image Information panel provides information about the currently open file. In this panel, you can find the slide label (if available) as well as any metadata fields, tags and snapshots associated with the file.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle the visibility of the Image Information panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Image Information panel\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To resize the Image Information panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click and drag the right border of the panel to resize it\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Image (Slide) Label\n\nIf a slide label is available, it will be displayed at the top of the Image Information panel.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Slide label may contain PI and as such, the label is hidden for users that do not have the \"View Protected Information\" permission flag.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To view the slide label </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To rotate the slide label </summary>\n\n 1. Hover over the label with the mouse\n\n 2. Click on the ![Rotate](../images/viewer-toolbar-rotate.svg) button until the desired orientation is achieved\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Editing Image Tags\n\nAll the tags currently associated with the file will be listed in the \"Tag\" section of the Image Information panel.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To add a tag </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the field showing the current tags (or **Add a tag...** if none have been added)\n\n 4. (Optional) Type a few letters to filter the list of tags\n\n 5. Select a tag from the dropdown menu\n\n 6. (Optional) To create a new tag, click on the **+ New tag** button after typing a new tag name\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To remove an existing tag </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the **X** button of the relevant tag\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Image Description\n\nA description can be added to an image which will be visible to all users.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To edit image description </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the current description text (or **Add Description** if nothing has yet been written). This is directly below the tag section\n\n 4. Type a description of the image\n\n 5. Press **Enter** key or click anywhere else in the Viewer when done to save your changes\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to modify an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Image Metadata and Fields\n\nAll of the metadata fields associated with the file are listed in the Image Information panel. You can click on a Custom Field metadata value to jump to a search using that criteria.\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Metadata fields that are marked with \"May contain PI\" will be hidden (field value will be \"Anonymized\") for users that do not have the \"View Protected Information\" permission.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To edit image metadata </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the **Edit Metadata** button\n\n 4. (Optional) You can change the name of the image in the **Image Name** field\n\n 5. (Optional) Click on the **Add Fields** dropdown menu and select a field\n\n 6. (Optional) Change the value(s) of the listed field(s) accordingly, or clear the value by clicking on the gray **X** inside the field at the right-hand side\n\n 7. (Optional) Click on the red **X** button at the far right-hand side, outside of a field, to remove it from the item\n\n 8. Click on the **Update** button to save your changes, or click on the **X** button at the top right corner of the popup dialog to cancel\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to modify an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Downloading an Image\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Only users with the \"Download File\" and \"Download Image\" permission flag are able to download files and images, respectively.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To download the image being viewed to your computer </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the image name\n\n 4. Click on **Download** in the dropdown menu\n\n 5. If prompted, select a location to save the downloaded file\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If the image is a <a href=\"../../repository/data-ingestion/#multi-file-images\">multi-file image format</a> the Download entry will be replaced with <b>Download As</b>. Hover over it to expand that menu, then select an archive file format in the expanded menu.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Deleting an Image\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  Only users with the \"Delete File\" permission flag are able to move images to the <a href=\"../../repository/trash/\">Trash</a>.\n</div></div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To move the currently open and selected image to the Trash </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click on the image name\n\n 4. Click on **Send to Trash** in the dropdown menu\n\n 5. Click on the **Yes** button to confirm\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to move an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a> to Trash, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Editing Snapshots\n\nAny [snapshot](/docs/viewer/snapshots/) associated with the current image will be listed in the Snapshots section of the Image Information panel.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To navigate to the location of a snapshot in the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Scroll down to the **Snapshots** section\n\n 4. Select a snapshot by clicking on its thumbnail to reveal more options, then click on the **Open** button. Alternatively, you may double click on the thumbnail\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To download a snapshot as an image </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Scroll down to the **Snapshots** section\n\n 4. Select a snapshot by clicking on its thumbnail to reveal more options, then click on the **Download** button\n\n 5. Adjust preferences\n    1. (Optional) Show/hide image annotations via the show annotations toggle\n    2. (Optional) Enable the show label toggle to reveal a text overlay\n    3. (Optional) Enable the show scale bar toggle to reveal a scale bar\n\n 6. Click on the **Download** menu\n\n 7. Adjust preferences such as\n    - **Size**: adjust the width or height to specify the desired size\n    - **File type**: select the desired format from the dropdown menu\n    - **White Background**: Enable to use a white background instead of the default black\n\n 8. Click on the **Download** button\n\n 9. If prompted, select a location to save the downloaded file\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To rename a snapshot </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Scroll down to the **Snapshots** section\n\n 4. Select a snapshot by clicking on its thumbnail to reveal more options, then click on the **Rename** button\n\n 5. Edit the name in the popup menu\n\n 6. Click on the **Rename** button\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to modify an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete a snapshot </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Scroll down to the **Snapshots** section\n\n 4. Select a snapshot by clicking on its thumbnail to reveal more options, then click on the **Delete** button\n\n 5. In the popup dialog, click on the **Yes** button to confirm\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   If you attempt to modify an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/viewer/information-panel"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Overview Tool","description":"overview tool"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Overview Tool\ndescription: overview tool\norder: 16\nsection: Viewer\n---\n\n\n# Overview Tool\n\n<br />\n\nThe Image overview provides a thumbnail of the image and contains an embedded indicator for the region of the image currently shown on the Viewer. The overview tool also displays an overlaid heatmap of all the regions viewed by the logged-in user at various scale factors.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To maximize the overview tool </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on the image to reveal the ![Show](../images/viewer-overview-show.svg) **Overview** button at the bottom right of the panel\n\n 2. Click on the ![Show](../images/viewer-overview-show.svg) **Overview** button\n\n</details>\n\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To minimize the overview tool </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Hide](../images/viewer-overview-hide.svg) button to the top left of the overview tool\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Current Region\n\nThe current region that is being displayed in the viewport is represented by the green rectangle on the image overview panel. You can also click on the overview to move the viewport to that location.\n\n\n## Heatmap\n\nThe heatmap automatically tracks all the regions viewed by the logged-in user. The resolution of the heatmap is limited to the resolution of the thumbnail image used in the overview tool.\n\nThe color retained by the heatmap in a given area is the highest magnification viewed at the location. The colors of the map represent the scale at which different regions have been viewed:\n\n- Blue ≥ 10%\n- Yellow ≥ 20%\n- Purple ≥ 40%\n- Light blue ≥ 60%\n- Green ≥ 80%\n- Red ≥ 98%\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle the visibility of the heatmap </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on the image to reveal the ![Show](../images/viewer-overview-show.svg) **Overview** button at the bottom right of the panel\n\n 2. Click on the ![Show](../images/viewer-overview-show.svg) **Overview** button\n\n 3. Click on the ![Overview](../images/viewer-overview-globe.svg) button to the top left of the overview tool\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To reset the heatmap </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Help](../images/viewer-nav-help.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Help panel\n\n 3. Scroll down to the end of the panel and click on **Clear Heatmap**\n\n 4. Click on the **OK** button to confirm selection\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/viewer/overview-tool"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Overview","description":"overview"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Overview\ndescription: overview\norder: 14\nsection: Viewer\n---\n\n\n# Overview\n\n<br />\n\nWhen you click on an image in a folder, PathcoreFlow will open the Viewer. The Viewer is optimized for viewing whole slide images and supports a range of [image formats](/docs/overview/supported-formats/#supported-image-formats) from many current and former scanner vendors. The Viewer provides a consistent set of tools and behaviors across all supported images. Generally speaking, the Viewer supports the following data types:\n\n- RGB (e.g., brightfield images)\n- Single channel grayscale\n- Multi-channel grayscale (e.g., multispectral, fluorescence, etc.)\n\n\n## Sub-images\n\nSome image files may contain multiple fields of view spanning a larger scan area (like a collage). These image files are more complex than traditional WSI because a file contains multiple images (a.k.a., sub-images), each of which may have different scanning properties.\n\nWhile the Viewer treats each file as a single image, it allows the user to configure some of the properties of sub-images independently (e.g., focal plane and render settings).\n\nIf an image file contains sub-images that are separated by empty space (i.e., areas that are not scanned), the background color is automatically chosen, often to match the approach in the image vendor's native viewer.\n\nThe Viewer seamlessly handles overlapping sub-images and allows the highest available magnification to be used across all sub-images.\n","slug":"docs/viewer/overview"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Share Links Panel","description":"share links panel"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Share Links Panel\ndescription: share links panel\norder: 24\nsection: Viewer\n---\n\n\n# Share Links Panel\n\n<br />\n\nThe Share Links panel displays a list of all of the share links for the currently selected image in the Viewer, as well as tags describing the properties of each of those share links.\n\nSee the [Share Links](/docs/share-links/) section for more details on creating and managing share links.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To toggle the visibility of the Share Links panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Click on the ![Share image](../images/viewer-nav-share.svg) button in the left sidebar to open the Share Links panel\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To resize the Share Links panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Share image](../images/viewer-nav-share.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click and drag the right border of the panel to resize it\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/viewer/share-links-panel"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Snapshots","description":"snapshots"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Snapshots\ndescription: snapshots\norder: 23\nsection: Viewer\n---\n\n\n# Snapshots\n\n<br />\n\nSnapshots are designed for tracking and exporting regions of interest from images. The region of interest contained in a snapshot can be decorated with annotations, a label, and a scale bar prior to being exported as a PNG, JPEG, TIFF, or PDF file. These capabilities make it convenient to use snapshots, instead of image editing software, to prepare ROIs for publications or reports. For more advanced cases, where multiple images or ROIs are needed, consider using the [Figure Maker](/docs/viewer/figure-maker/).\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  Though snapshots are similar to rectangular annotations, they are distinct from geometric annotations, have different properties and are typically used for exporting annotated regions for reports.\n</div>\n\n\n## Creating Snapshots\n\nUse the snapshot tool to define a rectangular region of interest. The bounding box of a snapshot is recorded as metadata, making it visible from the [Image Information Panel](/docs/viewer/information-panel/) and from the Metadata tab in the [Folder Listing](/docs/repository/folder-listing/).\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To create a snapshot </summary>\n\n 1. From within the Viewer, right-click on an image to open up the annotation ring\n\n 2. Select the ![Snapshot](../images/viewer-snapshot.svg) tool\n\n 3. Hold and drag the frame to capture a region of interest\n\n 4. (Optional) In the popup dialog, click on the first line of text (default: \"Untitled Snapshot\") and provide a name for the snapshot\n\n 5. (Optional) In the popup dialog, click on the second line of text (default: \"No description\") and provide a description for the snapshot\n\n\n <div class=\"info\">\n   The bounding box of a snapshot cannot be edited after it has been drawn.\n </div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To navigate to an existing snapshot </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Scroll down to the **Snapshots** section\n\n 4. Select a snapshot by clicking on its thumbnail to reveal more options, then click the **Open** button. Alternatively, you may double click on the thumbnail\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Downloading Snapshots\n\nThe contents of a snapshot can be exported as a common image format (PNG, JPEG, TIFF, or PDF) for use in presentations or other documents. There are multiple locations where existing snapshots can be found and downloaded.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To download a snapshot from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. From within the Viewer, locate the snapshot on the image\n\n 2. Click on the snapshot title to reveal a dialog\n\n 3. Click on the **Download** button in the popup dialog\n\n 4. Adjust preferences\n    1. (Optional) Show/hide image annotations via the **Show annotations** toggle\n    2. (Optional) Enable the **Show label** toggle to reveal a text overlay\n    3. (Optional) Enable the **Show scale bar** toggle to reveal a scale bar\n\n 5. Click on the **Download** menu\n\n 6. Adjust preferences such as\n    - **Size**: adjust the width or height to specify the desired size\n    - **File type**: select the desired format from the dropdown menu\n    - **White Background**: Enable to use a white background instead of the default black\n\n 7. Click on the **Download** button\n\n 8. If prompted, select a location to save the downloaded file\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To download a snapshot from the Image Information panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Scroll down to the **Snapshots** section\n\n 4. Select a snapshot by clicking on its thumbnail to reveal more options\n\n 5. Click on the **Download** button\n\n 6. Adjust preferences\n    1. (Optional) Show/hide image annotations via the **Show annotations** toggle\n    2. (Optional) Enable the **Show label** toggle to reveal a text overlay\n    3. (Optional) Enable the **Show scale bar** toggle to reveal a scale bar\n\n 7. Click on the **Download** menu\n\n 8. Adjust preferences such as\n    - **Size**: adjust the width or height to specify the desired size\n    - **File type**: select the desired format from the dropdown menu\n    - **White Background**: Enable to use a white background instead of the default black\n\n 9. Click on the **Download** button\n\n 10. If prompted, select a location to save the downloaded file\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Snapshot Markup\n\nWhen downloading a snapshot, certain markup tools can be used to annotate the region of interest prior to download. The markup settings are not saved and must be configured each time the snapshot download dialog is activated.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To include image annotations on a downloaded snapshot </summary>\n\n 1. Enable the **Show annotations** toggle in the snapshot download dialog (all annotations visible on the image will be included)\n\n 2. To hide some annotations, ensure they are hidden prior to launching the download dialog\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To include a label on a downloaded snapshot </summary>\n\n 1. Enable the **Show label** toggle in the snapshot download dialog\n\n 2. (Optional) Adjust the label text in the field below the toggle (default text will be the image name)\n\n 3. (Optional) Adjust the location of the label by clicking one of the four corners in the control to the left of **Alignment**\n\n 4. (Optional) Adjust the text color by clicking in the colored box to the left of **Foreground**, then selecting a color\n\n 5. (Optional) Adjust the text background color by clicking in the colored box to the left of **Background**, then selecting a color\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To include a scale bar on a downloaded snapshot </summary>\n\n 1. Enable the **Show scale bar** toggle in the snapshot download dialog\n\n 2. (Optional) Adjust the location of the scale bar by clicking one of the four corners in the control to the left of **Alignment**\n\n 3. (Optional) Adjust the text and scale bar color by clicking in the colored box to the left of **Foreground**, then selecting a color\n\n 4. (Optional) Adjust the **Show measurement text** toggle to show or hide the measurement\n\n 5. (Optional) Adjust the **Show border** toggle to show or hide a border around the text and scale bar\n\n 6. (Optional) Adjust the **Automatic length** toggle to determine the size of the scale bar\n    - When enabled the size is determined automatically\n    - When disabled the user can specify the size of the scale bar and select a unit of measurement from the dropdown menu\n\n 7. (Optional) Select the location of the measurement text relative to the scale bar from the **Text Alignment** dropdown menu (auto, left, center, or right)\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Snapshot Properties\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  If you attempt to modify an item which is governed by a <a href=\"../../settings/policies/#reason-for-change-tracking\">reason for change tracking policy</a>, you will be required to provide a reason for the change.\n</div></div>\n\n### Snapshot Name\n\nThe name is a single line text field that supports unicode characters. The name can be changed from within the Viewer or from the Image Information panel.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To rename a snapshot from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. From within the Viewer, locate the snapshot on the image\n\n 2. Click on the snapshot title to reveal a dialog\n\n 3. Click on the first line of text in the popup dialog (default: \"Untitled Snapshot\")\n\n 4. Provide a name or edit the existing text\n\n 5. Press the **Enter** key or click away from the textbox to save your changes\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To rename a snapshot from the Image Information panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Scroll down to the **Snapshots** section\n\n 4. Select a snapshot by clicking on its thumbnail to reveal more options\n\n 5. Click on the **Rename** button\n\n 6. Provide a name or edit the existing text in the popup dialog\n\n 7. Click on the **Rename** button or press the **Enter** key to save your changes\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Snapshot Description\n\nThe description is a multiline text field that supports unicode characters. The description can be changed from within the Viewer. Enter new lines by pressing **Shift + Enter**.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the description of a snapshot from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. From within the Viewer, locate the snapshot on the image\n\n 2. Click on the snapshot title to reveal a dialog\n\n 3. Click on the second line of text in the popup dialog (default: \"No description\")\n\n 4. Provide a description or edit the existing text\n\n 5. Press the **Enter** key or click away from the textbox to save your changes\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Snapshot Visibility\n\nSnapshots are visible on the image by default once created. If you need to declutter the image, you may hide all snapshots at once.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the visibility of all snapshots </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Scroll down to the **Snapshots** section\n\n 4. Click on the ![Eye](../images/viewer-panel-eye.svg) button, adjacent to the **Snapshots** title, to toggle visibility for all snapshots\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Deleting Snapshots\n\nSnapshots can be deleted from within the Viewer or from the Image Information panel.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete a snapshot from within the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. From within the Viewer, locate the snapshot on the image\n\n 2. Click on the snapshot title to reveal a dialog\n\n 3. Click on the **Download** button in the popup dialog\n\n 4. Click on the **OK** button to confirm\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To delete a snapshot from the Image Information panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Info](../images/viewer-nav-info.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Scroll down to the **Snapshots** section\n\n 4. Select a snapshot by clicking on its thumbnail to reveal more options\n\n 4. Click on the **Delete** button\n\n 5. Click on the **Yes** button to confirm\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/viewer/snapshots"},{"frontmatter":{"title":"Split View","description":"split view"},"rawBody":"---\ntitle: Split View\ndescription: split view\norder: 26\nsection: Viewer\n---\n\n\n# Split View\n##### \\[BioPharma] [Research+]\n\nSplit View allows multiple images to be opened simultaneously in the Viewer. Each image is confined to a dedicated panel within the viewing area and retains all the usual capabilities that are available when viewing a single image (e.g., annotating, panning, and zooming). Various layout options, such as side-by-side, vertical stacks, and 2-D grids, are available to aid the comparisons, as well as a range of functionality for image synchronization and panel management.\n\n\n## Viewing Multiple Images\n\nSplit View can be activated from various areas in the application; in general, wherever it is possible to select multiple images. Any tables that support right-click context menus will provide options for launching the Viewer with multiple images simultaneously. For instance, the [Folder Listing](/docs/repository/folder-listing/) table in the Repository, the [Search Results](/docs/search/search-overview/) table, and the Viewer's [Browse Folder Panel](/docs/viewer/browse-folder-panel/) can be used to select and view multiple images.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  Activating Split View from outside the Viewer will result in a 2-D grid layout with the most compact square dimensions for the number of images selected (e.g., 1x1, 2x2, 3x3, etc.). To have more control over image layout, activate Split View from the Viewer's <a href=\"../browse-folder-panel/\">Browse Folder Panel</a>.\n</div></div>\n\n<br />\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  To display the context menu on a mobile device, tap and hold on an item.\n</div></div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To launch Split View from the Repository </summary>\n\n 1. Navigate to any folder in the Repository (click on the ![Folder](../images/nav-folder.svg) **Repository** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then navigate to a folder)\n\n 2. Select one or more images by holding the **Ctrl** key (on Windows) or **&#x2318; / Command** key (on macOS) key and clicking on them\n\n 3. Bring up the context menu for the item (or items)\n\n 4. Click on **View Images**\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To launch Split View from Search </summary>\n\n 1. Perform a search (click on the ![Search](../images/nav-search.svg) **Search** button from the [Navigation Menu](/docs/repository/repository-overview/#navigation-menu) then execute a [basic query](/docs/search/search-overview/#basic-queries) or [advanced query](/docs/search/search-overview/#advanced-queries))\n\n 2. Select one or more images by holding the **Ctrl** key (on Windows) or **&#x2318; / Command** key (on macOS) key and clicking on them\n\n 3. Bring up the context menu for the item (or items)\n\n 4. Click on **View Images**\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To activate Split View from within the Viewer (by adding new images) </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Folder](../images/viewer-nav-folder.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Select one or more images by holding the **Ctrl** key (on Windows) or **&#x2318; / Command** key (on macOS) key and clicking on them\n\n 4. Bring up the context menu for the item (or items)\n\n 5. Hover over **Add to View** in the dropdown menu to expand that menu\n\n 6. In the expanded menu, select the method for insertion into the existing layout\n    - **Append as Row** inserts selection as a new row at the bottom of the layout\n    - **Append to Bottom** inserts selection as new row(s) at the bottom of the layout, wrapping as required to maintain the grid width\n    - **Append as Column** inserts selection as a new column at the right side of the layout\n    - **Append to Right** inserts selection as new column(s) at the right side of the layout, wrapping as required to maintain the grid height\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   Consider the <b>Replace View</b> option in step 5 if the selected images should replace the existing image(s) in the Viewer.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To activate Split View from within the Viewer (by replacing existing images) </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Folder](../images/viewer-nav-folder.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Select one or more images by holding the **Ctrl** key (on Windows) or **&#x2318; / Command** key (on macOS) key and clicking on them\n\n 4. Right-click on any of the selected images\n\n 5. Hover over **Replace View** in the dropdown menu to expand that menu\n\n 6. (Optional) Enable the **Randomize** toggle to add the images in a random order. Otherwise they are added in the order in which they were selected\n\n 7. In the expanded menu, select the desired method of replacing the images\n    - **Grid** will arrange the images in the smallest possible square grid (e.g., 1x1, 2x2, 3x3, etc.)\n    - **Side-by-side** will create a single row of images\n    - **Stacked** will create a single column of images\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Panel Layout\n\nWhen viewing multiple images, the Viewer is divided into a 2-D grid with rows and columns. By default, the grid is regular and each panel (or cell) has the same size. The grid layout can be customized to create an irregular grid, where a panel can span multiple rows and/or columns. There are convenient options for creating three types of regular grids: side-by-side, vertically stacked, and 2-D grid.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the number of rows or columns </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Layout](../images/viewer-topbar-grid.svg) button in the Viewer top bar to display the Layout dialog\n\n 2. From the **Rows** field, increase the number to append new rows to the bottom of the layout or decrease the number to remove empty rows from the layout\n\n 3. From the **Columns** field, increase the number to append new columns to the right of the layout or decrease the number to remove empty columns from the layout\n\n 4. (Optional) You can change the **Cell Aspect Ratio** between Fit, 16:9, 4:3, and 1:1\n\n 5. (Optional) You can adjust the **Grid Gap** slider to add more separation between the images\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To add an empty row </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on any image adjacent to where you want to add the row, to reveal the toolbar at the top left of the panel\n\n 2. Click on the ![Expand Toolbar](../images/viewer-toolbar-expand.svg) button to expand the toolbar if necessary\n\n 3. Click on the ![More](../images/viewer-toolbar-more.svg) menu\n\n 4. From the dropdown menu, select **Insert Row Above** to add an empty row above the current image, or **Insert Row Below** to add an empty row below it\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To add an empty column </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on any image adjacent to where you want to add the column, to reveal the toolbar at the top left of the panel\n\n 2. Click on the ![Expand Toolbar](../images/viewer-toolbar-expand.svg) button to expand the toolbar if necessary\n\n 3. Click on the ![More](../images/viewer-toolbar-more.svg) menu\n\n 4. From the dropdown menu, select **Insert Column Before** to add an empty column to the left of the current image, or **Insert Column After** to add an empty column to the right\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To remove any row or column from the layout </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on any image from the row/column to be deleted, to reveal the toolbar at the top left of the panel\n\n 2. Click on the ![Expand Toolbar](../images/viewer-toolbar-expand.svg) button to expand the toolbar if necessary\n\n 3. Click on the ![More](../images/viewer-toolbar-more.svg) menu\n\n 4. Select **Remove Row** or **Remove Column** from the dropdown menu\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To move an image panel </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on the image you want to move\n\n 2. Click on the ![Move](../images/viewer-toolbar-move.svg) handle at the top right corner of the image and drag it to the new location\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To create an irregular grid (by changing the span of panels) </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on the image you want to span across multiple panels\n\n 2. Click on the ![Resize](../images/viewer-toolbar-resize-handle.svg) handle at the bottom right corner of the image and drag it to expand into panel(s) to the right and/or below the current panel\n\n</details>\n\n### Panel Aspect Ratio\n\nThe aspect of the ratio of the panels can be customized to any of the following values: 16:9, 4:3 and 1:1.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the aspect ratio of panels </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Layout](../images/viewer-topbar-grid.svg) button in the Viewer top bar to display the Layout dialog\n\n 2. Click on the dropdown menu next to **Cell Aspect Ratio**\n\n 3. In the dropdown menu, select the desired aspect ratio\n    - **Fit** will adapt the panels' size to attempt to fit all of them on the screen\n    - **16:9** will enforce a 16:9 aspect ratio for the panels, even if scrolling is required to see all rows and/or columns\n    - **4:3** will enforce a 4:3 aspect ratio for the panels, even if scrolling is required to see all rows and/or columns\n    - **1:1** will force panels to remain square\n\n 4. (Optional) Enable the **Maximize Panels** toggle to expand all panels horizontally to fill the screen, rather than fitting the largest number of panels on screen at a time. This option is only available when aspect ratio is set to a value other than **Fit**\n\n\n <div class=\"info\"><div>\n   Panel maximization can be used to control the width of panels. When <b>Maximize Panels</b> is enabled, panel widths are maximized such that the available width on the screen is fully utilized. As a result of the panel aspect ratio setting, panel maximization may reduce the number of panels that are visible on the screen at one time. When <b>Maximize Panels</b> is disabled, the width of panels are reduced (to a minimum size) to ensure the most number of panels are displayed on the screen at one time (without the need to scroll).\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n\n### Panel Spacing\n\nThe spacing between each panel (i.e., the separation between panels) can be customized.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the spacing between panels </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Layout](../images/viewer-topbar-grid.svg) button in the Viewer top bar to display the Layout dialog\n\n 2. Adjust the **Grid Gap** slider to add space separating the panels\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Panel Controls\n\nSplit View divides the available on-screen space for the image Viewer into one or more panels, depending on the number of images that have been chosen. While each panel can be independently controlled, only one panel can be controlled at any given point in time.\n\n<div class=\"info\"><div>\n  The selected (controllable) image is denoted with a blue border around its panel and a blue dot adjacent to the file in the <a href=\"../browse-folder-panel/\">Browse Folder Panel</a> of the Viewer. Images that appear in other panels are denoted with a gray dot in the Browse Folder panel.\n</div></div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To select an image for navigation </summary>\n\n 1. Click into any panel to activate it. Note the blue border that appears around the active panel\n\n 2. Use the standard [Basic Controls](/docs/viewer/basic-controls/) to navigate the image\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To view the slide label for a panel </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on the image to reveal the toolbar at the top left of the panel\n\n 2. Click on the ![Expand Toolbar](../images/viewer-toolbar-expand.svg) button to expand the toolbar if necessary\n\n 3. Hover over the ![Info](../images/viewer-toolbar-info.svg) icon in the toolbar to see the slide label for that image\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To enable the rotation tool for the selected panel </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on the image to reveal the toolbar at the top left of the panel\n\n 2. Click on the ![Expand Toolbar](../images/viewer-toolbar-expand.svg) button to expand the toolbar if necessary\n\n 3. Click on the ![Rotate](../images/viewer-toolbar-rotate.svg) button in the toolbar to show or hide the rotation tool\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To add an image to an empty panel </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the **Add an image** button in the center of an empty panel\n\n 2. In the **Select Cell Image** dialog that pops up, use either the Repository browser or Search to find the desired image\n\n 3. Click on the image to add it to the panel\n\n</details>\n\n### Color Management\n\nFor RGB images, the color correction profile of an image in a panel can be adjusted. The capabilities that are available in the Viewer are also available in Split View panels. See [Color Management](/docs/viewer/basic-controls/#color-management) for more details.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To change the color management profile for the selected panel </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on the image to reveal the toolbar at the top left of the panel\n\n 2. Click on the ![Expand Toolbar](../images/viewer-toolbar-expand.svg) button to expand the toolbar if necessary\n\n 3. Click on the ![Palette](../images/viewer-toolbar-palette.svg) button in the toolbar to reveal the color management dialog\n\n 4. Select one of the available ICC color profiles\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Panel Contents\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To remove an image from a panel </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on the image to reveal the toolbar at the top left of the panel\n\n 2. Click on the ![Expand Toolbar](../images/viewer-toolbar-expand.svg) button to expand the toolbar if necessary\n\n 3. Click on the ![More](../images/viewer-toolbar-more.svg) menu\n\n 4. Select **Remove Image** from the dropdown menu. This will leave an empty panel in its place\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To replace the image within a panel </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on the image to reveal the toolbar at the top left of the panel\n\n 2. Click on the ![Expand Toolbar](../images/viewer-toolbar-expand.svg) button to expand the toolbar if necessary\n\n 3. Click on the ![More](../images/viewer-toolbar-more.svg) menu\n\n 4. Select **Change Image** from the dropdown menu\n\n 5. In the **Select Cell Image** dialog that pops up, use either the Repository browser or Search to find the desired image\n\n 6. Click on the image to add it to the panel\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Single Panel Mode\n\nActivating Split View reduces the screen area available for each image in the panel. If more screen area is required, it's possible to temporarily expand one panel to return to a single image configuration or to open any of any of panels in a new tab (in single panel mode).\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To reset the Viewer to single image mode </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Folder](../images/viewer-nav-folder.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Right-click on any image in the Browse Folder panel\n\n 4. Click on **Replace View** in the dropdown menu\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To open one image in a new tab (in single image mode) </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on the image to reveal the toolbar at the top left of the panel\n\n 2. Click on the ![Expand Toolbar](../images/viewer-toolbar-expand.svg) button to expand the toolbar if necessary\n\n 3. Click on the ![More](../images/viewer-toolbar-more.svg) menu\n\n 4. Select **Open in Viewer** from the dropdown menu\n\n\n <div class=\"warning\"><div>\n   Any work performed in the new tab (e.g., new annotations created) will not be reflected in the original tab until a refresh (keyboard shortcut <b>F5</b>) is performed.\n </div></div>\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To expand a single image panel </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on the image to reveal the toolbar at the top left of the panel\n\n 2. Click on the ![Expand Toolbar](../images/viewer-toolbar-expand.svg) button to expand the toolbar if necessary\n\n 3. Click on the ![Fill View](../images/viewer-toolbar-fill-view.svg) button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To minimize an expanded panel (to return to Split View mode) </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on the image to reveal the toolbar at the top left of the panel\n\n 2. Click on the ![Expand Toolbar](../images/viewer-toolbar-expand.svg) button to expand the toolbar if necessary\n\n 3. Click on the ![Shrink View](../images/viewer-toolbar-shrink-view.svg) button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To replace an image in the view with an image from the Browse Folder panel </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Folder](../images/viewer-nav-folder.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click and drag the desired image onto the panel containing the image to be replaced\n\n 4. In the **Replace Image** dialog that pops up, click on the **Yes** button\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Synchronization\n\nImages can be synchronized so that panning and magnification actions are performed simultaneously on all images in the Viewer which have been marked as \"synchronized\".\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To synchronize specific images </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on the image to reveal the toolbar at the top left of the panel\n\n 2. Click on the ![Lock](../images/viewer-toolbar-lock-open.svg) button\n\n 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each image to synchronize\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To synchronize a row or column of images </summary>\n\n 1. Hover or click on any image from the row/column to be synchronized, to reveal the toolbar at the top left of the panel\n\n 2. Click on the ![Down Arrow](../images/viewer-toolbar-arrow-down.svg) button next to the ![Lock](../images/viewer-toolbar-lock-open.svg) button\n\n 3. Select **Synchronize Row** or **Synchronize Column** from the dropdown menu\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To synchronize all images in the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the ![Lock](../images/viewer-panel-lock-open.svg) button in the Viewer top bar to display the synchronize menu\n\n 2. Select **Synchronize All** from the dropdown menu\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Magnification\n\nThe magnification of the currently selected image can be applied to all synchronized images or to all images in the Viewer.\n\nIf you zoom an image that is part of a synchronized set, the change in magnification is also applied to other images in the set. When an image is pushed past its native resolution, the Viewer applies a [digital zoom](/docs/viewer/basic-controls/#digital-zoom).\n\n<div class=\"info\">\n  When the digital zoom is applied as a result of zooming another image in the synchronized set, there is no restriction enforced. In this manner it is possible to attain a digital zoom greater than the 400% limit for a single image.\n</div>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To apply the current magnification to all images in the Viewer </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the current image magnification in the Viewer top bar\n\n 2. Select **Apply to All Slides** from the dropdown menu\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To apply the current magnification to synchronized images </summary>\n\n 1. Click on the current image magnification in the Viewer top bar\n\n 2. Select **Apply to Synchronized Slides** from the dropdown menu\n\n</details>\n\n\n## Drag and Drop\n\nFor convenience, images in the [Browse Folder Panel](/docs/viewer/browse-folder-panel/) can be dragged on to the Viewer, to either replace the images on display or to add new images to the Viewer.\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To replace a single image in Viewer using drag and drop </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Folder](../images/viewer-nav-folder.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Click and drag a single image onto the panel containing the image to be replaced\n\n 4. In the **Replace Image** dialog that pops up, click on the **Yes** button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To add multiple images to the Viewer using drag and drop </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Folder](../images/viewer-nav-folder.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Select one or more images by holding the **Ctrl** key (on Windows) or **&#x2318; / Command** key (on macOS) key and clicking on them\n\n 4. Click and drag the images onto the panel containing the image to be replaced\n\n 5. In the **Placement** dialog that pops up, select **Add to View**\n\n 6. Select the method for insertion from the **Append** dropdown menu\n    - **as Row** inserts selection as a new row at the bottom of the layout\n    - **as Column** inserts selection as a new column at the right side of the layout\n    - **to Bottom** inserts selection as new row(s) at the bottom of the layout, wrapping as required to maintain the grid width\n    - **to Right** inserts selection as new column(s) at the right side of the layout, wrapping as required to maintain the grid height\n\n 7. (Optional) Enable the **Randomize** toggle to add the images in a random order. Otherwise they are added in the order in which they were selected\n\n 8. Click on the **Add Images** button\n\n</details>\n\n<details>\n\n <summary> To replace the Viewer content with multiple images using drag and drop </summary>\n\n 1. If the left sidebar is not displayed, toggle it by clicking on the **Menu &gt;** button at the bottom left of the Viewer\n\n 2. Hover or click on the ![Folder](../images/viewer-nav-folder.svg) button in the left sidebar\n\n 3. Select one or more images by holding the **Ctrl** key (on Windows) or **&#x2318; / Command** key (on macOS) key and clicking on them\n\n 4. Click and drag the images onto the Viewer\n\n 5. In the **Placement** dialog that pops up, select **Replace View**\n\n 6. Select the desired layout from the dropdown menu\n    - **Grid** will arrange the images in the smallest possible square grid (e.g., 1x1, 2x2, 3x3, etc.)\n    - **Side-by-side** will create a single row of images\n    - **Stacked** will create a single column of images\n\n 7. (Optional) Enable the **Randomize** toggle to add the images in a random order. Otherwise they are added in the order in which they were selected\n\n 8. Click on the **Add Images** button\n\n</details>\n","slug":"docs/viewer/split-view"}]},"site":{"siteMetadata":{"showSearch":true,"showVersions":true}}}}